Guia de linguagem para aprender inglês

O material didático é de uso exclusivo e restrito ao processo didático-pedagógico do aluno: Felipe Augusto Guglielmin | CPF 45581475890
fag.96@hotmail.com | 551148167032 | Proibida a reprodução total ou parcial, sem autorização. Lei nº 9610/98.
LANGUAGE
GUIDE
O inglês da Wise Up
vai levar você a
descobrir novos
horizontes pessoais
e profissionais.
Horizontes com infinitas possibilidades.
Este é um guia para uma viagem incrível,
com experiências que vão te levar a
novos universos, expandindo sua mente,
sua visão e o seu desejo de ir além.
AUTOR:
Sérgio Barreto
COAUTORAS:
Mylene Guedes e Natasha Nunes

EDITORAS:
Fátima Machado e Amanda Campos
GERENTE DE PESQUISA E DESENVOLVIMENTO:
Márcia Frantz
EQUIPE DE PESQUISA E DESENVOLVIMENTO:
Edu Rocha, Felipe Ceschin, Gilliatt Moreira

Neto, Glaucio Santos, Gustavo Telles, Hérica
Rodrigues, Maria Cristina Carmo, Ruth
Gaynor, Sonia Alves e Tassia Trajano
ILUSTRADORES:
Estúdio Pinta Giribita

DESIGNERS GRÁFICOS:
Bruna M. Fraga, Deborah Naomi Kosaka,

Eduardo Neves, Gabrielle Menezes
e Willian Lopes
DIAGRAMADORES:
Deborah Naomi Kosaka e Willian Lopes

PROJETO GRÁFICO:
Patrícia Figuerôa Knack

ARTE-FINALISTA:
Anderson Oliveira
PRODUTORA GRÁFICA:
Debora Oliveira
PRODUTORA EDITORIAL:
Ana Freitas
PRESIDENTE:
Flávio Augusto da Silva

PRODUÇÃO marchello74 / Shutterstock.com
TODAS AS IMAGENS DO SHUTTERSTOCK
Natali Glado / Shutterstock.com

photo.ua / Shutterstock.com
Hung Chung Chih / Shutterstock.com
Kathy Hutchins / Shutterstock.com
ISBN:
Bloomicon / Shutterstock.com
978-85-8187-049-6 Pius Lee / Shutterstock.com
Sean Pavone / Shutterstock.com
oneinchpunch / Shutterstock.com
Ivan Kurmyshov / Shutterstock.com
Luciano Mortula - LGM / Shutterstock.com
themorningglory / Shutterstock.com
Sviat Studio / Shutterstock.com
Thomas La Mela / Shutterstock.com
Gino Santa Maria / Shutterstock.com
PhuuchaayHYBRID / Shutterstock.com
littleny / Shutterstock.com
Resul Muslu / Shutterstock.com
lembi / Shutterstock.com
O Language Guide é dedicado a todos
alunos que decidiram, em algum momento,
aprender uma língua estrangeira. Este guia
pretende honrar sua dedicação e esforço
como estudantes de uma nova língua.
Eu jamais teria pensado em criar este
guia se não fosse por vocês.
SÉRGIO BARRETO
AUTOR E DIRETOR DE PESQUISA
E DESENVOLVIMENTO
O Language Guide da Wise Up busca proporcionar aos alunos
explicações claras, simples e objetivas sobre tópicos gramaticais
e o uso da língua inglesa. Cada tópico é acompanhado por um vídeo
na plataforma online da Wise Up que contextualiza o tópico estudado.
Os tópicos podem conter as seguintes seções:
• Use and Structure
Uso – Quando o tópico ou estrutura é utilizado?
Estrutura – Como funciona a estrutura? Como as frases ou orações são formadas?
• Stay Alert
Características ou pontos específicos referentes ao tópico estudado que precisam
de maior atenção
• Examples in Context
Pequenos diálogos que contextualizam o tópico linguístico apresentado em um nível
discursivo
• Common Mistakes
Erros comuns que os alunos cometem ao usar as estruturas ou tópicos linguísticos
apresentados
CONTENTS BASIC 1
L E S S O N 1
Adjectives p 18
Indefinite Articles p 19
Greetings and Farewells p 22
Verb To Be + Subject Pronouns p 23
L E S S O N 2
Demonstrative Pronouns p 24
Question Words: Who and What p 25
Verb To Be: Review p 27
Verb To Have p 29
L E S S O N 3
Question Words: How old p 32
Verbs To Be, To Like, To Work, To Live, To Have p 33
Cardinal Numbers, Family Members, and Pets p 36
L E S S O N 4
Addresses p 38
Adjectives to Describe Places p 38
Prepositions of Time and Place p 40
Question Words: Where and When p 42
R E V I E W
How to Make a Personal Presentation p 44
L E S S O N 5
Articles: Definite and Indefinite p 47
Connectors: And, But, and So p 48
Imperatives p 50
Likes and Dislikes p 52
Expressing Possession: Possessive Adjectives p 53
L E S S O N 6
Imperatives p 54
Question Words: Review p 55
Expressing Time p 56
Question Word: What Time p 57
BASIC 2
L E S S O N 1
Articles: Definite, Indefinite, and Zero p 60
Plural Forms p 64
Simple Present p 66
L E S S O N 2
Adjectives for Personal Description p 68
Demonstrative Pronouns p 70
Present Continuous p 72
Simple Present p 74
L E S S O N 3
Adverbs of Frequency p 76
Present Continuous: Spelling Rules p 78
Question Words: Review p 80
Question Word: How Often p 83
L E S S O N 4
Adjectives to Describe Places p 85
Intensifiers p 88
Simple Present vs. Present Continuous p 90
There + To Be p 92
R E V I E W
How to Talk About Your Schedule p 93
L E S S O N 5
Basic Connectors: And, But, So p 95
Expressing Possession: Review p 97
Imperatives p 99
Likes and Dislikes p 101
Making Requests p 103
L E S S O N 6
Making Requests: Review p 105
Possessive Pronouns p 106
Question Words: Review + Question Word: Whose p 108
Expressing Time p 110
BASIC 3
L E S S O N 1
Definite, Indefinite, and Zero Articles p 114
Plural Forms p 116
Regular Verbs and Verb To Be p 118
Time Expressions About the Past p 119
L E S S O N 2
p 120
Simple Present vs. Present Continuous
How Much and How Many, Numbers, and Some and Any p 123
Irregular Verbs p 126
Time Expressions About the Past and the Present p 128
L E S S O N 3
Countable and Uncountable Nouns and Expressions p 130
Object Pronouns p 132
Shopping p 133
Simple Past: Review p 136
L E S S O N 4
Expressing Quantity p 138
How Old, How Often, How Far,
How Much, and How Many p 140
There + To Be: Present and Past p 142
Used To p 144
R E V I E W
How to Talk About Your Background p 145
L E S S O N 5
Basic Connectors: And, But, So, Or p 146
Giving and Asking Opinion p 148
Giving Directions p 149
Making Requests and Offers p 150
Question Word: Why p 152
L E S S O N 6
Giving and Asking Opinion p 153
Expressing Possession p 154
Question Words: How and Why p 155
Used To vs. Simple Past p 157
INTERMED IATE 1
L E S S O N 1
Giving Opinion: Agreeing and Disagreeing/
Asking and Introducing Opinion p 160
Giving Opinion: Fillers and Expressions p 161
Modal Verb: Will p 163
Time Expressions About the Future p 164
L E S S O N 2
Connectors: When and While p 165
Giving Opinion: Being Subtle and Emphatic p 166
Past Continuous p 169
Time Expressions in a Narrative p 170
L E S S O N 3
Expressing Quantity: Review p 172
Modal Verbs: Can and Could p 174
Pronoun Review and Reflexive Pronouns p 176
Simple Past vs. Past Continuous p 177
L E S S O N 4
Giving Opinion: Expressing Certainty and Doubt p 179
Modal Verb Must and Have To p 180
Modal Verbs: Must and Should p 182
Narrative Timeline p 183
R E V I E W
How to Make Predictions and
Express Different Degrees of Certainty p 185
L E S S O N 5
Connectors: Addition and Contrast p 186
Giving Opinion: Asking for Clarification
and Checking Understanding p 190
Giving Opinion: Review p 191
Modal Verbs: May and Might p 193
Relative Pronouns: Who and That p 194
L E S S O N 6
Connectors: Conclusion p 195
Modal Verbs: Review p 197
Reasoning: Why p 199
Be Used To vs. Used To p 200
I N TER MED IATE 2
L E S S O N 1
Be Going To p 204
Comparative Forms: Superiority p 205
Giving Opinion p 206
Modal Verbs: Review p 207
L E S S O N 2
Comparative Forms: Equality and Inferiority p 209
Connectors: Addition, Contrast, and Conclusion p 210
Giving Opinion: Expressing Certainty and Doubt p 212
Will vs. Be Going To p 214
L E S S O N 3
Connectors: Cause and Effect p 215
Narrative Timeline p 217
Pronouns: Review and Ambiguity p 219
Superlative Forms p 220
L E S S O N 4
Advice Giving: Had Better p 222
Connectors: Exemplication and Listing p 225
Modal Expressions: Be Able To, Be Willing To,
Be Supposed To p 227
Modal Verb: Would p 229
R E V I E W
Giving Opinion With Comparatives
and Superlatives p 230
L E S S O N 5
Comparative and Superlative Forms: Review p 232
Expressions With Get and Feel p 233
Modal Expressions p 234
Relative Pronouns p 236
Tag Questions p 239
L E S S O N 6
Connectors: Review p 240
Simple Present and Present Continuous for Future p 242
Would Rather and Other Ways to Express Preference p 244
Modal Verbs and Modal Expressions: Review p 245
INTERMED IATE 3
L E S S O N 1
Basic Reporting Strategies p 248
Giving Good and Bad News p 249
Present Perfect, Since and For p 250
Verbs Followed by Gerund or Infinitive p 251
L E S S O N 2
Argumentative Strategies: Quotations and Other Sources p 253
Comparative Forms Review and Non-gradable Adjectives p 256
Present Perfect: Yet, Never, Always, Ever, and Already p 259
Verbs Followed by Gerund and Infinitive With No Change in Meaning p 261
L E S S O N 3
Argumentative and Advice-giving Strategies p 263
Explaining Procedures: Expressing Sequence p 265
Present Perfect Continuous p 267
Verbs Followed by Gerund and Infinitive With Change in Meaning p 268
L E S S O N 4
Explaining Procedures: Reminders p 271
Paired Conjunctions: Either Or… and Neither Nor… p 272
Present Perfect Continuous vs. Present Perfect vs. Simple Past p 274
Would you mind...? p 276
R E V I E W
How to Give Your Opinion Using a
Strategy Framework: Discourse with Present Perfect p 278
L E S S O N 5
Adverbs p 280
Zero and First Conditionals p 283
Paired Conjunctions: Not Only… But Also / Both… And p 284
Relative Pronouns: Review + Whose p 286
Tag Questions Review and Other Ways to Confirm Statements p 289
L E S S O N 6
Gerund and Infinitive Clauses p 291
Second Conditional p 294
Modal Verbs Review and Shall and Ought To p 296
Paired Conjunctions: Review p 298
A DVANCED 1
L E S S O N 1
Argumentative Strategies: Review p 302
Past Perfect p 303
Talking About the Future p 305
Verbs Followed by Gerund and Infinitive p 307
L E S S O N 2
p 310
Making a Definition: Subtle or Emphatic
Must, Must Be, Must + Perfect Infinitive p 311
Past Perfect Continuous p 314
Past Perfect vs. Present Perfect p 316
L E S S O N 3
Connectors: Conditions p 318
Explaining Procedures: Asking for Clarification p 320
Modals + Perfect Infinitive: Should p 321
Passive Voice p 322
L E S S O N 4
Connectors: Exemplification + Cause and Effect p 324
Explaining Procedures: Review p 326
Passive Voice p 328
Pronoun Ambiguity p 331
R E V I E W
Explaining How to Do Things p 333
L E S S O N 5
Adverbs p 335
Be Going To (Past) p 338
Third Conditional p 339
Paired Conjunctions: Review p 341
Relative Pronouns: Whom, When, Where p 344
L E S S O N 6
Connectors: Review p 346
Conditionals: Review p 350
Perfect Forms: Review p 352
Reported Speech: Introduction p 355
ADVANCED 2
L E S S O N 1
Future Perfect p 358
Making a Definition p 359
Paraphrasing p 361
Talking About the Future: Review p 362
L E S S O N 2
Making a Definition: Subtle or Emphatic p 365
Modals + Perfect Infinitives Review: Must and Should p 366
Perfect Forms: Review p 368
Reported Speech: Focus on Verb Forms p 371
L E S S O N 3
Making Metaphorical Definitions p 373
Modals + Perfect Infinitives: May and Might p 374
Passive Voice: Review p 376
Reported Speech: Reporting Questions p 378
L E S S O N 4
Implied Meaning: Proverbs p 380
Modals + Perfect Infinitives Review: Would and Could p 382
Reported Speech: Reporting Imperatives p 384
Reported Speech: Focus on Time and Pronoun Reference p 386
R E V I E W
How to Describe, Explain, Defend,
and Analyze an Idea: Defining Basic Concepts p 388
L E S S O N 5
Be Going To (Present and Past) p 391
Conditionals: Review p 392
Implied Meaning: Jokes p 394
Relative Pronouns: Review p 396
Stress and Meaning p 398
L E S S O N 6
Cultural Aspects of Communication p 400
English as a Lingua Franca p 402
Implied Meaning: Stress and Intonation p 403
Reported Speech: Review p 405
BASIC 1
L E S S O N 1
ADJECTIVES
:: USE AND STRUCTURE
Physical Characteristics
Adjectives → Descriptions → Characteristics
Personality Traits
Sentence Construction
Subject + Verb To Be + Adjective → Liam is handsome.
Subject + Verb To Be + A/An + Adjective + Noun → Liam is a handsome man.
Physical Characteristics
VS.
SH ORT VS. TAL L HA N DSOME/BEAUTI FUL UGLY/HORRI BLE

( m as cul in e/fe m in in e )
FAT CHUBBY THI N
ST RON G W EA K ATHLETI C
18
L A N G U A G E G U I D E
Personality Traits
VS. VS.
O UTG OIN G / E X T ROV E RT S H Y/ TI MI D ORGA N I Z ED/N EAT DI SORGA N I Z ED/MESSY
VS. VS.
N O R M AL /OR D IN ARY W E IR D/STRA N GE A RROGA N T/PROUD HUMBLE/MODEST
:: EXAMPLES IN CONTEXT
Talking About a New Co-worker
Phil – Hey, Alex, do you know the new accountant?

Alex – Oh yeah, Mary. She is a very beautiful girl.
Phil – She is! She is shy, too, right?
Alex – Yes, but just say “hi” to her and you will start a conversation.
:: COMMON MISTAKES
INCORRECT CORRECT
Tony is a man weird. Tony is a weird man.
Sheila is a thin. Sheila is thin.
INDEFINITE ARTICLES
A Nick is a doctor.
(Nick is one person.)
INDEFINITE Only with
ARTICLES singular nouns
Sarah is an English teacher.
AN
(Sarah is one person.)
19
BASIC 1
L E S S O N 1
The client wants:

An apple, an orange, an apple (= one apple) a banana (= one banana)
and a banana, please.
an orange (= one orange)
Is it a specific apple, a specific banana? No. It refers to an unspecified fruit from the lot.
Thank you!
A Before consonant sounds
INDEFINITE
ARTICLES
AN Before vowel sounds
Mike has a car. Laura is an organized student.

(C = consonant sound) (O = vowel sound)
20
• In English some letters may sound like a consonant or like a vowel in different words.
Letter H Letter U
e is an honest man. (The H is not pronounced,
Honest → H Umbrella → Carol has an umbrella. (The U is pronounced
so it starts with a vowel sound.) as a vowel.)
he Atlas is a hotel in Milan. (The H is pronounced,
Hotel → T Uniform → I use a uniform at work. (The U is pronounced
so it starts with a consonant sound.) as a /y/ like in the word “you,” so it starts with
a consonant sound.)
Important:
Nick and Sarah are students. → Plural, so no indefinite article is used.
Rainy Day
Kate – Oh my God, it’s raining!

Stu – Do you have an umbrella with you?
Kate – No.
Stu – Come with me then.
At Work
Paul – Michael, what time is the meeting?

Michael – It’s starts in an hour.
Paul – Oh, OK! Thanks.
:: COMMON MISTAKES
INCORRECT CORRECT
I’m enginner. I’m an enginner.
Marcy and Robert are a friends. Marcy and Robert are friends.
I live in an house. I live in a house.
Please, an ripe orange. Please, a ripe orange. / Please, an orange.
I study at an university. I study at a university.
21
BASIC 1
L E S S O N 1
GREETINGS AND FAREWELLS

Greetings → used to start conversations
Hi, Mary!
Hello! How are you? Hello, Lucy!
Great to see
you! I’m fine.
How are you?
Hi!
Hello!
Good morning. Good afternoon. Good evening.
Good
Farewells → used to end conversations night, Kim.
I’ve got to Take care!
go now. Bye!
Bye!
Goodbye!
Take care.
Good night.
See you later!
See you tomorrow!
22
VERB TO BE + SUBJECT PRONOUNS

VERB TO BE
Location (Permanent Feelings (Permanent Descriptions

Introductions
or Temporary) or Temporary) (People and Places)
I am Julia. Where are you? I am happy. Lia and Tim are tall.
My name is Mario. I am at home now. Zoey is fine. Tanya is pretty.
This is Jessica. Tokyo is in Japan. John is exhausted. Leo is smart.
Let’s check the use of the verb to be with subject pronouns.
I You
She He
You
It We
They
23
BASIC 1
L E S S O N 1
Affirmative Negative Interrogative
I am/I’m a teacher. I am not/I’m not Scottish. Am I in London?

You are/You’re a student. You are not/You aren’t here. Are you a teacher?
He is/He’s an actor. He is not/He isn’t sick. Is Zico/Is he a soccer star?
She is/She’s a model. She is not/She isn’t cold. Is Madonna/Is she American?
It is/It’s cold. It is not/It isn’t in Brazil. Is Paris/Is it in France?
We are/We’re humans. We are not/We aren’t Irish. Are we friends?
You are/You’re students. You are not/You aren’t OK. Are you ready for the exam?
They are/They’re happy. They are not/They aren’t sad. Are they married?
:: COMMON MISTAKES
INCORRECT CORRECT
I be happy. I am happy.
She don’t be a doctor. She isn’t a doctor.
He not is in New York. He is not in New York.
He is my friend? Is he my friend?
L E S S O N 2
DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUNS
Demonstrative Pronouns
This is Mark. (close) These are English books. (close)

That is my sister. (distant) Those are my bikes. (distant)
Singular Plural
This: you → These: you →
That: you Those: you
24
At a Birthday Party Looking at the View At the Bakery
Danny – Hi, Lily! Happy birthday! Mike – Wow…Look, we can see Mary – Good morning.
This is for you… the beach from here… This cake here, please.
Lily – Oh, thanks, Danny! Lia – Really? Where? Clerk – Sure. Anything else?
What’s this? Mike – Look in that direction… Mary – And…that brownie over
Danny – Oh, c’mon, open it! It’s See that tree? there.
a surprise! Lia – Oh, yeah! Wow! Clerk – Here it is, ma’am.
Mary – Thank you.
QUESTION WORDS: WHO AND WHAT

Who → Questions about people
Who + Is/Are + Subject Pronouns?
Who are you? I am Peter. Who is she? She is Sheila.

Who is he? He is John. Who are they? They are Josh and Barry.
What → Questions about objects and things in general
What + Is/Are + Demonstrative Pronouns?
What’s that?
That is a chair.
25
BASIC 1
L E S S O N 2
What are these?

These are pencils.
What are those?
Those are toys.
What’s that?
That’s a computer.
She is...
I am Erika, This is William, I don’t know.
the receptionist. the manager. Who is she?
Thank you.
This is What’s this?
my office.
That is the
CEO’s office.
26
VERB TO BE: REVIEW

Let’s review the verb to be in the simple present.
I am Richard. I am not/I’m not tired. Am I OK?

You are a bank manager. You are not/aren’t sad. Are you tired?
He is a handsome man. He is not/isn’t tall. Is he on the beach?
She is a beautiful girl. She is not/isn’t crazy. Is she an architect?
It is a nice day. It is not/isn’t good. Is it a cold day?
We are at home. We are not/aren’t students. Are we friends?
You are single. You are not/aren’t in NYC. Are you actors?
They are at work. They are not/aren’t doctors. Are they at the gym?
Let’s see the type of personal information we can share using the verb to be.
Age: I am 34 years old. Location (Temporary or Permanent):

Mary is at school.
Feeling (Temporary or Permanent): Description: Jack is athletic.

Tony is excited about his results.
27
BASIC 1
L E S S O N 2
Profession: Mitchell and Stephanie are lawyers. Marital Status: Carol is married and Tim is single.
In a Meeting with a New Client

Nice to meet you, Paul. I’m
Ross, sales rep at 2sports.
I’m Paul, the account
manager. Nice to meet you.
:: STAY ALERT
I’m not a teacher. → informal or speaking

I am not a teacher. → formal, emphatic, or writing
:: COMMON MISTAKES
INCORRECT CORRECT
I not am an administrator. I am not an administrator.
You are at work? Are you at work?
He’s is a doctor. He is a doctor.
28
VERB TO HAVE
Verb To Have (Simple Present—Affirmative Form)
I
You He
We have She has
You It
They
• To have = To own, to possess → It refers to possession
Physical Description
I have green eyes. Lia has curly hair.
Possession
Possession
Liam has a dog and a cat. Mary has two children.
29
BASIC 1
L E S S O N 2
• To have = To eat / To drink
We have breakfast at seven a.m. Michael has coffee for breakfast.
Sam has lunch at one p.m. My family has dinner together on Fridays.
Affirmative and Negative Forms
I have a dog. I do not (don’t) have a dog.

You have a dog. You do not (don’t) have a dog.
He has a dog. He does not (doesn’t) have a dog.
She has a dog. She does not (doesn’t) have a dog.
It has beautiful eyes. It does not (doesn’t) have beautiful eyes.
We have a dog. We do not (don’t) have a dog.
You have a dog. You do not (don’t) have a dog.
They have a dog. They do not (don’t) have a dog.
Talking about Pets Physical Description
Tom – Do you have pets? Mike – Is your girlfriend blonde?

Gina – Yes, I have a cat and two dogs. I love pets! Otto – No, she has brown hair.
30
:: STAY ALERT
INCORRECT CORRECT
I have twenty-five years old. I am twenty-five years old.
Mike have a brother. Mike has a brother.
L E S S O N 3
Greetings can be formal, neutral, or informal.

• Formal Greetings → used in formal situations
Good morning Good afternoon Good evening
• Neutral or Informal Greetings → used in neutral or in informal situations. It’s important to pay
attention to your tone of voice in order not to sound too informal.
Neutral Greetings: Informal Greetings:
Hello! How are you? Hi! What’s up? How’s it going? How’s life? Hey!
Farewells can also be formal, neutral, or informal.
• Formal Farewells → used in formal situations
Good night.
See you + Time Expression (e.g., See you tomorrow / See you next week.)
It was a pleasure meeting you.
31
BASIC 1
L E S S O N 3
• Neutral or Informal Farewells → used in neutral or in informal situations. It’s important to pay attention to
your tone of voice in order not to sound too informal.
Bye.
Bye-bye.
Goodbye.
Take care.
See you.
See you later.
:: STAY ALERT
Formality depends on the context and on the relationship between the speaker and
the listener. For example:
• At work with a friend: use formal or neutral greetings and farewells.
• At a bar with a friend: use informal greetings and farewells.
• At a bar with your new boss: use formal or neutral greetings and farewells.
QUESTION WORDS: HOW OLD

The difference among these people is their age.
I’m sixteen years old.

I’m five years old.
Child Teenager
I’m thirty-two years old. We are seventy and

sixty-eight years old.
Adult Elderly
Question about age: Possible answers:

How old are you? I’m thirty-four years old.
I’m thirty-four.
32
Sentence Order
How old + verb to be + the person whose age you want to know?
are you? I’m twenty-eight years old.

is Michael (he)? He is fourteen years old.
How old is Vivian (she)? She is forty-six years old.
are you and your sister (you)? I am thirty-one and my sister is eighteen.
are your parents (they)? Mom is fifty-four and dad is sixty. / They are both sixty.
Meeting People
It’s weird, doc. I feel very
Hi! I’m Peter. I’m a senior Life is very stressful tired every day, you know.
student. Welcome to CIU. A senior, really? You look nowadays. How old are you?
young. How old are you?
:: COMMON MISTAKES
INCORRECT CORRECT
How many years do you have? How old are you?
I have thirty years old. I am thirty years old.
VERBS TO BE, TO LIKE, TO WORK, TO LIVE, TO HAVE

This is the general sentence structure to use with these verbs.
Subject + Verb + Complement
Now take a look at each verb.
33
BASIC 1
L E S S O N 3
• Verb To Live → used to indicate where your home is and who you live with
Jack and Valerie live together.
alone / with friends / with your parents / with your family / with your boyfriend or girlfriend
to live in a house / in an apartment / in a studio / in a mansion / in a cabin / in a loft
downtown / in the suburbs / in the countryside / in the city / abroad
• Verb To Have → used to indicate possession or as a synonym to verbs to eat or to drink
Kelly has a new car. Carla and Paula have lunch together every day.
a car / money / a house / children / friends / a dog / a cat

to have days off / vacation / a job / responsibilities / things to do / time
breakfast / lunch / dinner / a snack / some coffee
• Verb To Work → to do a job you are paid for
Mary, Josh, and Jackie are doctors.

They work at a hospital.
all day / in the morning / in the afternoon / night shifts / at night

to work at a company / for someone
every day / on weekends
34
• Verb To Be → U
sed to indicate states, characteristics, and location
Lena is sleepy. Albert is at the gym.
to be beautiful / handsome / ugly / smart / dumb / responsible / irresponsible / correct /
(states / incorrect / polite / impolite / excited about / interested in
characteristics) happy / sad / angry / stressed / calm / hungry / thirsty
to be at work / in Paris / (at) home / in a good place / here / there

(location) with your family / with your friends
Buy a Car
Hugo – Do you have a car?

Kim – Yeah…a sedan.
Hugo – Do you like it? Is it good?
Kim – It’s a nice car.
Hugo – I live far from work. I need to buy a car.
Kim – Sedans are spacious and comfortable.
Hugo – Thanks.
:: STAY ALERT
Affirmative Negative
like chocolate. don’t like chocolate.
I/You/We/They work every day. I/You/We/They don’t work every day.
live in the U.S.A. don’t live in the U.S.A.
likes chocolate. doesn’t like chocolate.

He/She/It works every day. He/She/It doesn’t work every day.
lives in the U.S.A. doesn’t live in the U.S.A.
I/You/We/They have breakfast in the morning. I/You/We/They don’t have breakfast in the morning.
He/She/It has breakfast in the morning. He/She/It doesn’t have breakfast in the morning.
35
BASIC 1
L E S S O N 3
CARDINAL NUMBERS, FAMILY MEMBERS, AND PETS

• Numbers
You use numbers to:
• Say your age → I am twelve years old.
• Talk about your family → I have two sisters.
• Talk about your pets → I have one dog and three cats.
• Talk about quantity in general → I live with four people in my house.
Here are the numbers from 1 to 12
1 – one 5 – five 9 – nine
2 – two 6 – six 10 – ten
3 – three 7 – seven 11 – eleven
4 – four 8 – eight 12 – twelve
• Family Members
• Your brother and your sister are your siblings. • Your grandmother and your grandfather are your
• Your mother and your father are your parents. grandparents.
• You and your siblings are your parents’ children.
• Pets
Do you have pets? Take a look at some types of pets you can have:
P U P P Y ( BA BY D OG ) KI T TEN ( BA BY CAT) DOG

36
CAT BI RD FI SH
IG UA N A FERRET HA MSTER
R ABBIT SNAKE PIG
Talking About Your Home Life
Jerry – So, Ted...Is it true you live with your grandparents on a farm?
Ted – Yes! My parents work in the city, but I live there with my
grandparents and with my sister.
Jerry – Cool! Do you have pets there?
Ted – Yes! We have ten pets: two dogs, one cat, two birds, three
piglets, one hamster, and one ferret.
Jerry – Oh, wow! Is it difficult to take care of them?
Ted – It is, but they are great! I love my pets.
:: COMMON MISTAKES
INCORRECT CORRECT
I have parents in New York. I have relatives in New York.
My brothers’ names are Mary and John. My siblings’ names are Mary and John.
37
BASIC 1
L E S S O N 4
ADDRESSES
Answers About Address
Questions About Address
My address is 45 Lily Road.
What’s your address? I live at 45 Lily Road.
Where do you live? I live on Lily Road.
I live in New Jersey.
Complete Addresses
I live at + Number + Street Name + Apartment or Other Complements I live at 98 Smith Street Flat B.
Street Name For Neighborhood, City,

Village, Continent, or Country
Copacabana.
New York City.
I live on + Street Name I live in + Name of the Place I live in
Australia.
Europe.
:: STAY ALERT
Anna – What’s your address?
Paul – (It's) 12 Kimberly Avenue.

I live at 12 Kimberly Avenue. three possible answers
My address is 12 Kimberly Avenue.
ADJECTIVES TO DESCRIBE PLACES

Subject + Verb To Be + Adjective → The Empire State is tall.
Subject + Verb To Be + A/An + Adjective + Noun → The Empire State is a tall building.
Subject + Verb + Preposition + A/An + Adjective + Noun → Tony lives in a modern house.
38
NEW
QUIET
FAMOUS
ORG AN IZ E D
VS.
VS.
VS.
VS.
Take a look at some adjectives:
FAN TAST IC/ M ARV E LOU S

OLD
N OISY
M E SSY
U N K NOW N
VS.
DI RTY
CLASSI C
DI STA N T
ELEGANT
VS.
VS.
VS.
VS.
HORRI BLE/UGLY
CLEAN
CLOSE
SIMPLE
MODERN
39
BASIC 1
L E S S O N 4
At a Café
Anne – Do you like this place? It is so ugly.
Paula – It’s OK. It’s a friendly place and the food is fantastic.
Anne – Yeah...maybe. But look at the decoration. It is so boring!
Paula – You sound boring right now. Just drink your coffee, come on.
At the Shopping Mall
Angela – Stacy, there are so many people here. It is so busy today!

Stacy – It is! It’s horrible. I like to shop at quiet places.
Angela – I like it too but staying home is tedious. Let’s walk around.
:: COMMON MISTAKES
INCORRECT CORRECT
Steve lives in a house beautiful. Steve lives in a beautiful house.
Paris is a wonderful. Paris is wonderful.
PREPOSITIONS OF TIME AND PLACE
The desk is near the window.

The door is far from the window.
The computer is on the desk.
The trash bin is under the desk.
The book is between the computer and the pencil holder.
The colored pencils are in the pencil holder.
The picture frame is behind the pencil holder.
The chair is in front of the desk.
The teddy bear is among the magazines in the basket.
When talking about the city, you can use different prepositions of place.
Street → Jackson Bank is on Marks Street.

City → The Sugar Loaf is in Rio de Janeiro.
Neighborhood → There are many restaurants in Hell’s Kitchen.
Country → Bangkok is in Thailand.
40
• At is used with specific place or places where • At is also used with complete addresses.
people work or study.
Kim lives at 24 William Alley.
Dad is at home.
Liam is at work. • Now pay attention to this: Where do you work?
Tina works at Sears.
Michael studies at Lawrence High. I work at Many Corp. Many Corp is in New
Jersey, on Quarter Street.
Prepositions of Time
What time does the plane depart? The flight leaves at nine a.m.
When is the flight? The flight is on July 7th, 2017.
The flight is in July.
At → It refers to specific time
We have lunch at twelve p.m. I have classes at ten a.m. Meet me at six p.m.
In → Used with months, parts of the day, On → Used with days of the week and specific dates
and also with seasons of the year
Christmas is on December 25th.
Tim works out in the morning. Our English classes are on Tuesdays and Thursdays.
Christmas is in December.
The flowers blossom in the spring.
41
BASIC 1
L E S S O N 4
:: STAY ALERT
We say in the morning, in the afternoon,

in the evening, but we say at night.
:: COMMON MISTAKES
INCORRECT CORRECT
The baby likes to sit among mom and dad. The baby likes to sit between mom and dad.
I like to be between people, not alone. I like to be among people, not alone.
I always stay with my family in Christmas. I always stay with my family at Christmas.
QUESTION WORDS: WHERE AND WHEN

Where Place and Location
• Where + Verb To Be + Complement
Hi! I’m Rick, from

Nigeria. Where I’m from Japan.
are you from? Nice to meet you.
Other examples:
Where is your mom’s house? It is in Chelsea.
Where is your sister? She is at work.
Where are you? I’m at school.
Where is London? London is in England.
• Where + Do You + Verb + Complement

I work at WKC
Computers.
Where do And you?
you work?
Other examples:
Where do you live? I live in Tokyo.
Where do you work? I work in WKC Computers.
Where do you go to school? I go to school at St. Martin’s.
Where do you study English? I study English at Wise Up.
42
When Time
• When + Verb To Be + Complement
My birthday
is on June 8th.
When is your Other examples:
birthday?
When are your English classes? My English Classes are
on Mondays and Wednesdays.
When is your birthday? My birthday is on September 4th.
When is the party? The party is tomorrow afternoon.
• When + Do You + Verb + Complement
I have classes at
Wise Up on Mondays
and Wednesdays.
Other examples:
When do you go to the gym? I go to the gym every day
in the morning.
When do you
have classes When do you travel? I travel on my vacations.
at Wise Up? When do you see your I see my boyfriend on
boyfriend? weekends.
Questions with When Possible Answers
• When is your party?

It’s in July.
We use in for seasons (in the summer), months (in August), years
(in 1973), and parts of the day (in the morning).
It’s on July 10th.

We use on for days of the week (on Monday) and for dates
(on January 2nd).
It’s at six p.m.

We use at for specific time (at midnight, at seven a.m.).
:: STAY ALERT
We use at to refer to specific moments of the year, such as: at Christmas.
:: COMMON MISTAKES
INCORRECT CORRECT
When do you make anniversary? When is your birthday?
Where is your job? Where do you work?
Where we are? Where are we?
Where you live? Where do you live?
43
BASIC 1
R E V I E W
HOW TO MAKE A PERSONAL PRESENTATION

How do you talk about yourself? Here is Leonard and he is going to help you.
Hi! I’m Leonard and
I’m here to help you with
personal presentations.
To make a personal presentation, you say:
• Your name → I am... / My name is...
• Your age → I am...years old.
• Your profession → I am a/an...
• Your nationality → I am... / I am from...
• Your marital status → I am single / engaged / married / divorced / a widow / a widower.
• Where you live → I live in Amsterdam. / I live on 12th street. / I live at 98, 12th street. / I live in Brazil.
• Where you work → I work at Lunette’s. / I work downtown.
You can also talk about:

• Your possessions → I have pets. / I have a car.
• Your likes and dislikes → I like cooking. / I don’t like sports.
I’m a veterinarian and

I love to walk my little dog
This is Lucy, my wife. in the morning. We have a
Let’s see what Leonard has to say about himself. She is Scottish. dog, a cat, and a bird.
I’m 32 years old and

I am from New Orleans, Louisiana.
I am a dentist and I work at
ABC Dental Care. I’m married
and I live in Cleveland with my wife.
If you want, you can

put some of this Subject + Verb To Be + A/An + Age (X-year-old) + Nationality + Profession
information together.
44
Take a look!
Hi! I’m Leonard. I’m a 32-year-old

American dentist. This is Lucy.
She is a 28-year-old Scottish
veterinarian. We’re married and
we live in Cleveland. We have a
dog, a cat, and a bird.
In which situations do we make personal presentations?
Meeting People
Personal Presentations Job Interviews
Introducing Yourself
Meeting People
Jack – Excuse me, hi. I’m Jack.

Kelly – Oh, hi, Jack! I’m Kelly, nice to meet you.
Jack – Nice to meet you, too. So, tell me about yourself, Kelly.
Kelly – Well, I’m twenty-three years old...I am a law student from Albuquerque.
Jack – New Mexico? Interesting! I’m from Santa Fe.
Kelly – What a coincidence! So, tell me about yourself now.
Jack – I’m a twenty-nine-year-old accountant at Max Computers, I’m from Santa Fe, and I love dogs.
Kelly – Oh, no...I’m a cat person.
Jack – But do you hate dogs?
Kelly – No, dogs are OK. But I just love cats.
45
BASIC 1
R E V I E W
Job Interview
Mr. Fox – Alex Swanson? Please, take a seat.
Alex – Hello, sir. Thank you.
Mr. Fox – So...Mr. Swanson...I see in your résumé that you are an engineer.
Alex – Yes, sir.
Mr. Fox – So, tell me more about yourself.
Alex – Well, I’m twenty-five years old. I’m from Sweden but I have been living in St. Louis for a long time.
Mr. Fox – Oh, interesting.
Alex – I am engaged, but we haven’t set a date for the wedding yet.
Mr. Fox – Nice. Do you have hobbies?
Alex – I love music. I listen to jazz and play the saxophone.
Introducing Yourself
Mrs. Bergman – Good afternoon, ladies and gentleman. Let me introduce myself. My name is Sandra
Bergman and I’m a Dutch historian. I live in the beautiful city of Amsterdam and, as you
can imagine, I love to ride my bicycle and to drink my beer. I am fifty-five years old and
I have been married to my Walter Bergman for thirty years. We have three children and
two grandchildren. I am here to talk to you about the Amsterdam lifestyle. Let’s begin?
:: COMMON MISTAKES
INCORRECT CORRECT
I am a Mary. I am Mary.
I have forty years old. I am forty years old.
I live at England. I live in England.
I am doctor. I am a doctor.
I am a architect. I am an architect.
I not like vegetables. I don’t like vegetables.
I’m from Brazilian. I’m from Brazil / I’m Brazilian.
46
L E S S O N 5
ARTICLES: DEFINITE AND INDEFINITE
A – Before consonant sounds
Indefinite Articles → Used with singular nouns

An – Before vowel sounds
Rick is an elegant actor. An apple a day keeps A cup of coffee, please? That’s a fast car.
the doctor away.
Definite Article → The → it refers to a particular thing or person that has already been mentioned, is already
known, or is the only one
• Use: a particular/specific thing that is known • Use: to refer to unique things, it is the only one
by the people in the conversation
Don – Which car do you like? Quinn – Pasta is the most delicious food in the
Mark – I like the red car. world. (There is only one world, and, for
(Don and Mark know which car it is.) Quinn, one delicious food.)
Don’t use the definite article the:
• Before proper names: The Mary is my boss.

• Before names of countries: The Canada is a nice country.
• Exceptions: the United States, the United Kingdom, the Philippines.
47
BASIC 1
L E S S O N 5
Let’s compare indefinite and definite articles?
One Day Before Sarah’s Birthday Party At the Restaurant:

I have to buy a present for Sarah. (a Jack – Darling, look at the menu and choose a pizza topping.
blouse, a book, make-up, an item I can (Mozzarella, pepperoni, vegetarian? Pick any topping.)
choose in the shopping mall) Mia – Hmm, I want the pepperoni pizza.
(one specific type of pizza)
On the Day of Sarah’s Birthday Party
Does Sarah like the present? (the specific After Eating
present, the one I gave her) Jack – So, honey, did you like the pizza? (the pepperoni pizza.)
Will – Oh, what a lovely picture! Who is your husband?
Anna – The man on the right, with the boy.
:: COMMON MISTAKES
INCORRECT CORRECT
My profession? I’m the computer analyst. My profession? I’m a computer analyst.
I want to have the car but I don’t have any money. I want to have a car but I don’t have any money.
Mike is going to the England. Mike is going to England.
Nick is married to the Julia. Nick is married to Julia.
CONNECTORS: AND, BUT, AND SO

And → to add information, to connect complementary ideas
I like chocolate.
I like apples.
I like apples and chocolate.
48
But → to connect opposing ideas
Fact: Volleyball players are usually tall. Nick is 160 cm.

Nick is a professional volleyball player.
Nick is short, but he is a volleyball player.
So → To introduce a conclusion
Fact: When you are sick, you don’t go to work.
Julia is sick, so she is not going to work.
John – Pam, do you want to have dinner and watch

Blood and Fire with me?
Pam – Oh, I’m OK for dinner, but I hate horror movies.
John – So we can watch another movie. Do you like
adventure movies?
49
BASIC 1
L E S S O N 5
:: COMMON MISTAKES
INCORRECT CORRECT
I like math. And I like history. I like math and history.
I woke up late, I didn’t have breakfast so. I woke up late, so I didn’t have breakfast.
IMPERATIVES
IMPERATIVES
Orders Instructions/Directions Requests
Stop! Turn right. Be quiet, please.
Verb in the Bare Infinitive Form Don’t + Verb in the Bare Infinitive Form
Pay attention. Don’t pay attention.

Open the door. Don’t open the door.
Come here. Don’t come here.
Sit down. Don’t sit down.
Listen to me. Don’t listen to me.
50
In a Meeting
Mr. Pax – Gabe, close the door behind you, please.
Gabe – Sure.
Mr. Pax – OK, guys, tell me about the problems in the department.
Gabe – Please, sir, don’t ask me about the problems. I want to propose a solution.
Mr. Pax – Then, present this solution, Gabe.
In the Classroom
Mrs. Smith – Please, open the General Law Guide to page 54.
Gavin – Sorry, ma’am. I don’t understand. Repeat the page, please?
Mrs. Smith – Sure. It’s page 54.
Gavin – Thank you.
Mrs. Smith – Gavin, help me with the review. Tell me one of the principles of Family Law.
:: STAY ALERT
Do not enter. Formal and/or emphatic

Don’t enter. Informal and/or neutral
:: COMMON MISTAKES
INCORRECT CORRECT
Don’t to go now. Don’t go now.
51
BASIC 1
L E S S O N 5
LIKES AND DISLIKES

When you talk about things you like or about actions you like to do, you can say:
Things Actions
I like... I like chocolate/ice cream. I like to work. / I like going to the beach.
I enjoy… I enjoy the sun/TV series. I enjoy watching TV.
I love... I love juice/my friends/pets. I love going out with my friends.
I adore... I adore books/movies/my family. I adore traveling to the mountains.
When you talk about things you don’t like or about actions you don't like to do, you can say:
Things Actions
I don't like... I don’t like papaya/milk. I don’t like to wake up / waking up early.
I dislike… I dislike salad/spicy food. I dislike to work / working on weekends.
I hate... I hate mango/rude people. I hate to wake up / waking up early.
I detest... I detest onions/horror movies. I detest driving at rush hour.
Dislike < Hate < Detest

+ ++
I love this movie! I hate fish, man.

I’ll have the chicken.
Let’s have
the salmon?
:: COMMON MISTAKES
INCORRECT CORRECT
I enjoy to watch TV. I enjoy watching TV.
I like study English. I like to study English. / I like studying English.
52
EXPRESSING POSSESSION: POSSESSIVE ADJECTIVES

Subject Pronoun Possessive Adjective
I My
You Your
He His
She Her
It Its
We Our
You Your
They Their
Sentence Order
(Possessive Adjective + Noun) + Verb + Complement → My husband works at a bank.
Subject + Verb + (Possessive Adjective + Noun) → This is our taxi.
Meeting People On the Phone
Troy – Hi, my name is Troy. What is your name? Mary – Hello, Mary speaking.
Amy – Hi, Troy. Nice to meet you. My name is Amy. Tim – Hi, Mary. It’s Tim. Is your father at home?
Troy – And what is her name? Mary – No, mom and dad are at the garage to fix
Amy – Oh, sorry. This is my cousin, her name is Julia. their car.
Tim – Oh, OK. Please, tell him that Kim is back
and that our new number is 8764-3579.
Mary – Sure. See you.
:: COMMON MISTAKES
INCORRECT CORRECT
The my car is black. My car is black.
That is not your car, that is my. That is not your car; that is my car.
Are they yours brothers? Are they your brothers?
53
BASIC 1
L E S S O N 6
IMPERATIVES
IMPERATIVES
Orders Instructions/Directions Requests
Structure:
Affirmative → Verb in the Bare Infinitive Form + Complement → Talk to me. / Go!
Negative → Don’t + Verb in the Bare Infinitive Form + Complement → Don’t speak. / Don’t go there.
Calm down! Don’t panic. Fasten your seatbelts.
Have a seat, please. Pass me the salad, please.
Here it is. Help yourself.
• You can use imperatives for requests and for favors:
Please, call tomorrow! (request or favor)

Please, help John with his homework. (request or favor)
:: STAY ALERT
Imperative might sound rude or inappropriate depending on context. If you really want to
make sure you are making a request or asking for a favor and not giving a command
when you use imperatives forms, use the word please and use proper intonation.
54
QUESTION WORDS REVIEW

What Who When Where
Things Activities People Time Place Location
Sentence Order in Questions with the Verb To Be Sentence Order with Other Verbs
Where Where
What What
+ Verb To Be + Complement? + Do You + Verb + Complement?
When When
Who Who
Registering at the Gym
Clerk – Welcome to Wellness Gym.

Mel – Hi! I want to register, please.
Clerk – Sure...let’s complete this
form. What is your full name?
Mel – It’s Melanie Johnson.
Clerk – OK...and where do you live?
Mel – I live at 565 Stuart Street.
Clerk – OK...When is your birthday?
Mel – It’s on August 15th.
Clerk – Wonderful, Melanie. It costs
fifty dollars a month.
Mel – Great. Here it is.
First Day at Work

Lara – Excuse me. Hi! I’m Lara. It’s my first day here.
Chris – Oh, hi, Lara! Welcome to Officers. I’m Chris.
Lara – Nice to meet you, Chris. Look, where is my
station?
Chris – I don’t know. You have to ask Timothy.
Lara – OK. But...who’s Timothy?
Chris – He is the office manager. Tall guy, brown hair,
brown eyes…
Lara – That’s twenty-five percent of the world, girl.
Chris – You’re right. What do you do here?
Lara – I’m a sales representative.
Chris – Hum, OK. So, go to Mr. Strong’s office and he
will help you.
Lara – Thanks! Where is his office?
55
BASIC 1
L E S S O N 6
:: STAY ALERT
Some questions are commonly used in certain situations. Take a look:
What? = Non-literal, indicates surprise Who is it? = Responding to a knock Who is it? = Picking up the phone
on your door
Hello, who is it?
What?!
Who is it? Hi Mom!

It’s me, John
:: COMMON MISTAKES
INCORRECT CORRECT
What is your date of anniversary? When is you birthday / anniversary?
Where you live? Where do you live?
What you do? What do you do?
EXPRESSING TIME
We use the following structures to express time:
• Full Hour → It’s + Hour + O’clock
It’s twelve o’clock. It’s seven o’clock.
• Hour and Minutes → It’s + Hour + Minutes
9:28 → It’s nine twenty-eight.

10:09 → It’s ten-oh-nine.
6:15 → It’s six fifteen. / It’s a quarter past six.
10:30 → It’s ten thirty. / It’s half past ten.
10:50 → It’s ten fifty. / It’s ten to eleven.
11:55 → It’s eleven fifty-five. / It’s five to twelve.
It’s nine twenty-eight. It’s ten oh nine.

56
:: COMMON MISTAKES
INCORRECT CORRECT
I have lunch at 12 a.m. I have lunch at twelve p.m. (at noon)
I go to work at seven hours. I go to work at seven o’clock.
I go to work at seven a.m.
QUESTION WORD: WHAT TIME
What time...? → Exact Time
Sentence Order
• What Time + Verb To Be + Complement • What Time + Do/Does + Subject + Verb + Complement
Anna – What time is your English Class? Amy – What time do you go to work?
Paul – My English Class is at eight a.m. Joe – I go to work at seven thirty a.m.
:: STAY ALERT
a.m. → from midnight to 11:59 (in the morning)

p.m. → from noon to 11:59 (in the evening)
57
BASIC 1
L E S S O N 6
Inviting a Friend for Party Waking Someone Up
Mia – Hi, Jake. Do you want to come to my Jane – Jimmy, wake up! You’re late.
birthday party on Saturday at my house? Jimmy – Late? What time is it?
Jake – Cool! What time? Jane – It’s nine a.m. Come on!
Mia – At seven p.m.
Jake – Wonderful! See you then.
:: COMMON MISTAKES
INCORRECT CORRECT
What is the time now? What time is it?
What hour do you wake up? What time do you wake up?
NOTES
58
BASIC 2
L E S S O N 1
ARTICLES: DEFINITE, INDEFINITE, AND ZERO

Let’s start by reviewing the definite and indefinite articles.
Indefinite Article A Indefinite Article An Definite Article The
singular yes yes yes
plural no no yes
before vowel sounds no yes yes
before consonant sounds yes no yes
specific nouns no no yes
general nouns yes yes no
Remember that we don’t usually use the before proper nouns.

There are some exceptions.
The Claudia is a nice girl.

Carl loves the United States. OK!
Zero Article
We don’t use articles:
• before general nouns in the plural and uncountable nouns • with nouns in unlimited numbers
Dogs are man's best friend. (dogs in general) Everybody loves chocolate.
Oxygen is important for life. (oxygen = uncountable noun) (unlimited number/quantity of chocolate)
Diana teaches children. (children in general) Mary plants flowers. (unlimited number of flowers)
Tanya has homework to do. (homework = uncountable noun) Stewart collects books. (unlimited number of books)
• before possessives
This is my car. (no article before my)
Tommy’s girlfriend is gorgeous. (no article before Tommy’s)
Take a look at the difference between definite, indefinite, and zero article.
This is a group of pens. This is a fountain pen. The fountain pen is used in
Pens are used for writing. (It is one type of pen.) calligraphy. (this specific type of pen)
(pens in general)
60
Let’s have a pet!
Jackson – Honey, let’s have a pet?
Wendy – OK...but which pet do you want?
Jackson – I don’t know. A cat? A dog? A bird?
Wendy – Darling, I know you like animals in general,
but you need to decide.
Jackson – You’re right. Let’s get a dog!
Wendy – Let’s get a dog then!
Family Dinner
Kelly – Mom, pass me the salt, please?
Lyla – Sure. Here it is. Don’t you want salad?
Kelly – I don’t really like salad, mom.
Lyla – OK. Michael, have a glass of orange juice.
Michael – Thanks, mom. What’s for dessert?
Lyla – We have fruit. You can have a banana or an apple.
Michael – An apple? Fruit is for breakfast, not for dessert.
Lyla – You guys need healthier habits.
:: COMMON MISTAKES
I N CO R R E CT CORRECT
Tony adores the his car. Tony adores his car.
The Mary is teacher. Mary is a teacher.
The advice is not always good. Advice is not always good.
Eat a vegetables. Eat vegetables.

When you arrive When you leave
use a Greeting to start conversations use a Farewell to finish conversations
61
BASIC 2
L E S S O N 1
Let’s begin with Greetings and Farewells in some formal situations such as:
• Job Interviews • Lectures and conferences

• Meetings with clients • Conversations with older and more conservative people
• Meetings with the board of directors • Conversations with people you don’t know
Greetings Commonly Used in Formal Conversations
morning.
Good afternoon. How are you, sir? How’s your day, ma’am?
evening.
Farewells Commonly Used in Formal Conversations
Good night.
Goodbye.
Have a nice day.
See you + Time Expression
(See you tomorrow / next week.)
Now let’s take a look at some neutral or informal situations.
• Casual conversations with friends

• Conversations with your family
• Conversations at informal places
• Informality (when allowed)
Greetings Commonly Used in Neutral or Informal Conversations
Neutral or Informal
Hi! Hello!
How are you? How are things?
How’s life? Good to see you!
Nice to see you! Long time no see!
Very Informal
What’s up? How are you doing?
How’s it going? How’s everything?
62
Farewells Commonly Used in Informal Conversations
Bye. Bye-bye. See you.
Catch you later. Take care. Night.
Arriving for a Job Interview
Jonas Henson – Excuse me, good morning. I’m Jonas Henson.
Mr. Patricks – Hello, Jonas. Please, come in and take a seat.
How are you today, Jonas?
Jonas Henson – I’m fine, sir, thank you for asking.
Leaving a Job Interview

Mr. Patricks – OK, Jonas, thank you very much for coming.
We’ll call you with the results.
Jonas Henson – Thank you very much, sir. Have a good day.
Going on a Road Trip

Mr. Marks – Pete, drive safely! Zoey, be careful with the sun!
Zoey – OK, dad, don’t worry. Bye!
Mr. Marks – Bye! See you next week!
:: STAY ALERT
In very informal situations, you can say:
Morning! (Good morning) Afternoon! (Good afternoon) Evening! (Good evening) Nighty night! (Good night)
:: COMMON MISTAKES
INCORRECT CORRECT
Good night! How are you? Good evening! How are you?
63
BASIC 2
L E S S O N 1
PLURAL FORMS
• Normally, you add –S to form the plural:

Singular Plural
Singular Plural
boy boys
girl girls
video videos
• But there are special rules:
Singular Plural
Ending in Consonant + –Y Drop –Y + –IES
baby babies
candy candies
city cities
Singular Plural
Ending in –SH, –CH, –S, –X or –Z + –ES
watch watches
hairbrush hairbrushes
bus buses
fox foxes
buzz buzzes
Singular Plural
Ending in Consonant + –O + –ES
potato potatoes
hero heroes
Singular Plural
End in –F or –FE Drop –F or –FE and + –VES
wolf wolves
knife knives
life lives
64
Irregular Plural
Singular Plural
woman women
man men
child children
foot feet
tooth teeth
Two Women Meet at the Park
Marcy – Hi, Sarah! Who are these beautiful kids?
Sarah – These are my children, Leah and Mike.
Marcy – Oh, how lovely!
At the Farmers’ Market

Lucy – Excuse me, sir. I'd like some potatoes.
Seller – OK, ma’am.
At the Police Station

Mary – Hello, officer. Two men robbed my car.
Officer – Please, describe the men.
Mary – Well, one of them has big teeth, blue
eyes, and blonde hair.
65
BASIC 2
L E S S O N 1
:: COMMON MISTAKES
INCORRECT CORRECT
I have to fix two tooths. I have to fix two teeth.
Woman are all different. Women are all different.
Tony and Kelly are childs. Tony and Kelly are children.
There are two bus at the station. There are two buses at the station.
SIMPLE PRESENT
Simple Present
General/Permanent Facts Regular/Habitual Actions
The sky is blue. My class is on Mondays.

I like fruit. You eat fruit every day.
Take a look at the verb to be in the simple present:

I am/I’m American. I am not/I’m not a dentist. Am I correct?
You are/You’re a doctor. You are not/You aren’t a kid. Are you at work?
He is/He’s my brother. He is not/He isn’t Italian. Is Messi (he) famous?
She is/She’s famous. She is not/She’s not at home. Is Mary (she) tired?
It is/It’s a nice day. It is not/It isn’t hot today. Is Snoopy (it) a dog?
We are/We’re friends. We are not/We aren’t Polish. Are we OK?
You are/You’re intelligent You are not/You aren’t well. Are you at the course?
They are/They’re married. They are not/They aren’t here. Are they together?
Take a look at the verb to like in the simple present:

I like chocolate. I don’t like salsa. Do I like to study?
You like rock and roll. You don’t like tomatoes. Do you like lemons?
We like English. We don’t like to sleep early. Do we like to work?
You like to play the guitar. You don’t like to work. Do you like French?
They like apples. They don’t like cats. Do they like soda?
Note:
For the third person singular (he, she, and it), we use a different
spelling or verb inflection. You will study this topic in Lesson 2.
66
Take a look at some dialogues with to be and to like in the simple present:
Having Lunch with Friends
Pam – Hey, Mark, try the bacon. It is delicious!
Mark – I don’t like bacon.
Pam – What? Are you insane?
Mark – I know! I like vegetables, but I really don’t like bacon.
Bad Memory
Leo – Is today May 10th?
Joe – No, it’s May 11th.
Leo – Oh my God! It’s my birthday. I don’t like birthdays.
Joe – That is weird, you know? You don't like your birthday and
don't remember when it is?
Leo – Well, I am weird. I don’t like the idea of getting old.
Joe – You get older every year, my friend. It is a fact. Live with it.
:: COMMON MISTAKES
INCORRECT CORRECT
I not like alcoholic drinks. I don’t like alcoholic drinks.
You like salad? Do you like salad?
Do you be a secretary? Are you a secretary?
I don’t am an architect. I am not an architect. / I’m not an architect.
I am like to travel. I like to travel.
Are you work here? Do you work here?
67
BASIC 2
L E S S O N 2
ADJECTIVES FOR PERSONAL DESCRIPTION

Let’s begin by reviewing the sentence structure of sentences with adjectives?
Sentence Structure
Subject + Verb To Be + Adjective → Carly is intelligent.

Subject + Verb To Be + Complement with Adjective → Joanna is a dynamic athlete.
Subject + Verb + Complement with Adjective → Liam likes smart girls.
Adjectives are not used in the plural form. Take a look.
ACT I V E P E OP L E FAST CA RS YOUN G GI RLS
Take a look at some adjectives used to describe people’s personality.
SW E E T AGGRESSI V E DEPRESSED
FUNNY SEXY KI N D
POLITE IMPOLITE RUDE
68
S N OBBIS H FAMOUS N ERVOUS
F R IE N D LY RESERV ED DEDI CATED
TA L K AT IV E STRESSED CA LM
Talking About People

Paula – So, Amy, tell me about Peter!
Amy – Oh, Paula, he is so sweet!
Paula – Really? What else?
Amy – He is very intelligent and kind.
A real gentleman.
:: COMMON MISTAKES
INCORRECT CORRECT
They are aggressives boys. They are aggressive boys.
Luke is a man polite. Luke is a polite man.
69
BASIC 2
L E S S O N 2
DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUNS
Demonstrative Pronouns
Identify and Describe Things Identify and Introduce People
That’s my sister, Rose.
There are some possible sentence structures with demonstrative pronouns.
Demonstrative Pronoun + Verb + Complement Subject + Verb + Demonstrative Pronoun +

→ That is a great house! Complement → Mark loves that girl.
Imperative + Demonstrative Pronoun + Complement

→ Look at this car…wow!
70
The demonstrative pronouns are:
Singular Plural
Close this these
Distant that those
Introducing a New Co-worker
Akiko – Mr. Hiroshi, this is Akimi.
Akimi – Nice to meet you, Mr. Hiroshi.
Akiko – And this is Tasha.
Tasha – Nice to meet you, Mr. Hiroshi.
Mr. Hiroshi – It’s a pleasure to meet you two.
Talking to Friends
Kim – Oh my God! Those shoes are so trendy…
Sylvia – They so are, right? I’m so in love with them…
Kim – Now look at this yellow belt! Gorgeous, right?
Sylvia – Yeah, I love it!
:: STAY ALERT
Demonstrative pronouns are frequently

This is my friend, Lucy.
used in introductions as in:
That and those are used to refer to people

that are distant from the speaker.
That guy over there is my brother, Harry.

Those two in red are my friends, Lucy and Larry.
71
BASIC 2
L E S S O N 2
PRESENT CONTINUOUS
Take a look at the structure of the present continuous:
• Present Continuous: Affirmative
Sentence Structure
Subject + Verb To Be (Present) + Main Verb (–ING Form) + Complement
John is sweeping the floor. Paty is making her bed.
• Present Continuous: Negative
Sentence Structure
Subject + To Be (Present/Negative) + Main Verb (–ING Form) + Complement
Johnny isn’t paying attention to class. Mark isn’t cleaning the house.
• Present Continuous: Interrogative
Sentence Structure
To Be (Present) + Subject + Main Verb (–ING Form) + Complement
Is Carrie receiving friends at home? Is Fred cooking dinner?

72
We use the Present Continuous to talk about actions that are in progress at the moment of speaking and that
are temporary.
Continuous Actions/Events
Words commonly used with the Present Continuous:
Now Right now At the moment Today This morning/afternoon Tonight
At Work
Sarah – Janet, I need some help.
Janet – Sure. What are you doing?
Sarah – I’m working on a financial report.
Janet – OK…let’s see. Are you calculating income
and expenses?
Sarah – Yes, I am. And I am registering everything.
Janet – OK. Let’s finish this together.
At Home
Helen – Nick, are you cleaning your bedroom?
Nick – I’m not cleaning the bedroom yet, but I
will soon.
Helen – What are you doing, then?
Nick – I’m finishing an episode of Zombie Attack.
Helen – Are you kidding me? Tidy up this room
right now!
Nick – What are you doing?
Helen – I’m doing your laundry. Just get up!
:: COMMON MISTAKES
INCORRECT CORRECT
I working at this moment. I’m working at this moment.
Mario not writing the report. Mario isn’t writing the report.
73
BASIC 2
L E S S O N 2
SIMPLE PRESENT
Let’s take another look at the use of the simple present:
Permanent Situations → Facts
A bank manager works in a bank.
Simple Present
Habitual Actions → Habits, Routine
Julia has breakfast every morning.
Now, check the use of the verb to be in the simple present:
To Be Describes facts, permanent states, and location

Gail is independent. (state)
Ohio is in the U.S.A. (location)
• The verb to be is unique—let’s review its affirmative form, which is different from all other verbs:
Singular Plural
First Person I am We are
Second Person You are You are
Third Person He/She/It is They are
• All verbs, except for the verbs to be and to have, follow the spelling rules of the simple present. Take a look
at the verb to like.
Singular Plural
First Person I like We like
Second Person You like You like
Third Person He/She/It likes They like
• Third Person Inflection

To form the third person affirmative, pay attention to the following rules:
Verbs ending in –SH, –CH, –X, –S, –Z, or –O Add –ES.
Sam goes to work by car. Cindy washes the dishes after lunch. A mechanic fixes cars.
74
Verbs ending in consonant + –Y Drop –Y and add –IES.
Stacy studies in a great college. (to study) Mike cries during sad movies. (to cry)
All other verbs Add –S.
Mary dances very well. Liam writes poems.
To form the negative and the interrogative forms, it is necessary to use the auxiliary verb Does.
Affirmative: Susan likes to work in the morning.

Negative: Susan doesn’t like to work in the morning.
Interrogative: Does Susan like to work in the morning?
Sentence Structure—Simple Present
Affirmative: Subject + Verb + Complement

Negative: Subject + Don’t/Doesn’t + Bare Infinitive Verb + Complement
Interrogative: Do/Does + Subject + Bare Infinitive Verb + Complement
At a Restaurant with a Friend

Quinn – So, what do you want to eat?
Neil – I don’t know. I like pasta and Mia loves pizza.
Quinn – I like pizza. Cheese or Vegetarian?
Neil – Vegetarian? Do you really like vegetarian pizza?
Quinn – My girlfriend doesn’t eat meat, so I have to
order the vegetarian pizza sometimes.
Neil – Oh, I see. Well, Mia eats everything she sees.
It’s easy and great!
75
BASIC 2
L E S S O N 2
:: COMMON MISTAKES
INCORRECT CORRECT
She like the beach? Does she like the beach?
Josh work on weekends. Josh works on weekends.
Mom don’t like to sleep late. Mom doesn’t like to sleep late.
Tony doesn’t likes coffee. Tony doesn’t like coffee.
L E S S O N 3
ADVERBS OF FREQUENCY
Verbs
Adverbs modify Adjectives
Other Adverbs
There are different positions for adverbs of frequency:
Subject + Adverb + Verb + Complement → Lucy always goes to the beach.

Subject + Verb + Complement + Adverb → Marcy likes to ride a bike sometimes.
• Adverbs of Frequency
Always Usually/Frequently Often
76
Sometimes Rarely/Seldom Never
• Adverbial Expressions: Frequency
Adverbial expressions are normally used at the end of sentences.
a day a day
Once a week Twice a week
Three times (3x), Four times (4x), etc.
(1x) a month (2x) a month
a year a year
At the Dentist
Dentist – How often do you brush your teeth?
Jake – I brush my teeth three times a day.
Dentist – OK. And how often do you floss?
Jake – I always floss.
Dentist – Great. How often do you use mouthwash?
Jack – I use it sometimes.
Dentist – I see. Please, use it every day, OK?
:: STAY ALERT
• Seldom is more commonly used in writing.
•U sually, often, frequently, and sometimes can be used in end position to focus on frequency, but they are
more common in mid position.
Kurt sometimes drives to work. → More common

Kurt drives to work sometimes. → Emphasis on sometimes
:: COMMON MISTAKES
INCORRECT CORRECT
Kate goes frequently to the gym. Kate frequently goes to the gym.
Rick twice a day eats. Rick eats twice a day.
77
BASIC 2
L E S S O N 3
PRESENT CONTINUOUS: SPELLING RULES

Take a look at the timeline for the present continuous.
Continuous Actions/Events
Sentence Structure
Affirmative
Subject + Verb To Be (Present) + Main Verb (–ING Form) + Complement
Negative
Subject + Verb To Be (Present/Negative) + Main Verb (–ING Form) + Complement
Interrogative
Verb To Be (Present) + Subject + Main Verb (–ING Form) + Complement
There are Spelling Rules for the main verb in the –ING Form. Let’s analyze them.
• General Rule: Verb + (–ING)
Play → The boys are playing soccer. Do → Sonia is doing the laundry.
• Verb ending in –E → Drop –E and add –ING
Dance → Cinthia is dancing at the club. Write → Don is writing a new book.
78
• Verb ending in Consonant + Vowel + Consonant with stress on the last syllable →
Double the last consonant and add –ING
Plan → Larry and Stephanie are PLANning a trip. Swim → Lena is SWIMming at the club.
Control → Kim is contROLling the payments this month.
• Verb ending in –IE → Drop –IE and add –YING
Lie → Theresa is lying on the bed. Die → The kid is dying to go to the bathroom.
:: STAY ALERT
Attention to syllable stress.
Refer → She is reFERring to the first paragraph. (2x last consonant)

Travel → We are TRAveling to Asia. (add –ING)
79
BASIC 2
L E S S O N 3
At Home
Pearl – Jake, what are you doing?
Jake – I’m listening to music, mom. Why?
Pearl – Can you give me a hand here?
I’m changing the light bulb, but it’s too
difficult.
Jake – OK! I’m going to be there in a minute.
Pearl – Please, I’m almost falling off this ladder.
:: COMMON MISTAKES
INCORRECT CORRECT
Amanda is joging with her friends. Amanda is jogging with her friends.
Fred is dateing Mary. Fred is dating Mary.
QUESTION WORDS REVIEW

What Who When
Things Activities People Time
Where How Often What Time
Location Frequency Clock Time
80
• With the verb to be
Question Word + Verb To Be + Complement
What’s your name? = Who are you? Where is the meeting? → It’s in the conference room.
→ My name is Jessica. / I am Jessica.
When is your birthday? What time is it? → It’s nine o’clock.

→ It’s in November. / It’s on November 5th.
• With other verbs
Question Word + Do/Does + Subject + Verb + Complement
What do you do? → I am a psychologist. What do you like to drink for breakfast? → I like coffee.
81
BASIC 2
L E S S O N 3
What do you do on vacation? → I travel to the beach. Who do you live with? → I live with my parents.
When do you go out? → I go out on weekends. Where do you have lunch? → I have lunch at a
restaurant near work.
What time do you go to the gym? When do you go out? → I go out on weekends.
→ I go to the gym at 6 a.m.
At the Doctor
Charles – Hello, Miriam. Please, take a seat.
Miriam – Hello, Dr. Charles.
Charles – So, Miriam…What is the problem?
Miriam – I frequently have headaches.
Charles – How often do you have these headaches?
Miriam – Almost every day, usually in the morning.
Charles – What do you eat for breakfast?
Miriam – I have a slice of bread, some coffee, and
some fruit.
Charles – Where do you eat breakfast?
Miriam – In the kitchen. I don’t have much time.
Charles – Hmm...You have to try to eat calmly. I’ll
prescribe painkillers.
82
:: COMMON MISTAKES
I N CO R RE CT CORRECT
You are who? Who are you?
Where is you live? Where do you live?
How often time do you go to the gym? How often do you go to the gym?
QUESTION WORD: HOW OFTEN
How often...? → Frequency
Sentence Structure
How Often + Do/Does + Subject + Verb + Complement
Ann – How often do you have English classes?

Beth – I have English classes twice a week.
• How Often vs. What Time vs. When
How Often →
83
BASIC 2
L E S S O N 3
What Time →
When →
• Possible Answers for Questions with How Often
How often do you eat fruit?
once a day/week/month. (1x)

We eat fruit... twice a day/week/year. (2x)
three/four times a week, a month, a year.
How often do I have to come here?

every day.
every other day.
Ideally, you have to exercise... every two days.
every morning/afternoon/night.
84
Take a look at a dialogue with all these question words:
Trey – Julia, do you want to come to Dave’s party with me?
Julia – When is it?
Trey – It’s next week, on Tuesday.
Julia – What time is it going to be?
Trey – In the evening, at around seven o’clock.
Julia – Oh, I can’t. I have my dance class.
Trey – But you have it on Monday too...How often do you practice?
Julia – Almost every day. I’m off only on Fridays and Sundays.
:: COMMON MISTAKES
INCORRECT CORRECT
How frequent do you work? How often do you work?
How often you go to the gym? How often do you go to the gym?
L E S S O N 4
ADJECTIVES TO DESCRIBE PLACES


Let’s review sentence structure with adjectives?
Sentence Structure
Subject + Verb To Be + Adjective → Corcovado is amazing.
85
BASIC 2
L E S S O N 4
Subject + Verb To Be + A/An + Adjective + Noun → Copacabana is a famous beach.
Subject + Verb + Preposition + A/An + Adjective + Noun → The Botanical Garden is an impressive place.
• Don’t forget that adjectives in English aren’t used in the plural form.
Cape Town and Johannesburg are big South African cities.
• Take a look at some more adjectives used to describe places:
VS. VS.
A FI LT H Y RO O M A N E AT ROOM A DAN G EROU S STREET A SAFE STREET
86
VS. = =
A N O I SY N E I G H BOR H OOD A PE AC E F UL PLACE A CAL M N EI GHBORHOOD A QU IET PLACE
VS. VS.
A W E L L-D E CO R AT E D ROOM A TAC K Y D E C ORATI ON A G REAT PLACE A TERRIBL E PLAC E
VS. VS.
A CO M FO RTA B L E /C OZ Y S OFA AN UN C O MFO RTABL E SOFA A N AMAZ IN G V I EW A HORRIBL E V I EW
Talking about Vacations

Diane – Tell me about Paris, Amy!
Amy – Oh, Diane, it’s an amazing city! The people
are very reserved…but the atmosphere is so
refreshing.
Diane – Really? Isn’t it dangerous?
Amy – Every place is dangerous somehow, you need
to be careful, but it is OK.
Diane – It is a big metropolis. Isn’t it noisy?
Amy – In some areas it is, but it is different if you just
get into a cozy café, order an espresso and a
macaron. It feels…fancy!
Diane – Oh, I can picture it. I’m sure it is a great place.
87
BASIC 2
L E S S O N 4
:: COMMON MISTAKES
INCORRECT CORRECT
London and New York are greats cities. London and New York are great cities.
Hawaii is a peaceful. Hawaii is peaceful.
This is a place safe. This is a safe place.
INTENSIFIERS
Intensifiers + Adjectives = Strong Adjective

Intensifiers + Verb = Strong Action
Sentence Structure
Subject + Verb + Intensifier + Adjective → Angela is very beautiful.
Subject + Verb + A/An + Intensifier + Adjective + Complement → New York is a very busy city.
Subject + Intensifier + Verb + Complement → Anthony really likes to dance.
Take a look at some intensifiers.
• Really • Very, Quite, So, and Extremely
“Bloody Monster” is a really scary movie! Look Bungee jumping is very exciting.
at Brad! He is really scared. Bungee jumping is quite exciting.
Bungee jumping is extremely exciting.
Bungee jumping is so exciting.
88
• A Lot • A Bit, Kind of

Look at Christina’s face near candies. John is a bit hungry. (but not very much)
She likes them a lot! John is kind of hungry.
:: STAY ALERT
Mike goes to the beach a lot. OK

A lot ≠ A lot of Mike goes a lot to the beach. OK
Mike goes to a lot of beaches. QUANTITY, NOT INTENSITY
Leaving a Place
Dea – You’re walking really fast. What’s up?
Tony – I’m very late for a meeting. Talk to you later!
:: COMMON MISTAKES
INCORRECT CORRECT
My mom loves very movies. My mom loves many / a lot of movies.
Tommy eats very chocolate. Tommy eats a lot of chocolate. / Tommy
eats chocolate a lot.
89
BASIC 2
L E S S O N 4
SIMPLE PRESENT VS. PRESENT CONTINUOUS

• Timelines
Simple Present Present Continuous
Facts/Events Continuous Actions/Events
• Use
Facts, Permanent States, Habits, and Physical Laws Temporary, incomplete, or limited-duration actions
around the present moment
• First and Second Persons—Singular and Plural
Example: To Dance

Affirmative Affirmative
I, you, we, they dance. I am dancing.
You, we, they are dancing.
Negative
I, you, we, they don’t dance. Negative
I am not dancing.
Interrogative You, we, they are not dancing.
Do I, we, you, they dance?
Interrogative
Am I dancing?
Are you, we, they dancing?
• Third Person Singular
Example: To Dance

Affirmative Affirmative
He, she, it dances. He, she, it is dancing.
Negative Negative
He, she, it doesn’t dance. He, she, it isn’t dancing.
Interrogative Interrogative
Does he, she, it dance? Is he, she, it dancing?
90
• Keywords

Always, Usually, Normally, Frequently Now, Right Now, At the moment, Today
Sometimes, Often, Rarely, Never Tonight, This month, This week
Every day, Every week, on Mondays
At the Doctor
Dr. Martin – Carol, how often do you exercise?

Carol – I usually exercise, but I’m not going to the gym this week.
Dr. Martin – Why aren’t you exercising this week? (temporary situation)
Carol – I work from nine a.m. to six p.m., but this month I’m working from seven a.m. to four p.m. (fact/
limited-duration action around the present moment)
On the Phone
Laura – Mark, where are you?

Mark – Hey, mom. I’m arriving at school right now.
Laura – OK. Do you have soccer practice today?
Mark – Yeah, we’re training for the finals.
:: COMMON MISTAKES
INCORRECT CORRECT
I’m usually waking up early. I usually wake up early.
I love soccer, but I don’t play this week. I love soccer, but I’m not playing this week.
I walking to work every day, but today I drive. I walk to work every day, but today I’m driving.
91
BASIC 2
L E S S O N 4
THERE + TO BE
There + To Be → Expresses Existence
• There + To Be in the Simple Present
Singular Plural
Affirmative There is / There’s There are
Negative There is not / There isn’t There are not / There aren’t
Interrogative Is there...? Are there...?
There Is/Are + Complement
There Is + Singular Noun

There is a cat in the room.
There is a cat and a dog in the room.
There Are + Plural Noun

There are cats in the room.
There Are + Plural Noun + Singular Noun

There are cats and a dog in the room.
• What is there in...?
What is there in this kitchen?

There is a refrigerator, a microwave oven,
a stove, a table, and chairs.
What is there in this shopping bag?

There are fruits and vegetables.
92
Looking for a House
Real Estate Agent – So, what is there in the house of

your dreams?
Mick – There is a big garden, a large
kitchen with modern equipment...
Anna – There are two floors in our dream
house. There’s a swimming pool
and three bedrooms.
Real Estate Agent – Perfect! I have some houses to
show you. Let’s go!
:: STAY ALERT
There’s a problem with the computer. → Contraction OK → Spoken and Informal language
There is a problem with the computer → No contraction → Written and/or Formal language
There are problems with the computer → Contractions are not possible
:: COMMON MISTAKES
INCORRECT CORRECT
Have three bedrooms in this house. There are three bedrooms in this house.
There many restaurants in Soho. There are many restaurants in Soho.
There are a car and a motorcycle in the garage. There is a car and a motorcycle in the garage.
R E V I E W
HOW TO TALK ABOUT YOUR SCHEDULE

:: LANGUAGE IN ACTION
How do you talk about your schedule and regular activities?

Here is Gaby, a working mom with a very busy life, and she will help you with it.
93
BASIC 2
R E V I E W
In order to talk about your schedule, you need to use:
• Simple Present → For actions that are fixed in your schedule and for habitual actions.
• Present Continuous → For actions you are doing temporarily.
• Time Expressions (Present) → To locate your activities in time.
• Adverbs of Frequency → To express the number of times you do an activity.
• Time → To state what time you do certain activities.
Let’s see what Gaby has to say about her schedule.
Check the element you studied in Gaby’s routine:
• Simple Present: I’m Gaby and I am a working mom. / I work in the office and at home. / I wake up at six
a.m. and then I wake my daughter up; / I prepare our breakfast and eat with my daughter and husband. /
When we finish breakfast, I take a shower and walk my daughter to school. → They are actions Gaby
performs every day.
• Time Expressions (Present): Then, After That, When → Days and Sequence of Events
• Time → At six a.m.
Let’s see what Gaby has to say about her schedule.
94
Here she uses:
• Simple Present: Ride, Get, Read, Write, Participate, Have Lunch → actions that Gaby performs every day or
sometimes
• Present Continuous: Am not going → Temporary Situation
• Adverbs of Frequency: Sometimes, Usually, Normally, Always → the number of times these actions happen
• Time Expressions: When, at the moment
• Time: At one p.m.
Some situations where we can talk about schedules are:
Meeting people Enrolling in a course Informal conversations At the doctor At work
L E S S O N 5
BASIC CONNECTORS: AND, BUT, SO

And But So
Adds Information Opposes Ideas Concludes Ideas
• Position in a Sentence
Sentence or Information 1 + AND + Sentence or Information 2 → Gabe swims and plays soccer.
95
BASIC 2
L E S S O N 5
Sentence or Information 1 + BUT + Sentence or Information 2 → Mike is on a diet, but he doesn’t like salad.
Sentence or information 1 + SO + Conclusion → It is sunny, so I’m going to the beach.
At College
Professor – Guys, the exams are next week,
so you have to study.
Kerry – Professor, I have questions
about Law and Management.
Professor – OK, ask your questions, but the
exam is about Sociology.
:: COMMON MISTAKES
INCORRECT CORRECT
Pam likes movies. Likes theater plays too. Pam likes movies and theater plays too.
So, I don’t go to the beach. I don’t like it. I don’t like it, so I don’t go to the beach.
96
EXPRESSING POSSESSION: REVIEW

• Possessive Adjectives → Express Possession → Together with Noun → My car
Singular Plural
First person My Our
Second person Your Your
Third person His Their
Her
Its
• Possessive Case (’S or ’) → Expresses Possession → Together with Noun or Name
Case 1: Singular Nouns or Names → ’S
This is my friend’s house. Charles’s (or Charles’) sister likes videogames.
CHA RLES CHA RLES’ S SI STER
MARK
Important Note: There are two ways to form the Possessive Case of names and singular words that
end in –S:
Charles’ sister = Charles’s sister. Both are correct, but Charles’s is more common.
My boss’ car = My boss’s car. Both are correct, but boss’s is more common.
Case 2: Plural Nouns → ’
My friends’ wedding was fantastic. Teachers will correct students’ homework at

the beginning of classes.
M Y F R IE N D S
STUDEN TS
97
98
L
E
BASIC 2
S
:: STAY ALERT
S
O
N
5
These are Jack and Mary’s bikes.
These are Hugh’s and Josh’s bikes.

The children’s parents will pick them up.
Case 3: Plural forms that don’t end in –S → ’S
People’s votes are important in a democracy.
A Ride
Kurt – Lia, do you want a ride home?
Lia – Do you have a car?
Kurt – I don’t, but I’m using my dad’s car today.
:: COMMON MISTAKES
INCORRECT CORRECT
My parents’s house is in Chelsea. My parents’ house is in Chelsea.
Where is Tony’ house? Where is Tony’s house?
IMPERATIVES
IMPERATIVES
Instructions/
Orders Requests
Directions
Structure
Verb in the Bare Infinitive Form Don’t + Verb in the Bare Infinitive Form
Sit. Don’t sit here.
99
BASIC 2
L E S S O N 5
• Giving Directions
How do I get from the café to the hotel?

Go straight ahead.
How do I get from the hotel to the school?
Walk down the street, turn left, and then turn right.
How do I get from the school to the food joint?
Cross the street.
• Other expressions with Imperatives to give directions:
Keep going up to Lords Square. Take the 8 bus and get off at St. Johns.
LORDS SQUARE ST. JOHNS
Make a left on 8th Avenue.
8th AVENUE
Lost in Paris
Paul – Excuse me, sir. How can I get to the Eiffel Tower?
Man – Oh, take the train to Champ de Mars and go straight
ahead. You’ll see the tower on your right.
Paul – Thank you, sir.
:: COMMON MISTAKES
INCORRECT CORRECT
Don’t left. Don’t turn left.
Go to straight ahead on Lilly Street. Go straight ahead on Lilly Street.
100
LIKES AND DISLIKES

Things
Likes, dislikes, and preferences
Actions
Things
Expressing Likes
Subject + Like/Love/Adore + Noun
Example: Martha likes basketball.
Expressing Dislikes
Subject + Dislike/Hate/Detest/Can’t Stand/Don’t Like + Noun
Example: Jackson hates soccer.
Actions
Expressing Likes
Subject + Like/Love/Adore + To + Verb Subject + Like/Love/Enjoy + Verb in the –ING Form
Example: Tommy loves to play hockey. Example: Laura enjoys skiing.
101
BASIC 2
L E S S O N 5
Expressing Dislikes
Subject + Don’t Like/Don’t Love/Dislike/ Subject + Don’t Like/Dislike/Don’t Love/
Hate/Detest/Can’t Stand + To + Verb Detest + Verb in the –ING Form
Example: Lyla doesn’t like to run. Example: Leon detests playing baseball.
• Asking About Likes and Dislikes
YES/NO QUESTIONS CONTENT QUESTIONS
Do you like + Noun? What + DO/DOES + Subject + Verb + Complement

Do you like to + Verb?
Does he like + Noun?

Does he like to + Verb?
Do your brothers enjoy + Noun?

Do your brothers enjoy + Verb in the –ING
Form?
Your brothers = They
Does your mother enjoy + Noun? What does Peter like for breakfast?
Does your mother enjoy + Verb in the –ING He likes juice and toast.
Form?
What do you like for breakfast?
Your mother = She I like juice and toast.
• Expressing Preferences: Structure

Important Note:
Things
You use the auxiiary Subject + Verb To Prefer + Noun
verb DO before I, you, Willie prefers pasta. He just loves it.
we, and they.
You use the auxiliary Actions
verb DOES before he, Subject + Verb To Prefer + Verb in the –ING form or To + Verb
she, and it. Willie prefers to go to the beach. or Willie prefers going to the beach.
102
The Weekend
Michael – Honey, let’s order a pizza?
Jenna – Hm, OK. I like pizza, but I prefer to go
out rather than ordering at home.
Michael – Really? I'm feeling lazy tonight...
Jenna – Oh, come on! You know I don’t like to
stay at home on the weekends.
Michael – Fine...I prefer to go out tonight rather
than going out tomorrow.
Jenna – Lovely! Tomorrow we stay in and
watch a romantic movie.
Michael – An action movie...you know I hate
romantic movies.
Jenna – We’ll talk about it tomorrow. Come on,
let’s go.
:: COMMON MISTAKES
INCORRECT CORRECT
I prefer to go out than to stay home. I prefer to go out rather than stay home.
I prefer a burger than fruit. I prefer a burger to fruit.
MAKING REQUESTS
Favors
Requests
Permission
• Can you...? → Informal Favors → You expect the answer

to be “yes.”
Sentence Structure
Can you + Verb in the Bare Infinitive + Complement
Can you help me with the dishes?
103
BASIC 2
L E S S O N 5
• Could you...? → Formal Favors → You don’t know what the

answer will be.
Sentence Structure
Could you + Verb in the Bare Infinitive + Complement
Could you cook dinner tonight?
• May I...? → Formal Permission → You don’t know what
the answer will be.
Sentence Structure
May I + Verb in the Bare Infinitive + Complement
May I help you dust?
At Home
Tanya – Keyla, can you help me clean the house?
Keyla – Sure, mom. What do you want me to do?
Tanya – Could you mop the floor?
Keyla – Sure.
Tanya – Thank you, honey.
:: COMMON MISTAKES
INCORRECT CORRECT
Can you to sweep the room, please? Can you sweep the room, please?
I can help you hang the clothes? Can I help you hang the clothes?
Do you can get the phone, please? Can you get the phone, please?
104
L E S S O N 6
MAKING REQUESTS: REVIEW

Can you
Verb in the Bare Infinitive + Complement Requests
(Ex: Be, Play, Work, Do...) Favors
Could you
May I
Requests
Can I Verb in the Bare Infinitive + Complement
Permission
Could I
A New Secretary
Mr. Carpenter – Ariella, can you bring me some coffee, please?

Ariella – OK, sir. Here it is.
Mr. Carpenter – Thank you. Now, can you collect Rick’s Restaurant contract?
Ariella – Sure.
Mr. Carpenter – Ariella, can I ask you a question?
Ariella – Of course you can, Mr. Carpenter.
Mr. Carpenter – Is this your first job?
Ariella – It is, sir. My first day at my first job.
Mr. Carpenter – It is a great start. I like the job you're doing.
Ariella – That’s great to hear, sir. Can I take my lunch break now?
Mr. Carpenter – Certainly. See you later.
:: COMMON MISTAKES
INCORRECT CORRECT
Can you to send me an email, please? Can you send me an email, please?
I can take my coffee break now? Can I take my coffee break now?
Do you could announce the meeting? Could you announce the meeting?
105
BASIC 2
L E S S O N 6
POSSESSIVE PRONOUNS
are used to refer to a noun that was mentioned before or that is known by the parts.
Possessive Pronouns
are not followed by a noun.
Take a look:
My dog is very sweet. Hers (her dog) is really aggressive.
The Possessive Pronouns are:
Singular Plural
First Person mine (I) ours (we)
Second Person yours (you) yours (you)
Third Person his (he) theirs (their)
hers (she)
its (it)
Structure
There are many ways to use a Possessive Pronoun.
In a Clause
Sentence 1 with a Reference of Possession + Subject + Verb + Possessive Pronoun
Sonia is Mark’s mother, Yvette is mine. (Yvette is my mother.)
In context
Character 1: S
entence with a reference Character 1: M
y pen isn’t working...
of possession. (reference of possession)
Character 2: S
entence with a possessive ere. Use mine.
Character 2: H
pronoun referring to the same thing. (my pen = same thing)
106
Of + Possessive Pronoun
Henry is a friend of mine. (Henry is one of my friends.)
Gift Exchange
Kelly – Hey, honey, here’s your present. Merry Christmas!
Toby – It’s a book. That is so lovely! Thank you so much!
Kelly – You’re welcome! A friend of mine told me it’s a great book! Now…Where’s mine?
Toby – Yours?
Kelly – Yeah…where is my present?
Toby – Christmas is next week, all right?
:: COMMON MISTAKES
INCORRECT CORRECT
Yours friends are coming. Your friends are coming.
This seat is my. This seat is mine.
107
BASIC 2
L E S S O N 6
QUESTION WORDS REVIEW + QUESTION WORD WHOSE

What Who When Where How Often What Time
Things Activities People Time Location Frequency Clock Time
Sentence Order with What, Who, When, Where, and How Often
With the Verb To Be: Question Word + Verb To Be + Complement

With Other Verbs: Question Word + Do You + Verb + Complement
Sentence Order with Whose and Verb to Be:
With the Verb To Be: Whose + Noun + To Be + Complement → Whose bag is this?
With Other Verbs: Whose + Noun + Verb To Be + Subject + Complement → Whose car are you driving?
108
• Answering Questions With Whose
Possessive Case
Whose book is this? It’s Mary’s.
Possessive Adjectives
Where’s Mary? Whose chair is this?
It’s her (Mary’s) chair. Mary will be back soon.
Possessive Pronouns
Is this laptop Mary’s? Whose laptop is this?
Yes, it’s hers (Mary’s).
:: STAY ALERT
Whose car is this? → More common

Whose is this car? → Not very common
Parking
John – There is a car blocking me.
Tracy – But whose car is it?
John – I don’t know. I just know that I need it out.
:: COMMON MISTAKES
INCORRECT CORRECT
Whose are you brother? Whose brother are you?
109
BASIC 2
L E S S O N 6
EXPRESSING TIME
Full hour: It’s + Hour + O’clock → It’s eleven o’clock. Hour and Minutes: It’s + Hour + Minutes → It’s nine ten.
Take a look at other ways:
• Hour and minutes → It’s + Hour + Minutes OR It’s + Minutes + Past + Hour
It’s eight twenty-five. / It’s twenty-five past eight. It’s seven oh five. / It’s five past seven.
• Minutes to the next hour → It’s + Hour + Minutes OR It’s + (60 – Minutes) + To + Next Hour
It’s eleven fifty-five. / It’s five to twelve. It’s eight thirty-five. / It’s twenty-five to nine.
110
• Half past → It’s + Hour + Thirty OR It’s + • A quarter to → It’s + Hour + Forty-five OR It’s +
Half + Past + Hour A Quarter To + Next Hour
It’s twelve thirty. / It’s half past twelve. It’s ten forty-five. / It's a quarter to eleven.
• A quarter past → It’s + Hour + Fifteen OR It’s + A Quarter Past + Hour
It’s ten fifteen. / It’s a quarter past ten.
:: STAY ALERT
Just so you don’t forget:
a.m. → from midnight to 11:59 (in the morning) 12 a.m. = midnight

p.m. → from noon to 11:59 (in the evening) 12 p.m. = midday / noon
:: COMMON MISTAKES
INCORRECT CORRECT
I have dinner at half to eight. I have dinner at half past eight.
The meeting is at forty-five past one. The meeting is at a quarter to two.
It is eight forty-five o’clock. It is eight forty-five. / It’s a quarter to nine.
111
112
L
E
BASIC 2
S
S
O
NOTES
N
6
BASIC 3
L E S S O N 1
DEFINITE, INDEFINITE, AND ZERO ARTICLES

Before singular nouns
Indefinite Articles Indicates “one” of a group
Not used with plural nouns
A → Before consonant sounds
A M AN A WOMA N A HOUSE
A U N IFOR M A HORSE
An → Before vowel sounds
A N H OU R A N ORA N GE A N A RCHI TECT
A N U M BR E L L A A N EMA I L
114
Before nouns that refer to particular things, things people know of

Definite Articles Before nouns that refer to something unique
Not used before proper nouns*
*Exception: used before proper nouns like the United States, the United Kingdom, the Maldives.
The figures in Mount Rushmore The blue chair The Statue of Liberty
No indefinite article before plural nouns
No article before general and uncountable nouns
Zero Article
No article before nouns in unlimited numbers
No article before possessives
You need flour, milk, butter, Tony designs buildings. Sasha loves her car.
and eggs to make a cake
At a Café
Paul – Good afternoon. Table for three, please.
Waiter – Sure. Follow me. Would you like to see the
menu?
Paul – Yes, please. I’d like a cup of coffee and a
bottle of water.
Mary – Do you serve diet soda?
Waiter – Yes, we do.
Mary – Then, a diet soda and an apple tart.
115
BASIC 3
L E S S O N 1
:: STAY ALERT
The use of the article may infer different meanings. Take a look:
Elliot – Patty, want to go out? Maybe to the movies? (the movies = cinema)
Patty – We can. I would love to watch a movie. (one movie out of all the movies in the cinema)
Elliot – How about The Adventures of Mia or Nonstop Nightmare?
Patty – Horror movies are not romantic, Elliot. (horror movies in general)
PLURAL FORMS
Singular = 1 Plural > 1
Let’s review the plural forms in English.
There are words in English that don't have a plural form and words that are always used in the plural form.
Ending in consonant + –Y → Drop the –Y and add –IES. lady – ladies

Ending in –CH, –SH, –S, –X or –Z → Add –ES. box – boxes
Ending in consonant + –O → Add –ES. tomato – tomatoes
Ending in –F or –FE → Drop the –F or –FE and add –VES. wife – wives
Irregular plural → No spelling rules mouse – mice
Other words → Add –S. car – cars
Nouns That Don’t Have a Plural Form
information traffic attention

advice nature mail
help homework
satisfaction education
You may use the quantifier some to express an idea of regular quantity with some of these nouns, like:
some information, some traffic, some attention.
Hi, I need some information.

How much is this book?
Let me see. It’s US$9.
116
Words Always Used in the Plural Form
PAN TS S C IS SORS GLASSES CLOTHES
H E A D P H ON E S S U N G L ASSES SHORTS
Shopping
Will – I hate shopping, but I need new sunglasses.
Paula – You also need new clothes…like new pants and a T-shirt.
Will – No, I don’t. I have clothes.
Paula – You do, but they’re so old.
Mother and Son

Sonia – Jack, get up. It’s time to go to school.
Jack – I don’t want to go to school. I hate school.
Sonia – Here’s some advice: change your mind.
You need education to get a good job.
Jack – OK, OK. I’ll go, but don’t expect me to like it.
Planning a Trip
Gail – Stu, I’m booking your stay in Sidney. What kind of
accomodations do you prefer?
Stu – The kind with a bed and a shower.
Gail – I’m serious! A hotel, a hostel?
Stu – A cheap place with some nature around. Does that work?
:: COMMON MISTAKES
INCORRECT CORRECT
Let’s search for informations. Let’s search for information.
Where is my pant? Where are my pants?
I have lots of homeworks to do. I have lots of homework to do.
I have to collect my mails. I have to collect my mail.
117
BASIC 3
L E S S O N 1
REGULAR VERBS AND VERB TO BE

Simple Past → Completed actions at a specific time in the past.
Past Present
Simple Past—Verb To Be
I, He, She, It was was not (wasn’t) Was I, he, she, it...?
You, We, They were were not (weren’t) Were you, we, they...?
Simple Past—Regular Verbs
Affirmative: Subject + Main Verb (–D, –ED, or –IED) + Complement

Negative: Subject + Did Not (Didn’t) + Bare Infinitive Verb + Complement
Interrogative: Did + Subject + Bare Infinitive Verb + Complement
Spelling Rules for the Affirmative Form
Verbs Ending in E → add D → close – closed; dance – danced
Verbs Ending in Consonant + Y → change Y to IED → cry – cried; try – tried
Other Regular Verbs → add ED → play – played; visit – visited
:: STAY ALERT
Irregular verbs don’t take –D, –ED, or –IED.
Take a look at the differences in pronunciation

for regular verbs depending on its termination.
Verbs ending in voiced sound → Verbs ending in voiceless sound →

pronounce –ED as /d/ pronounce –ED as /t/
scream → screamed talk → talked

play → played kiss → kissed
118
Verbs ending in the sounds /t/ or /d/:

pronounce –ED as /ɪd/
count → counted
found → founded
compensate → compensated
Memories
Peter – Grandma, how long did you and Grandpa date?
Mary – Well, we dated for five years. Then I traveled on
vacation…
Peter – Did he follow after you? How did he propose?
Mary – Oh, he escaped from his parents’ and followed me.
After that, he arrived at my uncle’s house on a horse and
shouted that he wanted to marry me…
Peter – Oh my, that’s so romantic...and a little embarrassing too!
:: COMMON MISTAKES
INCORRECT CORRECT
Mark didn’t played golf last night. Mark didn’t play golf last night.
Did Tony talked to the manager? Did Tony talk to the manager?
TIME EXPRESSIONS ABOUT THE PAST

Simple Past → Specific Time in the Past → Time Expressions, Dates, etc.
Take a look at some time expressions that make reference to the past.
Today is June 10th, 2016.
119
BASIC 3
L E S S O N 1
Yesterday was July 9th. My birthday was last month, in June.

I didn’t work last week. The Olympic Games took place in Rio in 2016.
Paulie returned two days ago.
Take a look at some possible collocations with last and ago:
Last night, last year, last month, last summer, last winter, last fall, last spring
Two days ago, a week ago, a month ago, five years ago
Some expressions are less specific when referring to past time, like:
some time ago in the nineties the other day
At Work
Sheila –
Kate, did you prepare the report for the
marketing department?
Kate – Yes, I did. I finished two days ago and
emailed it to you yesterday.
:: COMMON MISTAKES
INCORRECT CORRECT
I yesterday played basketball. I played basketball yesterday.
Yesterday, I played basketball.
L E S S O N 2
SIMPLE PRESENT VS. PRESENT CONTINUOUS

• Use
Simple Present → Facts, Habits, and Routine Present Continuous → Actions in Progress at the Moment
Facts/Events Continuous Actions/Events
120
Structure
Simple Present
Affirmative: Subject + Main Verb + Complement

Negative: Subject + Auxiliary Verb Do + Not + Main Verb + Complement
Interrogative: Auxiliary Verb Do + Subject + Main Verb + Complement?
Present Continuous
Affirmative: Subject + Auxiliary Verb Be + Main Verb in –ING Form + Complement

Negative: Subject + Auxiliary Verb Be + Not + Main Verb in –ING Form + Complement
Interrogative: Auxiliary Verb Be + Subject + Main Verb in –ING Form + Complement?
Contextual Difference
Simple Present → I usually go to the movies on Saturdays.
Used to describe habit or routine.
Present Continuous → I’m watching a movie with Martin now.
Used to describe an action in progress at the moment.
Simple Present → I work in the afternoons.
Used to describe habit or routine.
Present Continuous → I’m working.
Used to describe an action in progress at the moment.
121
BASIC 3
L E S S O N 2
Non-progressive Verbs
A. S
ome verbs are considered non-progressive,
that is, they are not used in continuous forms.
Need Want
I need to talk to you. The kids don’t want to go.

I’m needing to talk to you. The kids are not wanting to go.
B. Some others, it will depend on their meaning.
1. To have an opinion (Non-progressive)
Think
2. The action of thinking (Used in the continuous form)
1. I think this is a good idea.

2. I’m thinking about taking some days off.
1. To possess something; to be the owner (Non-progressive)

Have
2. To eat or drink; (Used in the continuous form)
1. Anne has three dogs and a cat.

2. I’m having dinner with my sister.
1. The ability to see; to understand (Non-progressive)

See
2. To date (Used in the continuous form)
1. When you see Julio, tell him I need to talk to him.

2. I think that Andrew and Meg are seeing each other.
Canceling Dinner
Husband – Hi, honey. Are you working?
Wife – No, I left work ten minutes ago. I’m going home.
Husband – Listen, I’m thinking about calling my parents and canceling dinner tonight.
Wife – Really? Why?
Husband – Because I have a terrible headache. I just want to go home and rest.
Wife – I see. But don’t you think it’s too late to cancel?
Husband – We can meet them tomorrow. They will understand.
122
:: COMMON MISTAKES
INCORRECT CORRECT
I’m wanting to travel. I want to travel.
I’m understanding you. I understand you.
HOW MUCH AND HOW MANY, NUMBERS, AND SOME AND ANY
How Much and How Many QUANTITY
How much? → Uncountable Nouns
Uncountable Nouns → Liquids, grains, gases, feelings, abstract ideas
liquids water, juice

grains/powders rice, salt, sugar
gases oxygen
feelings love, hate, attention
abstract ideas time, money
How Many? → Countable Nouns
Countable Nouns → Things we can count—table(s), dog(s), wallet(s), cup(s) of water
Structure
With There + To Be:

How Much/How Many + Noun + Is There/Are There?
With Other Verbs:

How Much/How Many + Noun + Do/Does + Subject + Verb?
• Numbers
How many people are there in your classroom?
To answer questions about quantity,
especially with countable nouns,
you use cardinal numbers. Take a look:
There are twelve people in my classroom.
123
BASIC 3
L E S S O N 2
Here are the numbers from 1 to 30:
1 – One 11 – Eleven 21 – Twenty-one

2 – Two 12 – Twelve 22 – Twenty-two
3 – Three 13 – Thirteen 23 – Twenty-three
4 – Four 14 – Fourteen 24 – Twenty-four
5 – Five 15 – Fifteen 25 – Twenty-five
6 – Six 16 – Sixteen 26 – Twenty-six
7 – Seven 17 – Seventeen 27 – Twenty-seven
8 – Eight 18 – Eighteen 28 – Twenty-eight
9 – Nine 19 – Nineteen 29 – Twenty-nine
10 – Ten 20 – Twenty 30 – Thirty
Some and Any
Some = A Part of a Group
→ Used in affirmative, negative, or interrogative sentences
There are some apples in the fruit crate.
How many apples?
I don’t know.
I don’t eat some fruits.
124
Any = Complete Absence = Zero

→ Used in the negative for this meaning
There aren’t any red cars in the garage.
There aren’t any green dresses in the closet.
Making the Grocery List

Carol – Darling, is there any milk in the fridge?
Luke – Hm, no, there isn’t any milk here.
Carol – Are there cookies in the pantry?
Luke – Yes, we have some cookies.
Carol – What about eggs? Do we have any?
Luke – There are four eggs.
:: COMMON MISTAKES
INCORRECT CORRECT
There is any sugar in the pantry. There is some sugar in the pantry.
How much radios are there in your house? How many radios are there in your house?
How many water is there in the fridge? How much water is there in the fridge?
125
BASIC 3
L E S S O N 2
IRREGULAR VERBS
Simple Past → Completed actions at a specific time in the past.
Past Present
Simple Past—Verb To Be
I was a child. I wasn’t tired. Was I OK with it?

You were at home. You weren’t at work. Were you happy?
He was a student. He wasn’t in class. Was he in Paris?
She was a nurse. She wasn’t well last night. Was she sleepy?
It was a nice day. It wasn’t a good idea. Was it correct?
We were together. We weren’t relaxed. Were we informed?
You were here. You weren’t together. Were you in Japan?
They were single. They weren’t married. Were they friends?
Note that the verb to be doesn’t take the auxiliary verb did and its conjugation is different from all other verbs.
Affirmative Form
Subject + Irregular Past Verb + Complement

Jenna drove home last night.
Now take a look at some irregular verbs.
Infinitive Form Simple Past
to go went
to get got
to take took
to keep kept
to make made
to have had
to do did
to send sent
to read read
to write wrote
126
Check the list of irregular verbs in the past at the end of this Language Guide.
Negative Form
Subject + Did Not (Didn’t) + Bare Infinitive Verb + Complement

Jenna didn’t drive home last night.
Interrogative Form
Did + Subject + Bare Infinitive Verb + Complement

Did Jenna drive home last night?
At the Restaurant with a Friend
Ms. Flemming – Good morning, class. Did you read Chapter 7 of the book at home?
Julian – Yes, Ms. Flemming. I read it last night and wrote a summary.
Ms. Flemming – That’s great! What else did you do about this chapter, Julian?
Julian – Well, I had a talk with my mother about it because she was an avid
reader when she was a teenager and still loves this book!
Ms. Flemming – Wonderful! So, what did she say?
Julian – She said that the main character has a great lesson to teach us…
:: COMMON MISTAKES
INCORRECT CORRECT
Gilbert didn’t went to work yesterday. Gilbert didn’t go to work yesterday.
Did you were home last night? Were you home last night?
127
BASIC 3
L E S S O N 2
TIME EXPRESSIONS ABOUT THE PAST AND THE PRESENT

Time Expressions About the Present
Now Right now
Today At this moment
Nowadays This week/month/year
Today is Wednesday, September 27th, 2017.
• Time Expressions About the Present
Yesterday In 1978
The day before Two/Some years ago
At that moment Last week/month/year
Yesterday was Tuesday, September 26th.
128
Sequence of Events
Now
Then
→ After that →
Helping with the House Chores
Leo – Tom, help me clean the house, please!

Tom – Sure. What do you want me to do?
Leo – Did you do your laundry?
Tom – Yeah, I did it last week.
Leo – Not this week? Man, start with your laundry, and then clean the bathroom, please.
Tom – OK. And after that?
Leo – Just do what I asked you to do right now.
129
BASIC 3
L E S S O N 3
2
COUNTABLE AND UNCOUNTABLE NOUNS AND EXPRESSIONS
Countable and Uncountable Nouns
Countable Nouns Uncountable Nouns
Singular and plural No plural

Modified by numerals Substances, liquids, grains/powders, feelings...
Fruits, people, computers... Bread, money, time, medicine, love...
“An apple a day keeps the doctor away.” We need oxygen and water to survive.
How many apples? One apple = countable How much oxygen? Uncountable
How many days? One day = countable How much water? Uncountable
• Quantifiers
You use a
quantifier when...
You don't know You know if it’s a You know if it’s

the exact quantity. large or small quantity. sufficient or not.
Countable Nouns Uncountable Nouns
A lot of A lot of → Very large quantity

Many Much → Large quantity
A few A little → Small but sufficient quantity
Few Little → Small and insufficient quantity
130
Sentence Structure
There + To Be + Quantifier + Noun + Complement →
There are many people on the street. There is a little orange juice in the fridge.
Subject + Verb + Quantifier + Noun + Complement →
We need to drink a few glasses of water every day. Bill Gates has a lot of money.
:: STAY ALERT
Much is normally used with the negative form:
There is not much work to do today. (There’s little work to do today.)
Uncountable nouns can be counted with countable elements:
Water → Uncountable Glasses of water / Bottles of water → Countable

Bread → Uncountable Loaves of bread / Slices of bread / Buns → Countable
Money → Uncountable Dollars → Countable
Time → Uncountable Hours → Countable
Time (as in hours, minutes, seconds) → Uncountable vs. Times (as in frequency) → Countable
131
BASIC 3
L E S S O N 3
Family Dinner
Carly – Oh my God! That is too much food!
Gail – It’s not, you’ll see. There are many people
to eat, too.
Carly – Well, that is true, but I’m on a diet, so
I’ll only eat a little of the chicken.
Gail – Y ou say that all the time, but you can never
resist having dessert.
Carly – Dessert? Is there dessert?
Gail – O f course there is dessert. There is
chocolate pie, cherry crumble, lemon curd...
Carly – Good thing I lost a few pounds already!
:: COMMON MISTAKES
I N CO R R E CT CORRECT
I think I exaggerated and ate much food. I think I exaggerated and ate a lot of food.
Tony needs a loan because he has a little money. Tony needs a loan because he has little money.
Traffic jams happen because of too much cars. Traffic jams happen because of too many cars.
OBJECT PRONOUNS
Object Pronouns → After a verb, as the object of a sentence.
→ Refers to something that was previously mentioned or that is clear in context.

Liam gave Cindy flowers. She loved them! (the flowers)
Subject Pronouns Verb Object Pronouns
Sentence Structure Subject Pronouns Object Pronouns
Subject + Verb + Complement (Object Pronouns) I Me

→ Jake likes me. You You
Imperative + Complement (Object Pronouns) He Him
→ Talk to us. She Her
It It
We Us
You You
They Them
132
At Work
Secretary – Mr. Atkins, Janet is here.
Mr. Atkins – Please tell her to wait a little. (Her = Janet)
Secretary – Yes, sir. Call me when I can tell her to come
in. (Me = I / Her = Janet)
Mr. Atkins – I will.
:: COMMON MISTAKES
INCORRECT CORRECT
Mary’s mom wants to talk to she. Mary’s mom wants to talk to her.
Me don’t work on Sundays. I don’t work on Sundays.
You and me need to talk. You and I need to talk.
SHOPPING
Do you like to go shopping? If so, what do you like to buy?
You can shop for:
C LOT H E S SHOES
GROCERIES ELECTRON I CS
133
BASIC 3
L E S S O N 3
Here are some typical steps while shopping:
• Approaching and Greeting
Salesperson → Hello.
Welcome!
How can/may I help you?
Can/May I help you?
Customer → Hi.
Yes, please.
No, thanks, I’m just browsing.
• Asking for or Offering a Product
Salesperson → Are you looking for something specific?
Would you like to try this on?
Customer → I’d like to try those shoes on.

Can/May I see that (product)?
• Asking for Details
Salesperson → What’s your size?
Customer → Do you have it in (color)?

Do you have it in (size)?
Do you have it in size (number)?
• Asking about Price and Payment
Salesperson → Cash or credit? / Debit or credit?
Customer → How much is it? / How much are they?

How much does it cost? / How much do they cost?
Do you take all credit cards?
Do you take debit cards?
• Reacting to Prices (customer only)
High Prices → Oh my, that’s expensive!

That’s a pretty penny!
That’s more than I can afford…
Low Prices → T
hat’s a bargain!
That’s cheap!
That’s not half bad…
134
:: STAY ALERT
VS.
COINS BILLS
U.S. Currency
PE N N Y = 1 C E N T N ICK EL = 5 CEN TS
DI ME = 1 0 C E N TS QUARTER = 25 CEN TS
ten dollars → neutral

ten bucks → informal (slang)
Shopping at a Fancy Store

Salesperson – Excuse me. May I help you, ma’am?
Carla – Sure. I love this purple dress…Do you
have it in size 12?
Salesperson – Yes, we do. Would you like to try it on?
Carla – Maybe…How much does it cost?
Salesperson – Eighty-five hundred dollars.
Carla – Oh my, that’s expensive! Sorry, I’ll find
something else…
Salesperson – No problem, ma’am. Call me if you
need any assistance.
135
BASIC 3
L E S S O N 3
SIMPLE PAST REVIEW

Simple Past → completed actions at a specific time in the past
Past Present
Regular Verbs Did Not (Didn’t) + Did + Subject +
(–D / –ED / –IED) Bare Infinitive Verb Bare Infinitive Verb
Irregular Verb Did Not (Didn’t) + Did + Subject +

Bare Infinitive Verb Bare Infinitive Verb
To Be (Was/Were) Was Not (Wasn’t) Was/Were + Subject

Were Not (Weren’t)
Regular Verbs—Affirmative Form—Spelling
Drop Add Examples
Verbs ending in –E --- –D love – loved
Verbs ending in –Y –IED spy – spied

consonant + –Y
Other regular verbs --- –ED open – opened
Note that the pronunciation of regular verbs in the past varies according
to the ending sound of the infinitive form.
Verbs ending in voiced sounds: pronounce /d/

Verbs ending in voiceless sounds: pronounce /t/
Verbs ending in sounds /t/ and /d/: pronounce /ɪd/
Irregular Verbs
Verb To Be
I, He, She, It was was not (wasn’t) Was I, he, she, it...?
You, We, They were were not (weren’t) Were you, we, they...?
136
• Verb to be is an irregular verb with its own conjugation: I, He, She, It was / You, We, They were.
• Verb to be doesn’t take the auxiliary verb did to form the negative and interrogative forms:
I was You were
I was not (wasn’t) You were not (weren’t)
Was I…? Were you…?
Other Verbs
Check the list of irregular verbs in the past at the end of this Language Guide.
have – had think – thought go – went
take – took bring – brought come – came
do – did see – saw put – put
buy – bought spend – spent drive – drove
On Vacation
Carl – I’m having trouble deciding where to go
on my next vacation…
Cindy – Well, last year, I went to Prague and I
totally recommend it!
Carl – Really? What did you do there?
Cindy – I walked the city to learn about its history,
went to the Prague Castle complex…
Carl – Oh, what was the castle like?
Cindy – It’s hard to explain, but I think you’ll love it!
Carl – OK, I’ll look into it. Thanks, Cindy.
Did you meet Alan yesterday? Yes, I did. / Yes, I met him yesterday.
Did you have lunch with Sammy last night? No, I didn’t. / No, I didn’t have lunch with Sammy last night.
:: COMMON MISTAKES
INCORRECT CORRECT
Did you went to Paris last year? Did you go to Paris last year?
Paul bringed me a present for my birthday. Paul brought me a present for my birthday.
Did you were home last night? Were you home last night?
137
BASIC 3
L E S S O N 4
EXPRESSING QUANTITY
• Questions
How much…? → Uncountable Nouns
How many…? → Countable Nouns
Sentence Structure
How Much
How Much + Uncountable Noun (Singular Form) + How Much + Uncountable Noun (Singular Form) +
Is There + Complement? Do/Does + Subject + Main Verb?
How much sugar is there in the pantry? How much time do we have?
How Many
How Many + Countable Noun (Plural Form) + How Many + Countable Noun (Plural Form) +
Are There + Complement? Do/Does + Subject + Main Verb?
How many eggs are there in the fridge? How many hours does it take from Boston to
New York?
• Answers
Exact Amount
How much time do we have? You have two hours to finish the exam.
How many eggs are there in the fridge? There are six eggs in the fridge.
138
Quantifiers
Used With Countable Nouns

Large Quantity or Amounts: Many / A lot of / Several / A bunch of / Dozens of / Tons of
How many eggs are there in the fridge? There are many eggs in the fridge.
There are a lot of eggs in the fridge.
There are a bunch of eggs in the fridge.
Enough Quantity: Some / A few
How many eggs are there in the fridge? There are some eggs in the fridge. (But it's enough.)
There are a few eggs in the fridge. (But it's enough.)
Small Quantity (not enough): Few
How many eggs are there in the fridge? There are few eggs in the fridge. We need to get some more.
Used With Uncountable Nouns

Large Quantity or Amounts: Much (usually in negative sentences) / A lot of
How much time do we have? You have a lot of time.

You don't have much time. Hurry!
Enough Quantity: Some / A little
How much time do we have? You have some time. (But it's enough.)
You have a little time. (But it's enough.)
Small Quantity (not enough): Little
How much time do we have? You have little time. Hurry!
Baking a Birthday Cake
Tracy – Honey, let's bake a birthday cake for your Tracy – Butter, sugar, chocolate, and flour.
sister. Help me check if we have all the Mel – All right, we have a lot of butter and
ingredients. How many eggs do we have? sugar here. There are a couple of cans of
Mel – Let' see...How many does it take? chocolate powder and some flour. Let's start,
Tracy – It takes six eggs. we don't have much time. She'll soon be
Mel – OK, we have a few. It should be enough. back from school.
What else?
139
BASIC 3
L E S S O N 4
:: STAY ALERT
Neutral Quantifiers:
Many / Much / Few / A few / Little / A little / A lot of / Several / Dozens of / A couple of
Considered more informal and used mostly in spoken language:
A bunch / Tons of
:: COMMON MISTAKES
INCORRECT CORRECT
How many books you have? How many books do you have?
I have very books. I have many/a lot of/a bunch of books.
HOW OLD, HOW OFTEN, HOW FAR, HOW MUCH, AND HOW MANY
• How = Manner; In What State Or Condition
How are you?

I’m fine!
How do I send emails?
First, you need to have an email account.
140
The question word how can be combined with adverbs and that may change its meaning.
Take a look at some possible uses:
• How Often = Frequency
How often do you take a shower?
I take a shower twice a day.
How often do you visit the doctor?

I visit the doctor four times a year.
• How Long = Duration/Length
How long does it take to go from Rio to

São Paulo by bus?
It takes six hours.
How long is the Champs Élysées?

It is 1.9 kilometers long.
• How Far = Distance
How far is Miami from Orlando?

It’s 379.8 kilometers from Orlando.
How far do we have to run in the marathon?

We have to run twenty-six miles.
141
BASIC 3
L E S S O N 4
• How Much/How Many = Quantity
How Much → Uncountable Nouns

How Many → Countable Nouns
How many cars do you have? I have one car.
How much bread do you eat every day? I eat some bread every day.
• How + Adjectives = To Which Extent/Degree
How tall are you? I’m 1.85…I’m not that tall.

How high is the Empire State building? It’s 381 meters high.
How thirsty are you? I’m not very thirsty.
How tired are you? Just a little.
How early is it? It's at nine a.m.
Happy Hour
Josh – Lucas, how often do you come to this bar?
Lucas – Once a week. I love this place.
Josh – It’s nice for a couple of drinks.
Lucas – And it’s not far from home.
Josh – How far is it?
Lucas – Just one mile from here.
Josh – Cool! How long will we stay?
Lucas – Until eleven. I have to be home by midnight.
:: COMMON MISTAKES
INCORRECT CORRECT
How long time do you study English? How long do you study English?
How long is New York from New Jersey? How far is New York from New Jersey?
THERE + TO BE: PRESENT AND PAST

There + To Be → Expresses Existence
• Simple Present and Simple Past
Singular Plural
Affirmative There is / There was There are / There were
Negative There is not / There was not There are not / There were not
Interrogative Is there...? / Was there...? Are there...? / Were there...?
142
What is there in those boxes? Is there a drugstore nearby?
Hello, is there a Mindy Sabo here? Ma'am, there was a problem with your credit card.
Do you have another one?
Last summer, there were many music festivals in Alamo Park.
Natural Disasters
143
BASIC 3
L E S S O N 4
Michael – Honey, there was a tornado in Saint Louis. Did you see the news?
Sandra – Yes, I saw it. It was terrible. There are dozens of families who lost everything.
Michael – Is there anything we can do to help?
Sandra – I guess...I heard there is a bank account for donations.
Michael – Good. I'll check it out.
:: STAY ALERT
When we use There + To Be in the present:
There’s a problem with the computer. → Contraction OK → Spoken and Informal Language
There is a problem with the computer. → No Contraction → Written and/or Formal Language
There are problems with the computer. → Contractions Are Not Possible
When we use There + To Be in the past, we do not use contractions.
:: COMMON MISTAKES
INCORRECT CORRECT
Had a tornado in Saint Louis. There was a Tornado in Saint Louis.
There was a lot of people protesting on There were a lot of people protesting on
the street. the street.
USED TO
The modal expression used to describes a past

habit: something you regularly did in the past but
you don't do anymore. It can also refer to a state
or situation that is no longer true.
Sentence Structure
Affirmative
Subject + Used To + Verb + Complement → I used to go to school in the morning as a kid.
Negative
Subject + Didn't + Use To + Verb + Complement → I didn't use to like bananas as a kid. Now I do.
Interrogative
Did + Subject + Use To + Verb + Complement → Did you use to live here?
144
If you want to describe past repeated actions or a state or situation that is not true anymore, you will use the
modal expression used to.
:: STAY ALERT
In the negative and interrogative forms the main verb use goes back to its base form:
I used to play with my sister here when I was a child. (Affirmative)

I didn't use to play here when I was a child. It was dangerous. (Negative)
Did you use to live here as a child? (Interrogative)
Childhood Memories
Donna – Wow! I can't believe you found these toys!

I used to love this doll.
Tony – I know. You used to call her Maggie.
Donna – How do you remember that?
Tony – Well…I used to hide it from you all the
time, and you used to cry to Mom:
"Maggie is missing."
Donna – Right! Because you used to be a mean
brother!
:: COMMON MISTAKES
INCORRECT CORRECT
Did you used to live here as a child? Did you use to live here as a child?
R E V I E W
HOW TO TALK ABOUT YOUR BACKGROUND

In order to talk about your background, you can use:
• Simple Past For actions that started and ended in the past
• Simple Present → For your current professional experience, present work/study routine
• Present Continuous → For things you are currently doing
• Time Expressions About the Present and Past → To locate your activities in time
• Expressions that Show Sequence → To connect and organize events in a chronological sequence
• Adverbs of Frequency → To express the number of times you do an activity
Let’s see how these structures work in context?
145
BASIC 3
LR EE S V S I O E N W5
I am doing remote consulting work

Are you working at ABC Bank still, but I’m looking
at the moment? for something permanent.
Tell us about I graduated at Compte School of
your education Math two years ago. Then, I got
and professional a job at ABC Bank and worked
experience. there until last year.
Here are the elements we have in this part of Gaby’s routine:
• Simple Past: I graduated at Compte School of Math... / I got a job at ABC Bank and worked there...
• Present Continuous: Are you working...? / I am doing consulting work… / I’m looking for something permanent.
• Time Expressions About the Present and Past: two years ago, until last year, at the moment
• Expressions that Show Sequence: then
Let’s see other possible sentences you can use to talk about your background.
I have experience in...

I have a degree in accounting/law/medicine...
I have a master's in... / I have a PhD in...
Some situations in which you can talk about your background are:
Informal Conversations Job Interviews College Interviews
L E S S O N 5
BASIC CONNECTORS: AND, BUT, SO, OR

And But So Or
+ ≠ = ×
146
• Position in a Sentence
Sentence or Information 1 + AND + Sentence or Sentence or Information 1 + BUT + Sentence or

Information 2 → Tina loves coffee and milk. Information 2 → Jack loves coffee but not milk.
Sentence or information 1 + SO + Conclusion → Sentence or information 1 + OR + Sentence or
Leah has lactose intolerance, so she doesn’t drink milk. Information 2 → Mike drinks coffee or milk.
At Dinner
Nick – Julie, do you want some wine?
Julie – Oh, no. I’ll have grape juice. I love
grapes, but I don’t really like wine.
Nick – Oh, OK...grape juice then. What do
we order? Spaghetti or lasagna?
Julie – I don’t eat meat, so I’ll have the
vegetarian lasagna.
Nick – I’ll have that too. For dessert?
Julie – I’ll have chocolate ice cream,
chocolate pudding, and an apple
crumble.
Nick – Wow...you really like dessert.
147
BASIC 3
L E S S O N 5
GIVING AND ASKING OPINION

• Asking Opinion
What do you think about...?
What is your opinion about...?
• Giving Opinion
Positive Opinion: Negative Opinion:
An Interview
Reporter – What do you think about the
elections?
Hugo – I think it’s our chance to
make a difference.
:: COMMON MISTAKES
INCORRECT CORRECT
What you think about abortion? What do you think about abortion?
148
GIVING DIRECTIONS
When someone is lost, they need directions.
• Giving Directions
Expressions
Go straight ahead Don’t stop Keep going Turn right / Make a right
Turn left / Make a left Take the bus... Get off at... Cross the street
Expressing Sequence
Take the next street to

your left, then go ahead.
Excuse me,
how I can get to
Storm Road?
Then...
After that...
At the end...
Before...
149
BASIC 3
L E S S O N 5
Looking for a Station
John – Excuse me, ma’am. How can I get to the
nearest subway station?
Martha – It’s not too far. Go straight ahead and then
take the first street on the left. Walk one
block, cross the street, and turn right. You’ll
see the station from there.
John – Thank you, ma'am!
MAKING REQUESTS AND OFFERS
• Requests
Favor
Can you + Verb in the Bare Infinitive + Complement? Could you + Verb in the Bare Infinitive + Complement?
→ Can you open the door for me, please? → Could you stop screaming, please?
Permission
May I + Verb in the Bare Infinitive + Complement? Can I + Verb in the Bare Infinitive + Complement?
→ May I talk to you for a second? → Can I come in?
150
Could I + Verb in the Bare Infinitive + Complement?
→ Could I drink some water, Mrs. Pineda?
• Offers
Would you like + Complement? → Would you like a cup of coffee?
To accept the offer, you can say:
Yes, I would.
Yes, please.
Sure. Thanks.
To refuse the offer, you can say:
No, thanks. Maybe later.

No, thanks. I’m OK, really.
:: STAY ALERT
When requesting permission, it is more common to use may with I and we.
May I come in? → Correct and commonly used.

May she come in? → Correct but not commonly used.
At the Doctor’s Office

John – Good morning, could I speak to Dr. Smith?
Dana – He is busy right now.
John – Can I wait here for a few minutes?
Dana – Sure. Take a seat. Would you like some water?
John – Sure. Thank you.
:: COMMON MISTAKES
INCORRECT CORRECT
Would you to like some water? Would you like some water?
151
BASIC 3
L E S S O N 5
QUESTION WORD: WHY

Why → What is the reason for...
• Why + Verb To Be
Structure: Why + Verb To Be + Subject + Complement?

Why are you tired?
• Why + Simple Present
Structure: Why + Do/Does + Subject + Verb (Bare Infinitive) + Complement?
Why do you wake up early?
• Why + Present Continuous
Why + Is/Are + Subject + Verb (–ING Form) + Complement?

Why are we walking to work?
• Why + Simple Past
Structure: Why + Did + Subject + Verb (Bare Infinitive) + Complement?

Why did Mary sell her house?
• Because...
Question with Why → Answer with Because

Why are you tired?
Because I worked all day.
Father and Son

Barry – Dad, will you lend me fifty bucks?
Paul – Sorry, dude, not this time.
Barry – Why not?
Paul – Because it is the third time you ask me for
money this month.
Barry – But I need the money.
Paul – Why?
Barry – Because I want to go out with my friends.
:: COMMON MISTAKES
INCORRECT CORRECT
Because are you going home? Why are you going home?
152
L E S S O N 6
5
GIVING AND ASKING OPINION

Structure
Asking for Opinion
Questions
What + Verb To Be + Subject + Complement
What is your opinion about Las Vegas?
What + Auxiliary Verb + Subject + Main Verb + Complement

What do you think about Las Vegas?
Indirect Questions
Verb in the Imperative + Your Opinion About + Complement
Tell me your opinion about Las Vegas.
Giving Opinion
Subject + Verb (That) + Complement
I think that it's a great city.
I guess it's too messy.
I believe that I'll like it there.
Weekend Getaway
Lisa – Baby, what do you think about going to Vegas on the weekend?
Mark – I think traveling is always a great idea! But Vegas? I don't know...I think it's a bit messy, don't you?
Lisa – I don't think so. I really believe it will be fun!
Mark – OK, then. Vegas it is! Let's look for some hotel deals for the weekend.
153
BASIC 3
L E S S O N 6
:: COMMON MISTAKES
INCORRECT CORRECT
Do you think it's too late? I think no. Do you think it's too late? I don't think so.
Do you think it's too early? I think yes. Do you think it's too early? I think so. / I think it is.
EXPRESSING POSSESSION
• Use
→ Possessive Case
Expressing Possession → Possessive Adjectives
→ Possessive Pronouns
• Structure
Possessive Case
• Expressing Possession—Proper Nouns
Possessive Case
→ These are Laura’s toys. / This is Jonas’s backpack.
Owner + ’s + Noun
• Expressing Possession—Plural Nouns Ending in –S
Possessive Case → These are the girls’ dresses.
Owner + ’ + Noun
154
Possessive Adjectives and Possessive Pronouns
Possessive Adjective → These are her toys. Possessive Pronoun → These (toys) are hers.
Possessive Adjective + Noun Noun is implicit
Possessive Adjective → This is his backpack. Possessive Pronoun → This (backpack) is his.
Possessive Adjective → These are their dresses. Possessive Pronoun → These (dresses) are theirs.
Looking for Daniel’s Wallet

Daniel – Honey, did you see my wallet?
Elza – I saw a brown wallet in the living room.
Look. Is it yours?
Daniel – No. This is Thomas’s wallet. Mine is black.
Oh, forget it! It’s in my bag.
Elza – Like father, like son. Daniel, you and Thomas have to
take better care of your things.
:: COMMON MISTAKES
INCORRECT CORRECT
This is the Lucia’s book. This is Lucia’s book.
Girls, are these yours dresses? Girls, are these dresses yours?
Girls, are these your dresses?
QUESTION WORDS: HOW AND WHY

long often
far How old
many much
155
BASIC 3
L E S S O N 6
• Structure
How / How far / How old / How long / How often / Why
Question Word (Adverb) + Verb To Be + Subject

How old are you?
Question Word (Adverb) + Auxiliary Verb + Subject + Main Verb
How long does you class last?
How Many
How Many + Countable Noun (Plural Form) + Are There + Complement
How many students are there in the class?
How Many + Countable Noun (Plural Form) + Do/Does + Subject + Main Verb
How many books do you need?
How Much
How Much + Uncountable Noun (Singular Form) + Is There + Complement

How much sugar is there in this recipe?
How Much + Uncountable Noun (Singular Form) + Do/Does + Subject + Main Verb
How much time do you need?
• How + Adverb
How → Manner How Much/Many → Quantity How Far → Distance
How Old → Age How Long → Duration How Often → Frequency
• Why
Why → Asking for a Reason → Why do you have to go?

Answer: Because I have work to do.
156
Family Hike
Mother – How are you feeling, guys?
Fred – I'm tired, mom!
Donna – Me too...How far are we from home?
Father – Not very far, about half a mile.
Fred – Half a mile? How long is that?
Father – About ten minutes. But I have an idea...
Hop on!
Donna – That was a great idea, daddy! Why
didn't you think of that a mile ago?
:: COMMON MISTAKES
INCORRECT CORRECT
How often you study English? How often do you study English?
Because are you working? Why are you working?
USED TO VS. SIMPLE PAST

Simple Past
Used to describe an action that happened at a specific moment in the past.
Used To + Verb
Used to describe past repeated actions, or a state or situation that is not true anymore.
Structure—Simple Past
Affirmative Subject + Verb in the Past + Complement

Negative Subject + Didn’t + Verb in the Infinitive + Complement
Interrogative Did + Subject + Verb in the Infinitive + Complement
Structure—Used to
Affirmative Subject + Used to + Verb in the Infinitive + Complement

Negative Subject + Didn’t + Use to + Verb in the Infinitive + Complement
Interrogative Did + Subject + Use to + Verb in the Infinitive + Complement
157
BASIC 3
L E S S O N 6
I usually drive to work, but yesterday I took the subway.
Simple Present— Simple Past—Used to describe an

Used to refer to routine. action that happened at a specific
moment in the past.
I used to drive to work, but nowadays I take the subway.
Used to—Used to Simple Present—Used to refer to routine.

refer to a past habit.
I really miss going to the beach. When I lived in Los Angeles, I used to go to the beach every weekend.
Simple Present— Simple Past—Used to refer to Used to—Used to refer to

Used to refer to a fact. a specific moment in the past. a past repeated action.
:: STAY ALERT
In the negative and interrogative forms of used to, the main verb goes
back to its base form.
The kids didn't use to like vegetables. Now, they love it.
The kids didn’t like the dish I prepared for dinner.
Did you use to eat vegetables as a child?

Did you eat dinner?
Summer Break
Dayse – Hi, Sonia! How was the holiday break?
Sonia – Hey, Dayse! It was great. I went to Florida with
my family.
Dayse – I love Florida. When I was a kid we used to live
in Georgia, which is very close to Florida. So
my parents used to take us to Florida every
summer vacation.
Sonia – It’s really nice. It was my first time there.
:: COMMON MISTAKES
INCORRECT CORRECT
I used to study French last year. I studied French last year.
I worked out but now I swim. I used to work out but now I swim.
158
INTERMEDIATE 1
L E S S O N 1
GIVING OPINION: AGREEING AND DISAGREEING /

ASKING AND INTRODUCING OPINION
Giving Opinion → Positive Opinion
→ Negative Opinion
→ Neutral Opinion
• Asking for Opinion
What do you think about this dress?
What do you think about...?
What is your opinion about...?
What is your take on…?
Do you think that…?
• Introducing Opinion
Which dress Well, I guess

do you think is I think the that the pink
best for me? blue one suits one is very
you perfectly! pretty.
I think (that)...
I guess (that)...
I’d say (that)...
I suppose (that)...
From my point of view...
In my opinion,...
• Agreeing
Agreeing = To have the same opinion as somebody else.
Coffee is a I couldn’t
perfect drink. agree more.
I love coffee.
I agree with you.

I agree that...
I have the same opinion.
I couldn’t agree more.
That’s exactly what I think.
160
• Disagreeing
Disagreeing = To have a different or completely opposite opinion.
Promoting I disagree.
Thomas is a He is too
great idea! irresponsible.
I don't agree...
I disagree...
I have a different opinion...
I beg to differ...
I don’t think so...
Debating Solutions
Mr. Rickman – Our company is going through a

crisis. I think that we need to cut costs
by firing people.
Mrs. Stuart – I agree that we have to cut costs. But
I disagree that firing people is the solution.
Mr. Rickman – What do you think we should do, then?
Mrs. Stuart – I guess that we need to train people to
improve our performance.
Mr. Rickman – I beg to differ...we don’t have the money
for that!
:: COMMON MISTAKES
INCORRECT CORRECT
In my point of view, home office is the future. From my point of view, home office is the future.
GIVING OPINION: FILLERS AND EXPRESSIONS

Fillers →
Used in spoken language only (or informal internet conversations)
→ Carry no meaning
→ Used to make a pause in speech
→ May indicate the speaker is choosing which words to use
161
INTERMEDIATE 1
L E S S O N 1
Pay attention to the expressions in bold in the sentences.
You know, I think people need to invest in organizations that protect the environment.
I don’t think that forbidding drugs is the solution to violence, you know?
Some things about law are, you know, complicated for the ordinary citizen.
I see…but don’t you think that people must obey the law?
Let me tell you something, the government has a responsibility to its people.
Hmm…I don’t really agree because people also have responsibilities.
It’s like...society works in cooperation, I believe.
Yeah...I guess you’re right.
I know...You’re always here to help.
Well, I’d say that politicians should do good but it doesn’t always happen.
The point is, most politicians forget their principles eventually.
The thing is that when there is a lot of money involved, I guess people go crazy.
My opinion about the situation in Africa...how can I put this...it’s historical and hard to solve.
Talking About the Environment
Julia – Chad, don’t you think there are enough trees in this
garden?
Chad – Well…I don’t think so.
Julia – We can barely walk in here. Trees are important, you know,
but we need to be able to walk.
Chad – Julia, the thing is that there isn’t such a thing as too many
trees. We need them.
Julia – Hmm…I know that. But there’s a limit.
Chad – Let me tell you something, why don’t you use the other
entrance and leave the trees be and produce our oxygen?
162
MODAL VERB: WILL

Will → Used to refer to decisions made at the moment of speaking.
→ Used to refer to predictions based on opinion.
The modal verb Will is commonly used to refer to future events. It expresses the idea of inevitability.
• Affirmative
Structure: Subject + Will/’ll + Verb in Bare Infinitive + Complement
Julia will organize the party.
• Negative
Structure: Subject + Will Not / Won’t + Verb in Bare Infinitive + Complement
will not
Mark travel this year.
• Interrogative
Structure: Will + Subject + Verb in Bare Infinitive + Complement
Will Joe eat at home?
163
INTERMEDIATE 1
L E S S O N 1
:: STAY ALERT
I will do it. I’ll do it.

formal or emphatic spoken or informal language
I will not go there. I won’t go there.
On the Phone
Mary – Hello?
Tom – Hi, Mary, it’s Tom.
Mary – Hi, Tom! How are you?
Tom – Pretty well, thank you. Listen, will you come
for dinner?
Mary – Oh, I’m afraid I won’t. But Kim and Kate will.
Tom – Wonderful! Tell them we will serve dinner at
eight p.m., OK?
Mary – I’ll do it. Bye!
:: COMMON MISTAKES
INCORRECT CORRECT
Peter will to work tomorrow. Peter will work tomorrow.
Mary will goes to the beach this weekend. Mary will go to the beach this weekend.
TIME EXPRESSIONS ABOUT THE FUTURE

In order to understand time references in the future, consider the following information:
Today is Tuesday, August 1st, 2017.

164
Tomorrow, I’ll go to Susan’s party.
One year from now, I’ll move to New York.
In 2019, I’ll get married to Susan.
Time expressions references for the future:
Tomorrow
Susan’s party is tomorrow. Susan’s party is tomorrow afternoon.
Susan’s party is tomorrow morning. Susan’s party is tomorrow evening.
In + year = In 2019 / In 2030
(Number) days/months/years from now = Two days from now / Three years from now
Next = next week/month/year
Planning a Meeting
Mrs. Baker – Sandra, let’s plan the general meeting.

Sandra – Sure, ma’am. When will it be?
Mrs. Baker – It will be next Tuesday, September 4th at two p.m.
Sandra – Wonderful. Until what time?
Mrs. Baker – Until five p.m. Don’t forget to order some items
for the coffee break tomorrow morning
and, in the afternoon, send the emails to the
heads of the department.
Sandra – OK. Consider it done.
L E S S O N 2
CONNECTORS: WHEN AND WHILE

• Use
When means at the moment. While means during the time.
WHEN WHILE
165
INTERMEDIATE 1
L E S S O N 2
• Structure
When → Simple Past + Simple Past While → Past Continuous + Past Continuous
Simple Past + Past Continuous Past Continuous + Simple Past
Sam left when we finished the meeting. Mike was preparing breakfast while I was taking a
When Julia arrived, the baby was sleeping. shower.
While I was taking care of the baby, Mike did the laundry.
Household Chores
Valerie – Yesterday, while my son was vacuuming, my daughter was ironing the clothes. My husband was
cleaning the yard while I was shopping for groceries. We share the domestic chores in my house.
Michelle – That's great. My husband and I do everything together. Yesterday, we cleaned and cooked in the
morning. When we finished, we did the dishes together.
:: COMMON MISTAKES
INCORRECT CORRECT
While I woke up, my sister was cooking. When I woke up, my sister was cooking.
I didn't know when was she traveling. I didn't know when she was traveling.
GIVING OPINION: BEING SUBTLE AND EMPHATIC

Subtle → You give opinion almost as a suggestion.

Giving Opinion
Emphatic → You give opinion in a less flexible way.
There are expressions that may be used to indicate these ways to give opinion:
166
I kind of think that the

• Being Subtle other dress suits you best.
Subtlety implies something that isn’t obvious

and sometimes even hard to identify. So, to
give your opinion subtly you can distance
yourself by using some expressions.
I tend to believe that exercise alone isn’t enough to I guess that maybe living in the city is more exciting.
lose weight.
I probably agree with the idea of taking two vacation I would say that living on your own is liberating.
terms in a year.
I really don’t think you should

• Being Emphatic be texting in the classroom.
Being emphatic means that you want your opinion to

be noticed and to be seen as strong. In order to be
emphatic, you can use some expressions.
167
INTERMEDIATE 1
L E S S O N 2
I do believe that it is OK for a student to have a I strongly believe that the government must be
part-time job. more just.
I definitely believe that people have to take care of I really think that nature is important for human life.
the environment.
Family Feud
Leo – Mary, this is not a debate.

I do believe you need to
spend more time at home.
Mary – But dad...I have college stuff
to do, and I like to hang out
with my friends. I guess that
maybe you’re overreacting.
Leo – Oh, really? Ask your mother.
She says she only sees you
on weekends.
Mary – OK, I’ll try to spend more
time at home.
168
PAST CONTINUOUS
• Use
Actions in progress during a period of time in the past.
past present
Emphasis on duration: Lia was studying from seven to eleven a.m.
Interrupted action: I was taking a shower when you called.
Simultaneous actions in progress in the past: I was cooking dinner and my husband was taking care of the baby.
• Structure
Affirmative: Subject + Verb To Be in the Past + Main

Verb in –ING Form + Complement
She was having breakfast when you
called.
Negative: Subject + Verb To Be in the Past + Not +

Main Verb in –ING Form + Complement
I wasn't watching videos, I was studying.
Interrogative: Subject + Verb To Be in the Past +

Not + Main Verb in –ING Form +
Complement
Were you working yesterday in the
evening?
169
INTERMEDIATE 1
L E S S O N 2
Broken Window
Mother – Hi, honey. How was your day?

Son – Not good, mom. I have to tell you something...I
broke the window.
Mother – What? How did it happen?
Son – The boys and I were playing soccer outside and...
Mother – Wait a minute! You weren't studying, you were
playing with the boys and you broke the window...
Is that what you are saying?
Son – I'm sorry, mom. I really am. But in my defense, I
was studying from two to five.
Mother – We'll see about that when I get your grade on
tomorrow's exam. Now, go to your room.
:: COMMON MISTAKES
INCORRECT CORRECT
I was calling her at ten a.m. I called her at ten a.m.
My wife was working and I cooking dinner. My wife was working and I was cooking dinner.
TIME EXPRESSIONS IN A NARRATIVE

Yesterday, when I was going

So we can have dinner
to work, I met Elza.
together next week.
It was great to see her.

I’ll call her later today.
Past
Time Expressions Present
Future
170
• Structure
Time expressions are used either at the end or at the beginning of sentences in a narrative.
Past
In the summer / the winter / 1970
Last week/month/year
Yesterday
Two days/months/years ago
At that moment
Some time ago
Yesterday, I went to the movies with Paul.
Mary and I went to the movies yesterday.
Present
(Right) now
At the/this moment
Currently
Nowadays
Today
I’m working right now. Can we talk later?
Future
Next week/month/year/Monday/Tuesday/weekend
Later
Tomorrow
By the end of the day/week/month
Tomorrow morning/afternoon/evening
Two days/months/years from now
My husband and I are moving to New York next year.
Sequencing
We also use expressions to help us sequence our narration.
(Right) After that Before that
These expressions may be used in the beginning of sentences.
Then When While
When I arrive at home later today, I’ll help you with While they were having dinner, it started to snow.
the homework. After that, we can go to the mall.
When = at the time While = During the time
171
INTERMEDIATE 1
L E S S O N 2
Family Tale
Helen – How did you meet daddy, mom?

Anne – It was in the summer of 1997 and we were
both taking our undergraduate studies. He
came to talk to me about the class during
the break. I think it was just an excuse, but
it worked because just one week later we
were dating.
Helen – How long after that did you get married?
Anne – We got married in March 2000.
Helen – That’s right, it’s your anniversary next month.
:: COMMON MISTAKES
INCORRECT CORRECT
They arrived in last week. They arrived last week.
They will arrive in next week. They will arrive next week.
L E S S O N 3
EXPRESSING QUANTITY: REVIEW

When you know the exact quantity of something, you can use numbers. But when you don’t, you need to use
expressions that relate to countable and uncountable nouns.
COUNTABLE NOUNS UNCOUNTABLE NOUNS
Question: How many? Question: How much?
Quantifiers: Quantifiers:
A lot of → Very large quantity A lot of → Very large quantity
Many → Large quantity Much → Large quantity (commonly used in the negative)
A few → Small but sufficient quantity A little → Small but sufficient quantity
Few → Small and not sufficient quantity Little → Small and not sufficient quantity
• Some and Any

Professions
Physician / Biologist / IT analyst / Journalist /

Human Resources Specialist / Singer / Surgeon /
Fashion Designer / Driver / Chef / Accountant
172
There are some professions in the group. (Not all, but part of the professions there are.)
There aren’t any companies in the group. (There is not one company, at all.)
Some = A part of a group → Commonly used in negative or interrogative sentences

Any = Complete absence → Commonly used in negative for this idea
• Other Ways to Express Quantity
Lots of / A bunch of → Similar to “a lot of” but more informal.
There’s a bunch of people in the concert.
Several → Similar to “many.” Plenty of → A
quantity that is rather large and sufficient.
There are several career options one can Tony has plenty of work to do, he doesn’t need any
choose from. more courses.
:: STAY ALERT
Some → Refers to a part of the whole

I love some classic music.
Any → Refers to the whole, either for presence or absence

I like any classic music. (all classic music)
I don’t like any classic music. (none)
173
INTERMEDIATE 1
L E S S O N 3
Job Hunt
Lia – Here, Jake. Look at the ad, there are plenty
of placements for interns.
Jake – Let me see...oh, many of them are very far.
What do I do?
Lia – You can go on some interviews, learn how
the process works.
Jake – Do you think so?
Lia – Yeah, you have nothing to lose.
MODAL VERBS: CAN AND COULD
• Structure
Subject + Can + Verb Subject + Cannot / Can’t + Can + Subject + Verb

(Bare Infinitive) Verb (Bare Infinitive) (Bare Infinitive)
Subject + Could + Verb Subject + Could not / Couldn’t + Could + Subject + Verb
(Bare Infinitive) Verb (Bare Infinitive) (Bare Infinitive)
• Can
Present Ability Informal Permission and Request
Mario can swim very well. Katy – Dad, can I borrow your car? (Do you let me
(Mario is able to swim very well.) borrow your car?)
Paul – Yes, you can. (Yes, I permit.)
Note: When using Can to make requests, you expect the answer to be “yes.”
174
Possibility
Let’s grab something to eat? We can have a

sandwich or a proper meal. (It’s possible for us
to have...)
• Could
Past Ability Polite Permission and Request
I miss my teens. I could sleep until late then, but now I Mr. Sparrow, could I arrive a little later tomorrow?
have to work early. (I was able to sleep until late…) (Would it be possible for me to arrive a little later…?)
Note: When using Could to make requests, you

Remote Possibility have no idea what the answer will be.
I’ll negotiate with Mr. Dickinson, maybe he could

extend the deadline. (There’s a slight chance he will...)
Asking for Help
Elliot – Dave, can you help me translate this email?

Dave – That depends. Which language is it?
Elliot – It’s French.
Dave – Oh, I could understand French well, but
I forgot most of it.
Elliot – Are you kidding?
Dave – I’m not! Out of practice, you know. We could
try with a dictionary.
:: COMMON MISTAKES
INCORRECT CORRECT
Larry can to drive us there. Larry can drive us there.
Joan can draw when she was a kid. Joan could draw when she was a kid.
Mark can not leave early. Mark cannot leave early.
175
INTERMEDIATE 1
L E S S O N 3
PRONOUN REVIEW AND REFLEXIVE PRONOUNS

Pronouns → Substitute nouns or noun phrases, as in:
John loves Sarah. He wants to marry her.
He = John
her = Sarah
• Subject Pronouns: Function as the subject of a sentence; they come before verbs.
Singular Plural
First person I We
Second person You You
Third person He / She / It They
• Object Pronouns: Function as the object of a sentence; they usually come after verbs and/or prepositions.
Singular Plural
First person Me Us
Second person You You
Third person Him / Her / It Them
• Possessive Pronouns: Substitute a reference of possession previously mentioned.
Singular Plural
First person Mine Ours
Second person Yours Yours
Third person His / Hers / Its Theirs
• Reflexive Pronouns: Used when the subject and the object of the verb refer to the same person/thing.
Johnny is looking at himself in the mirror.

(Johnny)
OBJ E CT
SU BJE CT
If I were in your shoes, I would wait a while before investing all my money.
• Modals, Semi-modals, and Modal Expressions

It is very common to resort to modality to express advice. There are a few structures you can use to this end.
Singular Plural
First person Myself Ourselves
Second person Yourself Yourselves
Third person Himself / Herself / Itself Themselves
176
:: STAY ALERT
I don’t need help. I can do it. → Neutral

I don’t need help. I can do it myself. → Emphatic
At the Psychologist
Pam – So, Julian, why are you here?

Julian – I think I’m crazy, doc.
Pam – Hmm, and why do you consider yourself
crazy?
Julian – Because I have conversations with myself...
Pam – But that is not crazy...lots of people do that.
Julian – Really? What a relief!
:: COMMON MISTAKES
INCORRECT CORRECT
I cut me with a knife. I cut myself with a knife.
Listen to myself! You are being stupid. Listen to me! / Listen to yourself! You are being stupid.
SIMPLE PAST VS. PAST CONTINUOUS

Simple Past Past Continuous
Single action completed at a point in the past. Action that was in progress for a while in the past.
Affirmative Form: Regular and Irregular verbs Affirmative Form: To Be (past) + Verb in –ING
Negative Form: Auxiliary Didn’t + Verb Negative Form: To Be (past neg.) + Verb in –ING
Interrogative Form: Auxiliary Did + Subj. + Verb Interrogative Form: To Be + Subj. + Verb in –ING
The simple past and the past continuous can appear together, even though they are very different.
• Simple Past vs. Past Continuous
177
INTERMEDIATE 1
L E S S O N 4
3
• Case 1: One action in progress interrupted another action.
Continuous Action present
Lyla was taking a shower when Michael called.
• Case 2: An action was in progress until another action happened.
Continuous Action present
Lia was drinking coffee until her boyfriend arrived
Connectors
It is important to notice that in these cases there are two sentences linked by a connector.
Some connectors used are:
Nick was doing his homework before you arrived. Lyla set the table while Mia was preparing the dessert.

Henry was taking a shower when his girlfriend called.

Talking About an Accident
Joan – Oh my god, Peter! How are you? What happened?

Peter – There was fire in my house but nothing serious.
Joan – Oh, my! But do you know where it started?
Peter – I was taking a shower when the fire started so I just
had time to run. Mia was cooking dinner and noticed
something burning, so she called the firefighters.
Joan – Is the house safe?
Peter – Yeah…we’re insured. We have to wait for the police
to conclude the investigation and then we can start
the repair.
178
L E S S O N 4
GIVING OPINION: EXPRESSING CERTAINTY AND DOUBT

Giving Opinion → Certainty → You are absolutely sure of what you’re saying.
→ Doubt → You aren’t sure of what you’re saying.
• Expressing Certainty
When you are talking about something you are sure of,
you can use some expressions to introduce your opinion. I am sure that this partnership will be successful.
I am sure (that)...
I am positive that...
I am quite sure...
I am pretty sure...
I am certain that...
I am almost sure that...
There is no doubt about that...
For sure (used in the end of sentences,
not in the beginning)
• Expressing Doubt
I am not sure that this project
When you are not really sure of something but still want to is complete...what do I do?
speak your mind, here are some expressions you can use:
I am not sure that...

I don’t know exactly...
I could/might be wrong but...
Well, I might + Verb...
Well, I could + Verb…
Maybe…
• Fillers
Fillers are words without meaning that are used to make

pauses and think about how to continue your speech.
Here are some fillers:
You know...
Let me tell you something...
Hm...
...like... (used in the middle of sentences)
Yeah...
Well...
I see...
You see...
The point is...
The thing is...
179
INTERMEDIATE 1
L E S S O N 4
Debating a Project
Hugh – Lilian, what do you think about Lionel’s idea for the
project?
Lilian – Well, we might have some problems there.
Hugh – I’m sure you have another idea, then...
Lilian – Hm...not exactly. I am positive that we need to control
the budget and still deliver the project, but how?
Hugh – So, think about it. I could be wrong but this is a good
chance for you to impress the director.
MODAL VERB MUST AND HAVE TO
Must is a modal verb, which is used to modify the meaning of verbs.
Semi-modals modify the meaning of verbs but take

Have To is a semi-modal →
a different sentence structure from modal verbs.
Affirmative Form Negative Form

Have To Must Have To ≠ Must
• Must
Obligation (internal) → The speaker perceives the action as mandatory.

Subject + Must + Verb (to) Subject + Must Not (Mustn’t) + Must + Subject + Verb (to)
Verb (to) (different meaning)
We must teach our children to respect everybody.
Note: Mustn’t (the negative form of Must) expresses prohibition.
180
• Have To
Obligation (external) → The speaker perceives the action as mandatory because it is an order, a command,
or a law to be followed.
The director gave the order, so I have to check the archives first.
Note: In the negative form—do not (don’t) have to or does not (doesn’t) have to—the meaning is “it is not
necessary.”
Planning the Weekend
Cindy – Hey, Harry. Let’s travel this weekend?

Harry – No no no…I have to do some research for
my master’s dissertation.
Cindy – But you just have to deliver it six months
from now…
Harry – Cindy, the company is paying for the course
and Mr. Johnson told me I have to pass or
I won’t get a promotion.
Cindy – OK…but you don’t have to sacrifice your
whole life! I mean, just one weekend?
Come on…
:: COMMON MISTAKES
INCORRECT CORRECT
She have to do her job. She has to do her job.
I really want to pass, so I have study. I really want to pass, so I have to study.
181
INTERMEDIATE 1
L E S S O N 4
MODAL VERBS (MUST AND SHOULD)

• Structure
Subject + Must + Verb (to) Subject + Must Not (Mustn’t) (to) + Must + Subject + Verb (to)
Subject + Should + Verb (to) Verb (different meaning) Should + Subject + Verb (to)
Subject + Should Not (Shouldn’t)
(to) + Verb
• Must (Obligation)
Gillian must check her work emails every day. (= It is mandatory that Gillian do that.)
• Mustn’t (Prohibition)
Mike mustn’t hire an assistant without the CEO’s permission. (= Mike is prohibited/
forbidden to hire without permission.)
• Should (Advice/Recommendation)
Steve should prepare the report in advance to avoid being late. (= It is advised/
recommended that Steve do that.)
Planning a Branch Opening
Claus – Mr. Smith, we’re confirming the invitations

for the opening. Should I invite the mayor
too?
Mr. Smith – No no no…I must invite him myself—it’s my
job as chairman. So, please, just prepare
the invitation.
Claus – No problem, sir. Uh, we need more details
on our budget…
Mr. Smith – Well, you should spend as little as
possible, but make a beautiful reception
for our community…However, you must
not spend more than a hundred thousand,
OK?
Claus – Copy that, sir. I’ll be right on it…
:: COMMON MISTAKES
INCORRECT CORRECT
You should to make the balance. You should make the balance.
182
NARRATIVE TIMELINE
Story → Narrative → Moves from the past to the present and into the future
In order to make a narrative, it is necessary to use verb forms and time expressions that show the
chronological sequence of the actions.

• Narrative About the Past
Verb Forms
Simple Past → Single complete action at a defined point in the past.

Affirmative: Regular Verbs (–D, –ED, –IED) and Irregular Verbs (list at the end of the book)
Negative and Interrogative: Auxiliary Verb Did
Past Continuous → Action that was temporary and/or in progress during a period in the past.
Affirmative: To Be (in the past) + Verb –ING
Negative and Interrogative: Follow the structure of the Verb To Be in the past
Time Expressions
Last year / Yesterday / Two days ago / Last (season) / Last month / Last week / In (year) / Back in (year)
• Narrative About the Present
Verb Forms
Simple Present → Actions that represent facts or routine.

Affirmative: Simple form for I, you, we, they and third person inflection (–S, –ES, or –IES)
Negative and Interrogative: Auxiliaries Do (I, you, we, they) and Does (he, she, it)
183
INTERMEDIATE 1
L E S S O N 4
Time Expressions
Today / Now / Right now / At this moment / Nowadays / Currently / This month / This week /
This year / On (weekday) / In (month)
• Narrative About the Future
Verb Form
Modal Verb Will → Modify verbs giving an idea of prediction based on the speaker’s perspective.
Affirmative: Will + Verb (Bare Infinitive: Without To)
Negative: Will not/Won’t + Verb (Bare Infinitive: Without To)
Interrogative: Will + Subject + Verb (Bare Infinitive: Without To)
Time Expressions
Tomorrow / Tomorrow morning / Today / By the end of the week / In the beginning of the week /
Next month / Next year / In ten years / In a few days
Other expressions and connectors that are used to connect events in time and sequence them in a narrative.
When / While / After that / Right after / Then
Talking About Life
Wendy – Grandpa, how do you feel today?

John – I feel fine, honey. You know, when I look at you, I remember when you were a little girl. One
day, you were running around this room and you fell. When you stood up, you started laughing.
Wendy – That sounds like me.
John – Yeah! Then I look at you now, and you’re a successful professional, a loving mother. I know we
did a good job and that you will be old and happy just like me and your grandma.
184
R E V I E W
HOW TO MAKE PREDICTIONS AND EXPRESS

DIFFERENT DEGREES OF CERTAINTY
In order to make predictions, and to express different degrees of certainty, you can use:
• Modal Verb Will → For predictions based on your decision and personal opinion.
• Modal Verbs Can and Could → For possibilities.
• Time Expressions About the Future → To locate your activities in time.
• Adverbs That Indicate Certainty → Definitely, surely, absolutely, undoubtedly.
• Adverbs That Indicate Doubt → (Un)likely, probably, hardly, barely.
• Expressions to Indicate Certainty → I’m pretty sure… / I’m positive… / I totally think…
• Expressions to Indicate Doubt → I’m not really sure but... / I guess… / I might be wrong but…
Let’s see how these structures work in context?
It’s Career Day in Nicole and Lee’s school and they had to go to
school dressed as the professionals they want to be in the future.
Nicole says she will be a doctor because she loves to take

care of people. She is not sure, but she can become either
a pediatrician or a neonatal specialist. The only thing she is
absolutely sure of is that she loves children. In the future, she
will be a volunteer in Africa to help people who are really poor
and need assistance to survive.
Lee is positive he will have to study very hard to be an

engineer. A few years from now, he predicts that he will win
a math competition because he is really good at it. He will
build things but he could also change his mind and study to
become an astronaut. Lee believes that in twenty years, after
he graduates, humans will live on other planets too and he will
help build the houses there.
Here are the elements we have in these predictions made by Nicole and Lee.
• Modal Verb Will: She will be a doctor... / She will be a volunteer in Africa... / He will have to study
very hard... / He predicts that he will win a math competition... / He will build things... / Humans will
live on other planets and he will help build the houses there.
• Modal Verb Can and Could: She can become either a pediatrician or a neonatal specialist... / He
could also change his mind and study to become an astronaut.
• Time Expressions About the Future: In the future, A few years from now, in twenty years
• Adverbs and Expressions to Give Opinion: She is not sure but… / The only thing she is absolutely
sure is… / Lee is positive… / Lee believes that…
Some situations in which you can talk about your predictions about the future are:
Informal Conversations Job Interviews Paper Presentations About the Future

TV News Editorials Debates About the Future of the World
185
INTERMEDIATE 1
L E S S O N 5
CONNECTORS: ADDITION AND CONTRAST

Connectors
• Addition (+)
Connectors of addition link complementary elements or ideas. Some connectors of addition are:
And Besides that Also Moreover Furthermore
Sunny weather + High temperature

The weather today is sunny and the temperature is really high.
186
Rainy weather + Mild temperature
The weather today is rainy. Besides that, the
temperature is mild.
Beautiful day + Ideal for a picnic
It’s a beautiful day today. It's also it’s an ideal day
for picnic.
It’s raining + Need to study

Let’s stay in, it’s raining. Moreover, I need to study for
the test.
It’s too hot at the beach + Air conditioning at home

I don’t really like to go to the beach because it’s too
hot. Furthermore, there’s air conditioning at home.
187
INTERMEDIATE 1
L E S S O N 5
• Contrast (vs.)
Connectors of contrast link contrary elements or ideas. The connectors of contrast are:
But On the other hand On the contrary

Although Even Though However
It’s sunny vs. It’s not hot
It’s a sunny day but it’s not hot.
Go out vs. Clean up

I’d love to go out. On the other hand, I need to clean
up the house.
A weird date vs. Have a great time

It wasn't one of those weird dates; on the contrary,
I had a great time!
It’s nice outdoors vs. Prefer staying in

Although it’s nice outdoors, I prefer staying in and
reading a book.
188
Love loud music vs. Don’t like to bother people

Even though I love loud music, I don’t like to bother
people.
I’m not athletic vs. Run in the park
I’m not athletic. However, I run in the park sometimes.
:: STAY ALERT
Connectors like although and even though can be used in the beginning of the first clause or between the
two clauses.
Although Gillian is a very responsible worker, she arrives late too many times.
Gillian arrives late too many times, although she’s a very responsible worker.
Even though Gillian is a very responsible worker, she arrives late too many times.
Gillian arrives late too many times even though she is a very responsible worker.
Watching TV
Elliot – Vera, do you know this show Superfuzz?

Vera – Yeah! It’s all right but a little tiring after
some time.
Elliot – I think I agree with you. I guess it’s the
presenter. Besides that, it's too repetitive.
189
INTERMEDIATE 1
L E S S O N 5
GIVING OPINION: ASKING FOR CLARIFICATION

AND CHECKING UNDERSTANDING
Giving Opinion in a Conversation → Checking Understanding → “Do you know what I’m saying?”
→ Asking for Clarification → “What do you mean?”
• Checking Understanding
You use expressions to check understanding to make sure the listener is paying attention to you and
understands what you’re saying.
You know I like horror movies, right?
Do you get what I'm saying?

Do you know what I mean?
Did I make myself clear?
You know?
Right?
Yeah?
• Asking for Clarification
You use expressions to ask for clarification when you are listening to someone’s opinion and you don’t
understand.
Mark – I think this dress doesn’t suit you.

Leah – What do you mean?
What do you mean?

I don’t get it...
I beg your pardon?
Come again...
How come?
Hosting Dinner
Jack – So, what do you guys think about the meal?

Hugh – I think it’s great but I’d use more salt.
Jack – What do you mean?
Hugh – People say it’s impolite to add salt, right? But
I’d like more salt.
Jack – Oh, I see...you can add more salt! I won’t
think you’re impolite, you know?
190
GIVING OPINION: REVIEW

When it comes to exchanging opinions, there are different functions, each with expressions you can
use. Let’s review some of them.
• Asking for Opinion
What do you think about...? / What is your opinion about...? / What is your take on…? /
Do you think that…?
• Agreeing
To Agree = To have the same opinion as someone else
I agree with you. / I agree that... / I have the same opinion. / I couldn’t agree more. /
That’s exactly what I think.
• Disagreeing
To Disagree = To have a different or completely opposite opinion
I don't agree... / I disagree... / I have a different opinion. / I beg to differ. / I don't think so.
When you don’t understand what the other person says you ask for clarification.
What do you mean by...? / Come again? / I beg your pardon? / Sorry, I don’t get it. /
Can you say that again? / I am not sure I understand. / What? / Say that again.
• Checking Understanding
When you want to know if the listener is following your statements you check understanding.
Got it? / Does that make sense? / Do you have any questions? / Do you understand that? /
Are you following me?
191
INTERMEDIATE 1
L E S S O N 5
• Being Subtle
It is not what is said but how it is said. In certain situations, you don’t want to say things directly and risk
sounding rude.
I kind of think that... / I tend to believe that... / I guess that maybe... / I would say that... /
I might be wrong but I think… / I probably agree with…
• Being Emphatic
Sometimes it’s necessary to make a point, but remember that being emphatic is not being rude.
I do believe that... / I strongly believe that... / I definitely believe that... / I really don't think
that... / I (certainly/definitely/deeply) agree with...
Interview 1
Reporter – What is your opinion about the situation of stray dogs? (asking for opinion)
Annie – I really think the government should take responsibility and collect those dogs. (Being emphatic)
Reporter – Don’t you think that the people should also take action? (asking for opinion)
Annie – What do you mean? (asking for clarification)
Reporter – Well, some animals run away but there are also cases of abandonment.
Annie – Yeah, but I disagree that it’s only the people. There is a lot the government can do to teach
people about respecting life as a whole, you know. (disagreeing)
Reporter – Thank you for your opinion.
Interview 2
Reporter – Do you think it is important to adopt stray dogs? (asking for opinion)
Jake – Not really. I think people do what they feel like doing.
Reporter – But there are many abandoned dogs on the streets.
Jake – I agree and it’s horrible when people abandon their pets. (agreeing) However, when it comes to
how to get a pet, I tend to believe that people can opt to buy or adopt and it’s nobody’s place to
judge. (being subtle)
Reporter – Thank you for your opinion.
192
MODAL VERBS: MAY AND MIGHT

Modal Verbs → Add meaning to the main verb according to the speaker’s interpretation of facts.
→ May have different ideas depending on the context and the speaker’s goal.
→ Used with verbs, no preposition between them.
Possibility
May Might
• May
Strong Possibility
Ian may travel with his family next month. (It’s very likely he will do it.)
I can ask my boss, but I may not be able to leave early tomorrow. (It is very likely that I won't leave early.)
Permission
May I have a word with you? (Do you allow me to have a word with you?)
You may enter. (You have my permission to enter.)
• Might
Remote Possibility
Anthony is busy today, but he might show up at the party. (There is a slight chance Anthony will show up.)
Elaine’s baby might not be a girl. (There is a slight chance the baby will be a boy.)
*Might isn’t normally used in direct questions, but you can make indirect questions with it.
Do you think you might have a chance at the race?
At the CEO’s Office
Mario – Excuse me, sir. May I come in?

Mr. York – Sure, Mario. How may I help you?
Mario – We need to organize a gathering
for the holidays.
Mr. York – About that...our finances aren’t good.
We might have to cancel the celebrations.
Mario – But is there still a chance?
Mr. York – Give me a few weeks and I’ll see what
we can do.
Mario – Great. Thank you, sir.
193
INTERMEDIATE 1
L E S S O N 5
:: COMMON MISTAKES
INCORRECT CORRECT
May I to talk to you? May I talk to you?
We might don’t go to the party. We might not go to the party.
RELATIVE PRONOUNS: WHO AND THAT
Relative Pronouns → Modify nouns or some pronouns → Used to identify people and things or to give extra
information about them.
Note: That is also an alternative for which. Check the chapter about the relative pronoun which to learn its use.
• Relative Pronoun Who
• Who replaces a repeated reference of people, introducing a relative clause.

• It may give extra information or essential information about the subject.
• Who is the subject of the relative clause.
The postman, who came this morning, delivered an

important message.
Extra information → Not necessary to understand

who the postman is.
Note: When used to add information, the relative

clause introduced by Who comes in between
commas (,).
Johnny is the postman who came this morning.

Essential information to identify the postman.
194
• Relative Pronoun That
• That replaces who in more informal contexts.

• That may be used to identify people.
• Relative clauses introduced by that don’t come in between commas (,).
Juliet usually makes friends with people that are
trustworthy and show her a good time.
Essential information to identify the subject.
Juliet is a woman that values her right to be

independent.
Essential information to identify Juliet.
Talking About Love Interests
Gail – I know you are interested in someone,

Sarah. Come on, tell me.
Sarah – It’s Phil…from the office.
Gail – Phil who gave you a ride home the other day?
Sarah – Exactly. He is also the person that comes by
my desk to say good morning every day.
Gail – Oh my god! You’re so going to get together.
Sarah – Well, I don’t know. He used to have a
girlfriend who works in the office. It’s weird.
Gail – Just go for it, be happy, girl.
L E S S O N 6
CONNECTORS: CONCLUSION
Connectors → Conjunctions → Conclusion

→ You can use prepositions, linking words, and expressions.
195
INTERMEDIATE 1
L E S S O N 6
• Conclusion
Connectors of conclusion link the origin to the conclusion

itself. They may also have a relationship of cause and
consequence.
So Because of that As a conclusion Summing up To make a long story short Therefore

As a result To conclude As we have seen As we all know In short
Hurt foot → Can’t play football
Jake’s foot is hurt, so he can’t play football.
Short on cash → Won’t go out tonight

Noel is short on cash, because of that he won’t
go out tonight.
Worked all day, exhausted and hungry → Stay at home

I worked all day, I’m exhausted and hungry. Summing
up, I’m staying at home.
Operations were weak → Cut expenses

Our operations were weak this month. As a
conclusion, we need to cut expenses.
*Connectors such as To make a long story short, As we have seen, As we all know, and In short, tend to
come at the end of texts to conclude the idea based on all that was seen before.
196
Dilemma
Erika – Mom, I don’t know what to do. I need to lose
weight but I can’t resist the food at weddings!
Anna – Erika, you have your own wedding in two
months and a dress to fit in. In short, you
have no option.
Erika – I know. But I have three other weddings to
go to until then. Should I skip them?
Anna – No, Erika. You have your goals, so stick to
them.
:: COMMON MISTAKES
INCORRECT CORRECT
So I don’t eat chocolate, I don’t like it. I don’t like chocolate, so I don’t eat it.
MODAL VERBS (REVIEW)

Modal Verbs → Auxiliary Verbs used to express modality (such as ability, obligation, necessity, and possibility)
according to the speaker’s perception. They don’t add time or factual elements to verbs.
• Structure

Subject + Modal Verb + Verb (to) Subject + Modal Verb + Not* + Modal + Subject + Verb (to)
(to) + Verb
*Some modal verbs contain certain features in the negative form.
• Won’t is the short form of will not.

• Cannot is the long form of can in the negative.
• Might Not is the most frequently used form of might in the negative.
• Mustn’t is not the opposite of must.
197
INTERMEDIATE 1
L E S S O N 6
• Modal Verbs
Will Can Could May Might Must Should
Ability in the
X
Present
Ability in the
X
Past
Possibility X Remote X Remote
Request X X X
Permission X X
Advice X
Obligation /
X
Necessity
Prediction X
:: STAY ALERT
You can’t do it, it’s wrong.→ I think it’s wrong.

You mustn’t do it, it’s prohibited. → You know it’s wrong.
May I come in? → Formal use. It’s possible to be used in informal settings to show respect.
Can I come in? → Informal or Neutral use. You could be opening the door as you ask this question.
Asking for Favors
June – Mike, can you do me a favor?

Mike – Well, I could if I didn’t have to go out now…Can’t you
ask Mia instead, June?
June – Yeah, OK, all right…I’m sorry…I should organize myself
better because I’m simply lost in all my duties!
Mike – Could I give you a piece of advice? If you don’t mind...
June – Yeah, sure…
Mike – You should hire a secretary or you will get really
stressed out…
June – Yeah, I know…It might take a while until I can do it,
though…
Mike – Look, I must go now or I’ll be in trouble. Catch you
later, June!
June – Catch you later, Mike! Thanks for the advice.
198
REASONING: WHY
Answer the
Reasons, arguments, and
question “Why?” or
evidence that support Reasoning
other questions that
argumentation.
seek justification.
• Questions
Why...? Check the Chapter "Question Word: Why” to review in detail.
Do you think that it’s a good idea to go on a road trip this summer?
Don't you think (that) summer is the best season?
Why do you think (that) it’s better to travel at night?
• Introducing Sentences—Reasoning
Why don’t you like to travel in the holiday season?

Because the roads are too busy.
Do you think it is a good idea to drive late at night?

I’d say that it is better in the morning, but we’ll waste time if we don’t leave on Friday night.
Why do you buy so much food?

The reason is that I hate going to the supermarket during the week.
OK, but why me?

The point is that if I go shopping for food, we’ll only eat cookies and chocolate.
Negotiating an Invitation List
Jake – Darling, I was checking the guest list...why

don’t we invite Mr. Sanders?
Laura – Because we can only invite ninety people
and he is just your boss, not a friend.
Jake – Don’t you think he’ll enjoy being invited?
Laura – Baby, the point is that we would need to cut
two of our friends or family from the list to
invite him.
Jake – Let me help you...
Laura – Why do you want to invite him?
Jake – Because I want to get my promotion and he
is my boss!
199
INTERMEDIATE 1
L E S S O N 6
BE USED TO VS. USED TO
Used To Be Used To
vs.
Past habit / State or situation no longer true Familiar Things or Actions
• Used To
Describes a past habit: something you regularly did in the past but you don't do anymore. It can also
refer to a state or situation that is no longer true.
• Structure
Affirmative → Subject + Used To + Verb + Complement

→
Joan used to play at the beach when she was a kid.

(Nowadays, as an adult, she doesn’t play anymore.)
Negative → Subject + Didn’t Use To + Verb + Complement

→
Tara didn’t use to enjoy going to the movies.

(Nowadays, she enjoys going to the movies.)
200
Interrogative → Did + Subject + Use To + Verb + Complement
→
Did you use to take theater lessons at school?
(In the past, was it a habit of yours to take theater lessons at school?)
• Be Used to
The verb to be can be inflected in any verb form or combined with modals according to the meaning the
speaker wants to convey (Was/Were Used To, Am/Is/Are Used To, Can Be Used To…). It refers to an action or
something that is familiar to you because of previous experience.
Structure
Be Used To + Things in General → To be accustomed to something.
Affirmative → Subject + Be Used To + Complement

→
Pete is used to high temperatures.
Negative → Subject + Be (Negative) Used To + Complement

→
Julia isn’t used to diet food.
Interrogative → To Be + Subject + Used To + Complement

→
Are you used to cold showers?
201
INTERMEDIATE 1
L E S S O N 6
Be Used To + Actions → To be accustomed to doing something.
Affirmative → Subject + Be Used To + Verb (–ING form) + Complement
→
→
Jack is used to waking up early.
(He is accostumed to waking up early probably because he does it every day.)
Negative → Subject + To Be (Negative) Used To + Verb (–ING form) + Complement
→
→
Cody isn’t used to doing exercises.
(He doesn’t usually do it so he probably gets very tired.)
Interrogative → To Be + Subject + Used To + Verb (–ING form) + Complement

→
→
Are you used to traveling solo?
(Are you accustomed to traveling on your own?)
New Mom
Lisa – Hey, Stacy! Look at you with twins!
Stacy – I know, right? I used to sleep like a baby but now I know that babies don’t sleep at night.
Lisa – You’re funny! Are they your first?
Stacy – Yes, yes, probably the only ones.
Lisa – It is tough being a new mom. How about Jackson? Is he used to the crying and changing diapers yet?
Stacy – He’s great. I guess he is more used to doing the whole baby thing than I am.
Lisa – You know, Mike and I used to say we would wait some time before having babies, but then Katie arrived.
Stacy – And now you can’t imagine your life without her, right?
Lisa – Exactly! We love being parents.
:: COMMON MISTAKES
INCORRECT CORRECT
I’m used to go out on the weekend. I’m used to going out on the weekend.
I used like vegetables as a kid. I used to like vegetables as a kid.
202
INTERMEDIATE 2
L E S S O N 1
BE GOING TO
Future Plans
Be Going To
Predictions Based on Evidence
Structure
Affirmative: Subject + To Be + Going To + Complement
Lisa is going to get married next month.
Negative: Subject + To Be + Not + Going To + Complement

Unfortunately, I'm not going to be here on the wedding day.
Interrogative: To Be + Subject + Going To + Complement

Are you going to get her a wedding gift?
Questions Words and Be Going To
Structure: Question Word + To Be + Subject + Going To + Complement
Where is Lisa going to get married?

What are you going to get her as a gift?
How are you going to tell her you can't go?
Meeting Friends
Britney – Hey, Megan! I'm going to meet the girls

later in the afternoon for some coffee.
Would you like to join us?
Megan – I'd love to, but I can't. I'm going to work
overtime today.
Britney – That's a shame. Don't worry. I'm going to
talk to the girls and we can meet again
next week.
Megan – That would be great!
204
:: STAY ALERT
I am going to talk to him. → In spoken language = emphasis

In written language = formality
I'm going to talk to him. → In spoken and written language = neutral
I'm gonna talk to him. → In spoken language = informal
In written language = very informal
:: COMMON MISTAKES
INCORRECT CORRECT
The girls going to meet later. The girls are going to meet later.
COMPARATIVE FORMS: SUPERIORITY
Comparative Forms → Superiority → Long Adjectives / Short Adjectives / Irregular Forms

→ Equality
→ Inferiority
This chapter focuses on the comparative forms used to express superiority.
• Long Adjectives
In order to form comparatives with long adjectives, you need to follow this structure:
More + Adjective + Than
I bought a couch that is more comfortable than the old one.
• Short Adjectives
In order to form comparatives with short adjectives, you need to follow this structure:
Adjective (–ER or –IER) + Than
Kelly is happier than she used to be.

Adjectives ending in consonant + –Y → Drop the Y
and add –IER → Happy – Happier
Other short adjectives → Add –ER → Tall – Taller → Fat– Fatter*

*Pay attention to the CVC rule: double the last consonant.
205
INTERMEDIATE 2
L E S S O N 1
Lenny is taller than Adam.
• Irregular Comparatives
A few words have irregular comparative forms:
Good → Better
Bad → Worse
Far → Further (metaphorical distance) / Farther (physical distance)
Shopping for Food
Lyanne – Can you believe these prices, Julia?
Julia – I know. Everything is more expensive than ever before.
Lyanne – Unbelievable. This jam is better than that one, but that one
is cheaper. What should I do?
Julia – That depends. If I were you, I’d get what’s more essential,
and then take the rest.
:: COMMON MISTAKES
INCORRECT CORRECT
Henry is more short than Michael. Henry is shorter than Michael.
This can’t get more bad. This can’t get worse.
GIVING OPINION
Giving Opinion → Formal or Informal → Where are you? → Whom are you talking to?
→ Subtle or Emphatic → Where are you? → Whom are you talking to? → Do you need to convince people?
• Formal or Informal
Formality relies on:

• The social code of the place. (Is it formal? Is it informal?
Is it casual?)
• The difference between the participants in the
interaction. (Do you know them? Are you close? Are you
intimate? Are you higher or lower in hierarchy? Are you
much younger?)
• Generally, the bigger the gap between participants in the
interaction, the higher the level of formality. Older people tend
to be more formal.
206
Take a look at some phrases you can use to introduce your opinion formally and informally:
Being Subtle Being Emphatic

I kind of think that... I am convinced that...
It may be true that... I’m positive that...
It’s just that... I must say that...
It could possibly... *Definitely...
*Adverbs are useful resources when emphasizing opinion. Some of the most frequently used are:
Completely / Entirely – This is completely/entirely wrong.

Brutally – I’ll be brutally honest with you: your text sucks.
Just – This juice is just wonderful.
Plain – I can’t read this piece of news. It’s plain stupid.
Seriously – Seriously, I love it when you disagree with me.
Co-workers Chatting at Coffee Break (Informal)
Alex – Hey, Phil: What do you think of the new career package
they announced?
Phil – I reckon it’s OK. It’s not wonderful.
Alex – It’s definitely better than before. (emphasing opinion)
Phil – Oh yeah. I agree.
Receiving Feedback from Your Supervisor (Formal)
Mr. Smith – Mr. Lorne, based on your reports, I would say

that there is room for improvement.
Mr. Lorne – I understand, Mr. Smith.
Mr. Smith – It could possibly be a case of demotivation.
Your results are not as good as before.
Mr. Lorne – It may be true that I’m a little more stressed out.
Mr. Smith – That would certainly be a problem. How about
going on vacation to get some rest?
Mr. Lorne – That would be wonderful, sir.
MODAL VERBS: REVIEW

Modal Verbs → Modify verbs according to the speaker’s perspective

→ Are followed by a bare infinitive verb (without to)

Check the table for the meaning of each modal verb.
207
INTERMEDIATE 2
L E S S O N 1
Modal Possible meanings depending on the context and on the speaker’s decision
Can Present Ability / Informal Request / Possibility

Could Past Ability / Polite Request / Possibility
Will Decision made at the moment of speaking / Prediction based on opinion / Inevitability
Must Obligation
Mustn’t Prohibition
Should Advice and Recommendation
May Possibility / Formal Request
Might Remote Possibility
Let’s focus on may and might. What is the difference between them?
• May
When used in the affirmative form, it means possibility.

I heard Jack and I may work together but we don’t really get along. (It is very likely they will work
together.)
In its negative form, it is unlikely that something will happen.

There’s a lot of traffic, we may not get there on time. (It is very likely they won’t arrive on time.)
In the interrogative form, it is used to request permission. It can be used in contexts in which the speaker
highly respects the people he or she is talking to.
May I have a word with you? (Do I have your permission to have a word with you?)
May is commonly used in indirect questions to indicate possibility.

Do you think I may have a chance in this audition? (Do you think it is possible that I have a chance?)
• Might
In its affirmative form, it means remote possibility.

We might need more people in the department. (There is a slight chance we need more people.)
In its negative form, it is very unlikely that something will happen.

The sales department might not be able to do well this month. (There is a chance they won’t do well.)
Might is more common in indirect questions. It also means a remote possibility.

Do you think John might find out about our secret? (Is there any chance John will find out?)
Planning to Move out
Ben – Mom, there is something I must tell you,

but don’t be mad at me.
Wanda – Why? What did you do?
Ben – Nothing, mom. It’s not what I did but what
I will do. I’ll move out.
Wanda – Oh, that? About time! You should try to find
a roommate to share the bills.
Ben – No, I’m fine by myself. I was wondering if
you could help me visit some places.
208
Wanda – Sure, honey. It might take some time until we find something perfect, but that will be fun.
Ben – I guess! Can you come check a place with me now?
Wanda – Right now? Hmm…that could be a problem…your dad is taking me to lunch.
Ben – Dad can wait. Besides, we may be back before he arrives.
Wanda – All right. Let me give him a call.
:: COMMON MISTAKES
INCORRECT CORRECT
Might we meet tomorrow? Do you think we might meet tomorrow?
Buddy, may I talk to you? Buddy, can I talk to you?
L E S S O N 2
COMPARATIVE FORMS: EQUALITY AND INFERIORITY

Comparative Forms → Superiority

→ Equality
→ Inferiority
• Comparatives of Equality
In order to form comparatives of equality, you need to follow this structure:
As + Adjective + As
Kimberly is as responsible as Stacy. Laura is as fun as Jessica.
• Comparatives of Inferiority
In order to form comparatives of inferiority, you need to follow this structure:
Less + Adjective + Than
209
INTERMEDIATE 2
L E S S O N 2
Tony is less talkative when his mother is around.
:: STAY ALERT
Although the comparative of inferiority form exists, the comparatives of superiority or equality (in the negative
form) are more frequently used.
Mike is less friendly than Lawrence.

Lawrence is friendlier than Mike. or Mike is not as friendly as Lawrence.
Choosing a Restaurant
Hank – Where are we having dinner tonight?

Sarah – I was thinking of going to Marlo’s.
Hank – Don’t you think that Sicily Kitchen is better? Marlo’s
is not as comfortable as Sicily Kitchen.
Sarah – But it’s less expensive.
Hank – The food in Sicily Kitchen is as good as in Marlo’s,
we could use some comfort, no?
Sarah – Are you paying? If you are, we can go to Sicily
Kitchen, no problem.
:: COMMON MISTAKES
INCORRECT CORRECT
Tina is as taller as Kate. Tina is as tall as Kate.
Chris is as smart than Martin. Chris is as smart as Martin.
CONNECTORS: ADDITION, CONTRAST, AND CONCLUSION

Connectors → Prepositions
→ Linking words and expressions Addition, Contrast, and Conclusion
→ Conjunctions
Take a look at the table with some conjunctions, linking words and expressions that join sentences or terms inferring
the ideas of addition, contrast, and conclusion.
210
Addition Contrast Conclusion
And But So Therefore

Besides that On the other hand Because of that As a result
And also On the contrary As a conclusion To conclude
Moreover Summing up As we have seen
Furthermore To make a long As we all know
story short In short
Although they all share the idea they convey when linking phrases or elements of sentences,
there is generally a difference in position.
Position of Connectors in Sentences
• And, and also, but, and so, won’t appear in the beginning of sentences. They may come after a
period but connecting two sentences.
Savannah works all day and studies at night.

Johnny is athletic but he hates team sports.
Tommy is an accountant, so he is the best person to help you with a new company.
• However and therefore will usually come between the sentences they link, after a period or not.
Henry is very careful with his money. However, he likes to splash out sometimes.
Peter won the lottery. Therefore, he is now a rich man.
• Although, even though, in spite of or despite will introduce the sentences but they can appear
in the middle when clauses are inverted.
Even though Julienne is on a diet, she agreed to have dinner with us.
Julienne agreed to have dinner with us, even though she’s on a diet.
In spite of being on a diet, Julienne agreed to have dinner with us.

Julienne agreed to have dinner with us, in spite of being on a diet.
Business Presentation
Mr. Elliot – As you can see in the graph, there has

been a decrease in the profit. The reason
for that can be the country’s situation or
a problem in our operations. However,
we’ll focus on our recovery based on
internal operations. Besides that, we’re
hiring a financial consultant to help us out.
Thank you.
211
INTERMEDIATE 2
L E S S O N 2
GIVING OPINION: EXPRESSING CERTAINTY AND DOUBT

There are different words you can use to either express certainty or doubt while giving opinion.
For example:
• Adverbs
• Adjectives
• Modal Verbs
Ms. Stone is probably the

best person for this position.
I agree with you. But I doubt she will
be willing to move to another city.
• Adverbs
Expressing Certainty Expressing Doubt

Definitely Probably
Certainly Maybe
Surely/For sure Perhaps
Aaron – Perhaps we should look for some

alternatives.
Tim – I agree. We should definitely look
for alternatives.
• Adjectives

Sure Unsure
Confident Doubtful
Positive Uncertain
212
Jordan – Are you sure this is the right way?

Meredith – Yes, don’t worry. I’m positive.
• Modal Verbs

I must… I might…
I will… I may…
Barney – I might be wrong, but I think I will

have to work on Saturday.
Mindy – Then I guess we may have to
change our plans for the weekend.
Taking Some Days Off
Lorena – I may take a couple of days off next week.

Derek – I think you should definitely do that.
You are stressed.
Lorena – I surely am. What I’m unsure of is whether
I’ll be able to. I need to finish these reports
first.
Derek – Don’t worry. I will help you finish them this
week. And if we don’t, I’m positive I can
take care of it next week.
Lorena – Thank you, Derek. You are the best.
:: COMMON MISTAKES
INCORRECT CORRECT
I’m going to the party surely. I’m surely going to the party.
I’m going to the party for sure.
I will maybe travel next month I may travel next month.
Perhaps I’ll travel next month.
213
INTERMEDIATE 2
L E S S O N 2
WILL VS. BE GOING TO

? WILL
EXPRESSING FUTURE
BE GOING TO ?
?
Will vs. Be Going To

Prediction Based on Opinion Prediction Based on Evidence
Inevitability Plans
Take a look at the following contexts and notice how both structures are used.
Billy will host a dinner party and, as he walks home, he passes by a bakery.
Billy – Oh, that bread smells good. I’ll get some to

take home.
(The decision to buy was made at the moment Billy

smelled the bread as he passed by the bakery.)
Tanya wants to go on vacation and she is talking to her boss about it.
Tanya – So, Leah, I was thinking...can I go on

vacation in November?
Leah – I guess so.
Tanya – Wonderful. My husband is also on vacation
in November.
Leah – Are you going to travel together?
Tanya – Definitely! We have the money, we just
needed the time. We’re going to spend
a few days in Thailand. (Tanya is planning
to go to Thailand.)
Leah – Oh, you’ll love it there!
214
Mary is going to travel and she’s leaving her keys with her mom.
Mary – Mom, here are the keys. You need to water

the plants and feed Toby three times a day.
Mom – Don’t worry, Mary. I won’t forget to do that.
(It’s a promise.)
Mary – Please, mom. Oh, and you need to walk him
a bit or he will be sad. (It’s inevitable.)
Mom – OK, honey. I’ll do everything. Your plants and
Toby are going to be fine when you
come back. (It’s a promise, and because of
everything she’ll do, Toby and the plants
are going to be fine.)
Mary – Great! I’ll be back in two weeks.
(It’s a prediction.)
:: STAY ALERT
In spoken English, there is little difference between using will or be going to.
Remember that, in spoken English, it is common to use the short form of will (’ll) or the short form of the verb
to be with going to.
Julia – Let’s have dinner together this Saturday.

Michael – I can’t. I’ll probably travel this Saturday. / I’m going to travel this Saturday.
:: COMMON MISTAKES
INCORRECT CORRECT
Larry will to help you. Larry will help you.
L E S S O N 3
CONNECTORS: CAUSE AND EFFECT

• Structure
Hence, Thus, Consequently → Used in the between two

sentences or at the beginning of
a sentence.
215
INTERMEDIATE 2
L E S S O N 2
We need to save money to open our business. Thus /

Hence / Consequently it is going to be impossible to travel on
the holidays.
We worked hard, thus / hence / consequently we succeeded.
As a consequence (of something) → Used in between two sentences/clauses or at the beginning
of a sentence. Usually has a negative connotation.
Donald is definitely not telling me the truth.
As a consequence, I cannot trust him.
You didn't do your homework, and as a

consequence of that, you are grounded.
That's why, Because of that, As a result → Used in between two sentences/clauses or at the
beginning of a sentence.
I'll have to work overtime this week, that's why /

because of that / as a result I can't meet you tonight.
Broken Car
Bob – Honey, I think it's time to get a new car.

Kate – Get a new car? But we want to spend a month traveling in Europe,
that's why we've been saving money for six months.
Bob – I know, baby. But the thing is I need the car to work. It's the third time
it breaks this month. As a consequence, we've been wasting money
repairing it all the time.
Kate – I see.
216
:: STAY ALERT
Thus, hence → Considered more formal

As a consequence → Used mostly for negative consequences
:: COMMON MISTAKES
INCORRECT CORRECT
I need to go because of that I have to work. I need to go because I have to work.
I need to save money. Because I'm not going to I need to save money. That's why / Because of
travel with you. that I'm not going to travel with you.
NARRATIVE TIMELINE
Narratives → Verb Forms

→ Time Expressions
→ Connectors
Past Present Future
Simple Past Simple Present Will

Past Continuous Present Continuous Be Going to
217
INTERMEDIATE 2
L E S S O N 3
• Verbs in a Narrative About the Past
Simple Past → Single complete action at a defined point in the past.

Affirmative: Regular verbs (–D, –ED, –IED) and irregular verbs (list at the end of the book)
Negative and Interrogative: Auxiliary verb did
Past Continuous → Action that was temporary and/or in progress during a period in the past.
Affirmative: To Be (in the Past) + Verb in –ING
Negative and Interrogative: The same structure of the verb to be in the past
• Verbs in a Narrative About the Present
Simple Present → Actions that represent facts or routine.

Affirmative: Simple form for I, You, We, They and third person inflection (–S, –ES or –IES)
Negative and Interrogative: Auxiliaries Do (I, You, We, They) and Does (He, She, It)
Present Continuous → Action in progress during a period in the present and into the future.
Affirmative: To Be (In the Present) + Verb in –ING
Negative and Interrogative: The same structure of the verb to be in the present
• Narrative About the Future
Modal verb Will → Modify verbs giving an idea of future prediction based on the speaker’s perspective.
Affirmative: Will + Verb (Bare Infinitive: Without To)
Negative: Will not/Won’t + Verb (Bare Infinitive: Without To)
Interrogative: Will + Subject + Verb (Bare Infinitive: Without To)
Be Going To → Indicates a future plan or a prediction based on physical evidence.

Affirmative: To Be (Present) + Going To + Verb (Bare Infinitive: Without To)
Negative: To Be (Present/Negative) + Going To + Verb (Bare Infinitive: Without To)
Interrogative: To Be (Present) + Subject + Going To + Verb (Bare Infinitive: Without To)
• Connectors of Time
Past Present Future
Yesterday Today Tomorrow

Two days ago On Mondays/Tuesdays Next week/month/year
Last week/month/year In spring/autumn In a few days
Last summer/winter Always / Every day / Sometimes Shortly / Soon / In the future
For unexpected actions → Suddenly / Out of the blue / Unexpectedly

I was watching TV, completely distracted, and Jack suddenly opened the door.
Cindy dreams of waking up one day, check the lottery ticket and get rich out of the blue.
For actions that happen at the same time → Meanwhile / At the same time
Mia will cook dinner. Meanwhile, John prepares some drinks and sets the table.
For final actions or results → At the end vs. In the end
At the end: Static. Indicates the end of something.

at the end of the week, at the end of the story
In the end: It means “Finally”.

Mike was stuck in traffic, in the end, he was about five hours late.
218
Career Advice
Susan – Dad, can you give me some advice? I just don’t know what I'll major in.
Paul – Oh, darling, this is a difficult decision. I remember how hard it was for me.
Susan – Yes? How so?
Paul – Well, I was only eighteen when I got to college and I knew I wanted to be a football player.
Susan – But for that, you needed to choose...
Paul – Exactly. So, I chose Business because it would be more useful for me, but then it became my main
job when my knee got hurt. After that injury, I had to quit football.
Susan – Well, I’m not involved in sports but I’m going to be successful in something. I’ll choose arts.
Paul – Arts? Well, it’s your life in the end. If you think this is it, then that’s what it is.
Susan – Great! Thanks, dad.
PRONOUNS: REVIEW AND AMBIGUITY

Pronouns → Always make reference to someone or something that was mentioned before in the sentence or
in context.
Take a look at the following table to review some types of pronouns.
Subject Pronouns Object Pronouns Reflexive Pronouns

Singular
First person I Me Myself
Second person You You Yourself
Third person He / She / It Him / Her / It Himself / Herself / Itself
Plural
First person We Us Ourselves
Second person You You Yourselves
Third person They Them Themselves
Use Function as subjects Function as objects Function as the object

Come before verbs Come after verbs and/or when both the subject
prepositions and the object are the
same person
219
INTERMEDIATE 2
L E S S O N 3
Jake – Hi, Clara! I was meaning to talk to you!

Clara – Hi, Jake! What do you want from me?
Jake – Actually, Tom said you were struggling with your new computer.
Clara – Oh yeah, I told him it was no big deal. I managed to fix it by myself.
Jake – Wonderful! If you need anything, let me know, OK?
• Pronoun Ambiguity
When using a pronoun, it is important to notice the term it refers to.

Sometimes, the pronoun reference can be confusing.
Mia is looking for Sarah because she doesn’t feel well.

Ambiguity → Who doesn’t feel well: Mia or Sarah?
You can solve this ambiguity by reorganizing this sentence.
Sarah doesn’t feel well, so Mia is looking for her.
Adam is worried because Professor Storm said he’s in trouble.

Ambiguity → Who is in trouble: Adam or Professor Storm?
You solve this ambiguity by adding some words and replacing others.
Adam is worried about Professor Storm because the professor claims to be in trouble.
or
Adam is worried because the Professor said that Adam is in trouble.
A Misunderstanding
Nat – Nate, are you going to Casey’s party?

Nate – I can’t, I’ve got band practice.
Nat – Really? I heard Tommy saying you said you’d go.
Nate – What was the exact sentence you heard?
Nat – “Nate and Ted were talking and he said he’d go.”
Nate – Exactly. Ted is going, not me.
SUPERLATIVE FORMS
Superlative Forms → Superiority → Long Adjectives / Short Adjectives / Irregular Forms
→ Inferiority
The superlative forms refer to extremes. It is one unique thing with an incomparable feature.
220
Superiority
• Long Adjectives
In order to form superlatives with long adjectives, you need to follow this structure:
The Most + Adjective
Firing someone is the most

uncomfortable thing one can do.
• Short Adjectives
In order to form superlatives with short adjectives, you need to follow this structure:
The + Adjective (–EST or –IEST)
Original adjective ending in Consonant + –Y → Drop the –Y and add –IEST → Pretty – The prettiest
Other short adjectives → Add –EST → Smart – The smartest
Tommy is the funniest friend I have. Stella is the shortest player on the soccer team.
Note: The superlative form also follows the C.V.C. rule.
Words ending in Consonant + Vowel + Consonant → Double the last consonant + –EST
Hot → The hottest Big → The biggest Sad → The saddest
• Irregular Superlatives
Some words have irregular superlative forms:
Good → The best

Bad → The worst
Far → The furthest (metaphorical distance) / The farthest (physical distance)
221
INTERMEDIATE 2
L E S S O N 3
Inferiority
In order to form superlatives of inferiority, with any adjective, you need to follow this structure:
The Least + Adjective
It is important to notice that the superlative of inferiority isn’t commonly used for physical characteristics.
Leave the least important problem for tomorrow.

Michael is the least interested student in class.
After Watching a Movie
Danny – Van, that was the greatest movie I’ve ever seen!
Vanessa – Well, it was good but not the best one, come on.
Danny – I loved it. I think Saul Goldman is this generation’s
most talented actor.
Vanessa – His co-star is the least natural, though.
Danny – Yeah, I guess you are right.
:: COMMON MISTAKES
INCORRECT CORRECT
This is the most happy day of my life. This is the happiest day of my life.
Nick is the most bad player in the team. Nick is the worst player on the team.
L E S S O N 4
ADVICE GIVING: HAD BETTER

Giving Advice → Suggestions and recommendations

→ You can use modals or semi-modals.
222
• Modal Verbs: Should and Must
• Should is frequently used when giving advice.
If you’re driving, you shouldn’t drink.
• Must can also be used for this end, but it has a stronger meaning as it has the idea of obligation as well.
You must take a cab if you drink alcohol.
• Mustn’t, on the other hand, gives the idea of prohibition.
You mustn’t drink and drive. It is against the law.
• Semi-modals: Ought To and Have To
• Ought to is a semi-modal. It has the same meaning of the modal verb should; however, it is not as common
in everyday speech.
People ought to be more respectful to one another.
• Have to gives an idea of necessity that exists due to external factors.
Mike has to respect his colleagues.
223
INTERMEDIATE 2
L E S S O N 4
• Expressions
Here are some expressions one can use to give advice.
If I were you, I would study more before the exams.

The best thing to do is be dedicated now rather than regretting it in the future.
Take my advice: get used to studying because you will do it forever.
Here is what I have to say: if you don’t commit to your studies, you might regret it.
• Had Better
• Had better is also a semi-modal and it is considered a strong expression. It implies there
will be negative results if someone does not do what is suggested.
Affirmative → We had better leave before it rains.

Negative → We had better not leave after it starts raining.
This structure isn’t usually used in the interrogative form. However, in the negative, it is possible.
Hadn’t we better leave before it rains?
Had better will commonly appear in its short form: ’d
We’d better leave before it rains.
224
At a Party
Jackie – Man, I really want to have a martini.

John – Then have one. We must enjoy life while
we can.
Jackie – Oh no...I’d better stick to soda. I’m driving.
John – Have a martini, but then you ought to take a taxi home.
Jackie – What do I do with my car?
John – Leave it here. You'll have to come back tomorrow to
get it, of course!
Jackie – You know what? That’s not a bad idea.
:: COMMON MISTAKES
INCORRECT CORRECT
You had better to tell the truth. You had better tell the truth.
Henry had better don’t go alone. Henry had better not go alone.
CONNECTORS: EXEMPLIFICATION AND LISTING

Connectors of Exemplification: For instance, For example, As an example, That is (to say), Such as, Namely
• Use
They are used to introduce examples; they can be used interchangeably.
• Structure
Mammals are animals that produce milk to feed their babies, namely dogs, lions, and humans.
225
INTERMEDIATE 2
L E S S O N 4
Free healthcare is successfully provided in many countries, such as Canada, Australia, and France.
Connectors for Listing: To begin/start with, First, Second, In first place, In second place, Next,
Then, Last but not least.
• Use
They give us an idea of order when you provide a list of things, instructions, or examples.
• Structure
To solve a math problem, first you have to read the heading carefully. Then start doing
the math according to what you read. Sum and subtract until you get to the final result.
Last but not least, review your calculations.
A Project to Remodel the House
Ryan – Honey, since we are going to remodel the

house we need to start planning.
Mary – I agree. I was thinking we could use a relaxing
color in the living room, such as light blue or
lilac. What do you think?
Ryan – I like it. But we need to think about other stuff
before the color on the walls. For instance,
first we need to work on a budget, then we
have to negotiate price and deadlines with
constructors, last but not least we need to
find a place to stay while they are working in
the house. Take a look at this checklist I made.
226
MODAL EXPRESSIONS: BE ABLE TO,

BE WILLING TO, BE SUPPOSED TO
• Use
Be able to → to have the skill to do something / to be in a situation in which it is possible for you to do
something
I am able to run a marathon.

Sorry, I won’t be able to help you with that.
Be willing to → to be prepared to do something
I’m willing to work overtime to finish this report today.

I missed a great job opportunity two years ago. Back then, I wasn’t willing to relocate, but now, I deeply
regret that…
Be supposed to → to be expected to do something / to say what someone should or should not do, especially
because of rules or because of what someone in authority has said
I was supposed to finish the report today, but I woke up with a terrible headache, so I couldn’t do much.
You are not supposed to check your messages while driving.
• Structure
able to
Verb To Be (past, present, or future) willing to
supposed to
Affirmative: Subject + Be + Able To / Willing To / Supposed To + Main Verb
I had a terrible backache, so I was only able to return to work after two days.
227
INTERMEDIATE 2
L E S S O N 4
Interrogative: Be + Subject + Able To / Willing To / Supposed To + Main Verb
Being successful doesn’t mean you will never fail: it means you always answer
“yes” when you hear the question: Are you willing to try again?
Negative: Subject + Be + Not + Able To / Willing To / Supposed To + Main Verb
Girls, get inside! You are not supposed to play in the rain…
General Manager Position
Mr. Daniels – Ms. Williams, we have an opening for the

manager position in Boston and we think you
are 100 percent able to fill this position…Are
you willing to relocate?
Ms. Williams – Absolutely, Mr. Daniels. Thank you for this
opportunity!
Mr. Daniels – You’re welcome, and you deserve it! Please just
make all the arrangements with HR, OK?
Ms. Williams – No problem, Mr. Daniels. Who am I supposed
to refer to in HR?
Mr. Daniels – Look for Ms. Morris. And congratulations!
:: COMMON MISTAKES
INCORRECT CO RRECT
I able to do this. I am able to do this.
John supposed to be here at 9. John is supposed to be here at 9.
228
MODAL VERB: WOULD

• Structure
Affirmative: ubject + Would + Main Verb + Complement
S
If she had enough money, she would travel with the girls.
Negative: Subject + Would + Not + Main Verb + Complement
If I were you, I wouldn't talk to John about this problem now.
ould + Subject + Main Verb + Complement?
Interrogative: W
Would you leave your current job and come work with us?
• Would
The modal verb would is used for hypothetical situations.
Hypothetical situation: If she had enough money, she would travel with her friends.
Real situation: She doesn't have enough money, so she will not travel with the girls.
• Would you like...?
Used for offers and invitations.
Offers or Invitations Accepting or Declining

Would you like to go out for lunch tomorrow? Yes, I'd love to. / Unfortunately, I can't.
Would you like some water? Yes, please. / No, thank you. I'm OK.
229
INTERMEDIATE 2
L E S S O N 4
Sabbatical Year
Jordan – What would you do if you had one year

just for you?
Karen – I'd grab my backpack and travel for a
whole year. I would wake up and think:
what do I want to do today? Where do I
want to be? And then I'd just do it!
Jordan – It would be awesome, wouldn't it?
Karen – Sure.
Jordan – Why don't you do it?
Karen – Because I’ve got a lot of bills to pay!
:: STAY ALERT
I would love some coffee.→ No contraction of would: Emphasis
I'd love some coffee. → Contraction (’d): Neutral
Would you like some coffee? No, thanks. (Appropriate)

No, I wouldn't. (Inappropriate)
:: COMMON MISTAKES
INCORRECT CORRECT
I will go if I had time. I would go if I had time.
R E V I E W
GIVING OPINION WITH COMPARATIVES AND SUPERLATIVES

I think New York is the Oh, New York is so overrated.

best city in the world! Los Angeles is a much better city.
There’s nothing better than spending

your vacation in New York.
New York is the most interesting
city I’ve ever been to.
230
When we give opinion, we may use structures with adjectives in the comparative or in the superlative forms.
• Giving Opinion with the Comparative Form
When we want to give our opinion comparing one element to another, we will use the comparative form.
Take a look at these possible structures:
• There is nothing worse/better than…
• I think it is much better to…
• I guess it’s much worse to...
Let’s see some examples:
Julia – There’s nothing better than New York in the summer.
Katie – Really? I think it’s much better in the spring. Summers in New York can be really hot!
• Giving Opinion with the Superlative Form
When we want to give our opinion comparing one element to all the others of the same kind, we will use the
superlative form. Take a look at these possible structures:
• I think that the best/worst idea is to...

• The best/worst thing to do is...
• The most (adjective) idea/opinion is...
Julia – I think that the best thing to do when you decide to take a trip overseas is to plan ahead.
Katie – I agree. That’s the most important thing to do if you don’t want to have problems.
231
INTERMEDIATE 2
L E S S O N 5
COMPARATIVE AND SUPERLATIVE FORMS REVIEW

Comparative Forms → Compares characteristics of two elements
→ Superiority, Equality, or Inferiority
Superlative Forms → Compares one element to all others of its group/kind

→ Superiority or Inferiority
Take a look at the table for more specific differences between them.
Superiority Comparatives Superlatives
Long Adjectives More + Adjective + Than The Most + Adjective

Short Adjectives Adjective (–ER/–IER) + Than* The + Adjective (–EST/–IEST)*
Irregular
Good → Better Good → The best
Bad → Worse Bad → The worst
Far → Farther / Further Far → Farthest / Furthest
Little → Less Little → Least
Equality
Long and Short Adjectives As + Adjective + As
Inferiority
Long and Short Adjectives Less + Adjective + Than The Least + Adjective
* For both the comparative and superlative forms:
Words ending in CVC → Double the last consonant and add the termination.
Example: BIG
Comparative: California is bigger than Florida.

Superlative: Texas is the biggest American State.
:: STAY ALERT
Although there are comparatives and superlatives of inferiority, they are not as frequently used as the ones of
superiority.
prefer
The movie Storm is less interesting than Thunder. The movie Thunder is more interesting than Storm.
or
The movie Storm is not as interesting as Thunder.
232
In the Teachers’ Lounge
Al – Hey, James, can you help me choose the
best projects to show in the festival?
James – Sure. Who made them?
Al – My fifth graders. They had to watch movies
and compare two of them in details.
James – Interesting...let’s see. This one says that
Poetry Room is more interesting than
Lovely Writing because it teaches more
values.
Al – Really? I guess that’s the deepest
conclusion I’ve seen from a fifth grader.
James – Yeah...but you know...Lovely Writing is not
as good as Poetry Room. At all!
:: COMMON MISTAKES
INCORRECT CORRECT
Michelle is more pretty than Sheila. Michelle is prettier than Sheila.
Katia is as intelligent than her classmates. Katia is as intelligent as her classmates.
My students are more good now than before. My students are better now than before.
EXPRESSIONS WITH GET AND FEEL

There are different ways to express emotions in English. Let’s focus on the verbs to get and to feel.
To Get = To Become* To Feel = Action of Feeling
*The verb to get has different meanings according to its complements and to contexts. When
combined with adjectives, its meaning is to become, as a consequence of something.
• Expressing State: To Get + Adjective
I get stressed when I have to repeat myself too many times.

I get tired after I work out.
I get surprised when I receive presents in ordinary days.
I get inspired when I see stories of successful people.
I get annoyed when people wake me up early.
I get frustrated when I don’t get a promotion.
I get interested when my friends talk about different things.
I get upset when I have an argument with my spouse.
233
INTERMEDIATE 2
L E S S O N 5
• Expressing Feelings: To Feel + Adjective
TO F E E L BAD TO FEEL GREAT TO FEEL AW FUL
TO FE E L UN C OM FORTA BL E TO FEEL FI N E
Sick
Silvia – How do you feel?

Liam – I’m OK.
Silvia – You’re in a hospital, darling. Don’t lie to me.
Liam – I feel fine, really.
Silvia – I get stressed when you lie to me! How do
you feel?
Liam – I feel awful, i have a fever, and I'm throwing
up every five minutes. Happy?
MODAL EXPRESSIONS
Modal Expressions → Might sometimes substitute modal verbs
Modal Expressions = Verb To Be + Verbs or Other Complements
Can be used in any verb form

according to the speaker’s need.
234
• Be Used To and Be Accustomed To
These expressions are somewhat interchangeable as they have the same meaning.
They are used to express customary actions.
Brazilians are used to having more than one shower a day.
=
Brazilians are accustomed to having more than one shower a day.
Notice that when followed by a verbal complement, it is in the –ING form, but they can have nominal
complements as well.
Some people are accustomed to cold showers.
These modal expressions can also be used with other verb forms:
Tony was used to working until late. → Simple Past

Nick was accustomed to sleeping on couches. → Simple Past
To refer to the future, the expressions change:
It isn’t easy but you will get used to working weekends.

Being a new parent is tough but you’ll get accustomed to it.
• Be About To
When used in the present form, it indicates a very near future.

Something that is “about to happen” will happen very soon.
It is also used with other verb forms, such as the simple past (was about to).
Gillian – Yuki, hi! Can I come in?

Yuki – Sorry, not now. We are about to go to bed. Can you come back tomorrow?
When used in the past, you refer to something

that didn’t get to be done:
I was about to leave when you called. (I was

getting ready to leave when you called.)
235
INTERMEDIATE 2
L E S S O N 5
• Be Necessary To
This expression and the semi-modal have to are interchangeable.

It expresses necessity.
Doctor – Mr. Atkinson has to rest. It is necessary to keep him away from stressful situations.
When used in the past, this expression refers to
something that didn’t happen.
It was necessary to let the cream settle, that’s why your
pudding didn’t work out.
Learning How to Cook
Nina – Mom, I’m about to add the eggs to the batter.

Is it necessary to keep beating?
Fiona – Yes, darling. But slow it down a little.
Nina – OK…it is hard to know the right moment to add
ingredients. How do you know?
Fiona – I’m used to making cakes, honey. You’ll be
accustomed to it just the same, you just need
to practice.
:: COMMON MISTAKES
INCORRECT CORRECT
Mike is accustomed to wake up early. Mike is accustomed to waking up early.
RELATIVE PRONOUNS
• Use
Who
Which They refer to people, things, or ideas previously mentioned. They are either
part of non-restrictive clause or of a restrictive clause.
That
236
• Structure
Non-restrictive Clauses
They add extra information about the people, things, or ideas they refer to. They are set off by commas. If you
take them out of the sentence, you can still make sense of what is said.
Who – used to refer to people
My only daughter, who lives in Denver, is coming for Christmas.
non-restrictive clause
Which – used to refer to things or ideas
My suggestion, which nobody liked, was to postpone the trip.
Restrictive Clauses
They add essential information about the people, things, or ideas they refer to. They are not set off by
commas. If you take them out, you are not likely to understand what is said.
Who / That – used to refer to people
Sarah’s brother is sick.
Is this information complete? No.

Why? Because Sarah has two brothers.
You need to specify which brother you are talking about. You can use a restrictive clause.
Sarah’s brother who is only five years old is sick.
restrictive clause
237
INTERMEDIATE 2
L E S S O N 5
Which / That – used to refer to things or ideas
The smartphone needs to be fixed.
Is this complete information? No.
Why? Because there are three smartphones.
You need to specify which smartphone needs to be fixed.
The smartphone which / that needs to be fixed is the black one.
restrictive clause
Going to the Movies
Amy – I want to see this movie with Jennifer Lawrence

that was nominated for the Oscar. Do you want
to go see it later?
Sue – Sure. Let’s go to this new movie theater, which is
just two blocks away. And let’s invite Julia.
Amy – I met her yesterday. She said her sister is in town
and she is spending time with her.
Sue – Oh really? Which one?
Amy – I didn’t know she had two sisters.
Sue – She does. She has an older sister, who lives
in Texas, and a younger sister, who lives in
California.
Amy – Hm…well, then I don’t know. But let’s call her
anyways. She might want to go with her sister.
:: COMMON MISTAKES
INCORRECT CORRECT
Martin, that is my cousin, is a lawyer. Martin, who is my cousin, is a lawyer.
This is the car who my father gave me. This is the car which my father gave me.
238
TAG QUESTIONS
• Use
Tag Questions → Used at the end of a sentence to confirm the statement previously made.
→ Used with all verb forms.
• Structure
Tag Question in the affirmative form using the
same verb form as in the main sentence
Your son doesn't eat chicken, does he?
Main sentence in the

negative form
Tag Question in the negative form using the

same verb form as in the main sentence
But he likes fish, doesn't he?
Main sentence in the

affirmative form
Let's see some other examples using other verb forms.
Simple Past: You visited London, didn't you?

You didn't visit London, did you?
Past Continuous: The children were studying, weren't they?

The children weren't studying, were they?
Modal Verbs: You can speak English, can't you?

But you can't speak German, can you?
Imperative Form*: Do me a favor, will you? *You can use tag questions to soften up favors and
Help your sister, will you? requests with the imperative form. In this case, you should
use the modal verb will.
Some special cases are:
• Sentences with "Let's" → use "shall we"

Let's go, shall we?
• Sentences with "I'm" → use, "aren't I"
I am pretty smart, aren't I?
239
INTERMEDIATE 2
L E S S O N 5
The Boss is Back from Vacation
Carol – Mr. Connan is back from vacation tomorrow, isn't he?

Rachel – Yes! And I hope he's more relaxed! He traveled to
Europe with his family, didn't he?
Carol – I don't know. But Mr. Connan? Relaxed? Do you really
believe that? It's not possible, is it?
Rachel – Well, last year he came back as a new person. It was
fantastic.
Carol – True! I remember that...but it didn't last more than a
week, did it?
Rachel – Something close to that…Yeah, I guess you're right.
:: COMMON MISTAKES
INCORRECT CORRECT
Your brother likes this band, don't he? Your brother likes this band, doesn't he?
You didn't finish your homework, didn't you? You didn't finish your homework, did you?
He is driving, isn't it? He is driving, isn't he?
L E S S O N 6
CONNECTORS: REVIEW
• Use
Addition Conclusion
Connectors
Contrast Exemplification
• Structure
240
Addition Amy is a skilled professional and she is also a great team player.
Amy is a skilled professional. Besides that, she is a great team player.
Amy is a skilled professional. Moreover, she is a great team player.
Amy is a skilled professional. Furthermore, she is a great team player.
Amy is a young woman but she is already a highly skilled professional.
Contrast
Although / Even though Amy is still young, she is a highly skilled professional.
Amy is a young woman. However, she is already a highly skilled professional.
Despite being young, Amy is a highly skilled professional.
Amy is a highly skilled professional at a very young age. So, I think the company
Conclusion
should keep on investing in her.
Amy is a highly skilled professional at a very young age. As a conclusion, I think the
company should keep on investing in her.
As we have seen, Amy is a highly skilled professional at a very young age. Because
of that, I think the company should keep on investing in her.
Amy is a highly skilled professional. She has great ideas, for instance, she was the
one who improved our customer service.
Exemplication
Amy is a highly skilled professional. She has great ideas. As an example, she was the
one who improved our customer service.
Amy is a highly skilled professional. She has great ideas, such as improving our
customer service.
Amy is a highly skilled professional. She has great ideas, namely improving our
customer service.
Planning a Trip
Matt – Take a look at these deals. We should take

a trip on the holidays, baby. We’ll be able to
relax and the kids are going to have fun.
Chloe – I agree. We could go to a beach such as St.
Pete Beach or Siesta Key.
Matt – They are great places, but we have visited
those beaches already. Besides, they are
right here in Florida. So, I was thinking,
we could go a bit farther, California, for
example.
Chloe – I’d love to go to California. However, I’m not
sure we’ll be able to afford a family trip to
California on the holidays.
Matt – Let’s look it up.
:: STAY ALERT
And / But / So → In formal written language, it is advisable to try to replace them.

Furthermore / Moreover → More frequent in formal written language
241
INTERMEDIATE 2
L E S S O N 6
:: COMMON MISTAKES
INCORRECT
CORRECT
We had one setback however the company is
We had one setback. However, the company is
growing fast.
growing fast.
Despite my father is eighty-five years old, he is a
Despite his age, my father is a very active man.
very active man.
Donna is a talented musician, although she could

Although Donna is a talented musician, she could
never live off her music.
never live off her music.
SIMPLE PRESENT AND PRESENT CONTINUOUS FOR FUTURE
Future can be expressed in different ways in English:
Let’s focus on the use of the present forms to refer to the future.
• Simple Present
Used to refer to actions that are part of a schedule. The use of time expressions is extremely important to
indicate the future.
Christmas is in December. I can’t travel because I work this weekend.

242
My flight departs at eight a.m.
• Present Continuous
Used to refer to appointments, dates, or commitments that are pre-arranged and confirmed.
I’m seeing the doctor tomorrow at nine a.m.

I’m having lunch with my boss tomorrow at one p.m.
I’m talking with the suppliers tomorrow at four p.m.
I’m having dinner with Leo tomorrow at eight p.m.
Arranging a Trip
Jackie – Hey Julie, let’s make a group trip to

Vermont this weekend?
Julie – I can't make it. It’s my grandmother’s
birthday on Sunday.
Jackie – How about the following weekend?
Julie – Nick is coming this month...let me see.
Yep, Nick arrives on Saturday.
Jackie – Really? Oh well, we’re all going this
weekend then. We’ll plan something
together some other time.
243
INTERMEDIATE 2
L E S S O N 6
WOULD RATHER AND OTHER WAYS TO EXPRESS PREFERENCE

Expressing Preference → Prefer
→ Would Rather = Would Prefer To
• Verb To Prefer
Things
Subject + Verb To Prefer + Thing 1 + To + Thing 2
Nick prefers soccer to volleyball.
Actions
Subject + Verb To Prefer + Verb in Infinitive + Rather Than + Verb in Infinitive or –ING + Complement
Julia prefers to watch a movie rather than eat/eating out.
• Would Rather (than)
Interrogative → Would you rather watch a movie at home than at the theater?
Affirmative → I would rather go to the theater.
Negative → I would rather not stay home.
:: STAY ALERT
→ The short form “I’d rather” is commonly used in spoken and informal written language.
→ The word “not” doesn’t get a short form with would rather.
An Invitation
Jack – Lyla, would you like to hit a nightclub tonight?

Lyla – I’d rather do something quieter, like a restaurant.
Jack – OK, then. Would you rather eat a burger than fried chicken?
Lyla – I’d rather not eat heavy food. Japanese?
Jack – Fine. It’s a date then.
:: COMMON MISTAKES
INCORRECT CORRECT
I wouldn’t rather visit grandma now. I would rather not visit grandma now.
Stu would rather to go home. Stu would rather go home.
244
MODAL VERBS AND MODAL EXPRESSIONS REVIEW

Modal Verbs: v erbs used to express mood (such as ability, obligation, necessity, or possibility) according to
speakers’ judgment. They do not infer an idea of time nor a factual aspect to verbs.
Will: used to express inevitability or prediction Can: used to talk about ability in the present,
based on opinion possibility, and requests
Could: u
sed to talk about ability in the past, May: used to talk about probability and to make
remote possibility, and to make requests polite requests
Might: used to talk about remote probability Must: used to express obligation and to make
assumptions; the negative form is used
for prohibition
Should: used to give advice
Would: used to talk about hypotheses
Modal Expressions → Contain similar meanings to those of modal verbs.

→ Might substitute modal verbs in certain situations.
Modal Expressions = Verb To Be + Verbs or Other Complements
Verb To Be can be used in any verb form depending on the speaker’s needs and intentions.
• Be Able To → Ability
In the present, it can substitute can.

Lilian can cook perfectly. = Lilian is able to cook perfectly.
In the past, it can substitute could.
Lenny could play the piano as a child. = Lenny was able to play the piano as a child.
245
INTERMEDIATE 2
L E S S O N 6
• Be Supposed To → Obligation and Expectation (external)
It can substitute the semi-modal have to.

You’re supposed to be careful when working with fire. = You have to be careful when working with fire.
• Be Willing To → to be prepared to do something or having no objection against doing something
Ted is willing to babysit his sister. = Ted has no objection against babysitting his sister.
• Be Used To and Be Accustomed To → customary actions
Paul is used to writing contracts. = Paul is accustomed to writing contracts.

Dad was used to sleeping all night until I was born. = Dad was accustomed to sleeping all night until I was born.
• Be About To → to be close to happening
In the Office
Mrs. Tyler – Sarah, darling, do you have a confirmation from
Stuart’s office?
Sarah – Not yet, ma’am. I’m about to call them…I’ll let you
know when I get their OK.
• Be Necessary To / Be Necessary That → necessity
Substitutes need to or have to with some changes in the sentence structure.

Tell Kurt he needs to be here at 5 p.m. = Tell Kurt it’s necessary that he be here at 5 p.m
Frank – Can we go now? We were supposed to Frank – All right, I’ll wait. At least I won’t face the
leave at five today…It’s five thirty! traffic jam alone. When we started in this job,
Peter – I’m sorry, but I won’t be able to go with we used to leave at four…now, God knows
you…I have this report to finish. the time we’ll leave! Well, I’ll check my
Frank – How long will it take? emails while I wait.
Peter – I am about to start the last section…some
twenty minutes more, I guess.
246
INTERMEDIATE 3
L E S S O N 1
BASIC REPORTING STRATEGIES

Reporting a Story → Retelling a Story
When retelling a story, we usually use the verbs Say (something), Tell (a story/someone something), and Ask (a
question or favor).
• Retelling something that someone told you or that you overheard
Mary told me she is getting married next year.

She said that it will be a great party.
I asked her if she needed my help.
She asked me to be her bridesmaid.
I said that it would be an honor.
Then, I asked her what she needed me to do.
Gossiping
Nathan – Jack, listen up. Did you hear about

Mr. Thompson?
Jack – What about him? Janet told me there was
something going on in his office.
Nathan – Dude, Angel said Mr. Thompson’s wife
came here and made a scene.
Jack – Really? But why?
Nathan – Apparently, she asked him why he didn’t
sleep at home and she didn’t believe his answer.
Jack – Poor guy...
248
GIVING GOOD AND BAD NEWS

• Giving Good News
When you have news that will make people happy, there are some expressions you can use:
The good news is...
Real Estate Agent: I’m happy to say The good thing is...
that the house is yours, Mr. Taylor. Here is some great news...
I'm glad to tell you…
I'm really thrilled that…
I am happy to say that…
• Giving Bad News
When you have news that will make people sad, angry, or frustrated, you use expressions that will prepare
the listener for the bad news.
Unfortunately, we need to continue

with the medication.
The bad news is...

Unfortunately...
How can I put this...
I regret to say that...
I'm sorry to say that...
I am afraid that...
Breaking the News
Katia – Honey, I need to tell you something.

Charles – What is it? Good or bad?
Katia – Well…both. I am afraid that we will have to
adjust our expenses.
Charles – Oh, OK.
Katia – And the good news is that you’ll be a father!
249
INTERMEDIATE 3
L E S S O N 1
PRESENT PERFECT, SINCE AND FOR

Present Perfect → Refers to the past from a present perspective
→ Actions that happened in the past but affect the present → Relevance
→ Actions that started in the past and continue into the present → Continuity
Before focusing on this relation of continuity or of relevance between the past and the present expressed by
the Present Perfect, let’s take a look at its structure.
Affirmative → Subject + Have/Has + Verb in Past Participle + Complement

Juliet has fallen in love with Romeo.
My students have read Romeo and Juliet many times.
Negative → Subject + Have Not/Has Not + Verb in Past Participle + Complement

I haven’t eaten anything since breakfast. I’m very hungry.
Nina is a vegetarian. She hasn’t had any meat for years.
Interrogative → Have/Has + Subject + Verb in Past Participle + Complement
Have you thought about modeling?

Has your friend confirmed attendance to the wedding?

• Past Participle
Regular Verbs → Same form as in the simple past → Terminations –D, –ED, or –IED
Irregular Verbs → Third column of the list found at the end of this Language Guide
• First Use—Present Perfect: Action that is Relevant to the Present
It refers to an action or event that happened in the past with relevance, influence, or results in the present,
whose time is unknown or irrelevant.
Past (?) Present
Take a look at the dialogue.
Nick – What are you doing?

Leo – I’m studying this new software, but it’s so difficult.
Nick – Oh, I have used this before. Let me try to help you.
Nick used the same software at some moment in the past and, because of that, he can help Leo now.
The exact time when Nick used the software is not relevant to this situation, only his current knowledge.
250
• Second Use—Present Perfect: Focus on Continuity
It refers to an action or event that started in the past and continues into the present.
Past Present
Take a look:
I’ve studied English. → Completed action in the past.

I’ve studied English since 1995. → Since marks the beginning of the action, so it still happens in the present.
Now, we use for to refer to the duration of the activity, but it does not necessarily infer that it has a continuous
aspect.
I’ve studied English for twenty years. → Open to two interpretations depending on context:
1. The action started twenty years ago and it still happens in the present.
2. The action lasted twenty years but has been completed already.
Talking About the News
Terry – Lana, have you heard about the new immigrant policy?
Lana – I have. Immigration has been a controversial issue for a long time, but I think they’ll find a solution.
Terry – Hopefully, these people will settle somewhere. They’ve walked a thousand miles since they left their country.
Lana – There will be a good solution. There has to be one.
:: COMMON MISTAKES
INCORRECT CORRECT
Olga has worked in a bank in 1985. Olga has worked in a bank.
Olga worked in a bank in 1985.
VERBS FOLLOWED BY GERUND OR INFINITIVE

Verbs → Intransitive → Don’t require complements to complete meaning.

→ Transitive → Require complements to complete meaning. → Nouns or Pronouns
→ Verbs → Infinitive and Gerund
→ Only Infinitive
→ Only Gerund
251
INTERMEDIATE 3
L E S S O N 1
• Verbs that take only the Infinitive as a complement:
Agree → Michael agreed to speak to the officer.

Fail → Lana fails to understand the reason we moved out.
Request → The defense requests to approach the bench.
Swear → I swear to tell the truth, no matter what.
Plan → Leo plans to travel on his own next summer.
Prepare → Bia got married and now she’s preparing to be a mother.
Choose → We choose to save up to buy a car.
Get → This is your final chance. You won’t get to try again.
Wait → Wait to see what’s coming next!
Seem → Larry seems to be worried about something.
Want → I really want to go on vacation soon.
Wish → My mother wishes to live more than one hundred years.
Ask → We told Paul we were driving home and he asked to come with us.
Some verbs will accept different complements according to the meaning they have.
Verb to Ask
Meaning “request” → He asked to come with us.

Meaning “seek an answer” → He asked a question.
In both possibilities, you can include an object.
He asked us to come along.

He asked me a question.
• Verbs and expressions that take only the Gerund as a complement:
Enjoy → Layla enjoys cooking lunch for her family.

Feel like → I don’t feel like playing sports at night.
Finish → Chris needs to finish doing the homework.
Consider → Nicholas never considered having pets.
Can't help → Douglas can’t help disagreeing with his parents.
Suggest → Mary suggested taking a cab instead of driving to the wedding.
Recommend → Specialists recommend sleeping in complete darkness.
Miss → I miss having my weekends free.
Quit → Julia quit smoking years ago.
Understand → The teacher understands his being late.
Practice → Today we’re going to practice parking.
252
Online Chatting
Peter – Hey, Sara. Let’s do something tonight. Dinner,
bowling?
Sara – I don’t feel like going out tonight.
Peter – Right...so what do you want to do?
Sara – Would you consider playing a game online?
Peter – Sure. Choose one and let’s do it!
:: COMMON MISTAKES
INCORRECT CORRECT
Joan enjoys to play chess. Joan enjoys playing chess.
L E S S O N 2
ARGUMENTATIVE STRATEGIES: QUOTATIONS AND OTHER SOURCES

Argumentation → Based on research, analysis, and critical view on the topic.

→ Not only covers the topic but also the writer’s point of view.
→ The writer or the speaker defends the point of view using data as support.
→ Usually written in the third person.
Structure of an Argumentative Essay
Introduction → Presents the main idea and conflict in one paragraph.

Development → Three paragraphs with exposition of ideas and solutions of conflicts.
Conclusion → Wraps up the text. No new ideas can appear in this part of the text.
Argumentation Essay in Spoken Language
→ The conversation must have a beginning, a middle, and an end.

→ The conversation only ends when the argument is based on evidence.
→ If the strategies and steps aren’t followed, probably there will be questions to gather extra information
and then the audience will reach a conclusion.
There are some resources and techniques one can follow to share data and to support opinion convincingly.
253
INTERMEDIATE 3
L E S S O N 2
• Analyzing Pros and Cons
Taking into consideration positive and negative aspects will help make a reasonable analysis in your speech
or in your text. They will also help you reach a conclusion so you can structure your text like this:
Paragraph 1 – Introduction
Paragraph 2 – Positive aspects
Paragraph 3 – Negative aspects
Paragraph 4 – Evaluation of both positive and negative aspects
Paragraph 5 – Conclusion
• Rhetorical Strategies
1) Appeal to logic or to reason, usually through inductive or deductive reasoning.
INDUCTIVE REASONING DEDUCTIVE REASONING
Specificities Facts Generalizations
Generalizations Specificities
The writer or speaker must be careful not to use fallacies, which are an oversimplification of logic.
Jack is a boy. Jack is violent. All boys are violent. (This is a fallacy.)
2) Deal with the character, credibility, and reliability of the writer. Actions like choosing reliable sources,
respecting the reader/listener, organizing ideas in the text, and proofreading.
3) Deal with the reader's emotions. It shows the writer or speaker is connected with the reader by making
the text more personal and in ways to which the recipient can relate.
• Quotations
There are different techniques to use quotations in writing. Direct quotations are extracts of an author’s work
or opinion, copied between quotes (“”), followed by credits to the original author.
In academic writing, there are set rules for direct quotations whose reference (author and source of research)
will appear in the footnote.
Indirect quotations don’t usually come between quotes but are usually introduced by phrases that indicate
you’re about to quote someone:
According to (name of the author)... As stated by (name of the author)...

As (name of the author) states... (Name of the author) states that...
Important Note: The use of an author’s words, even if paraphrased, without due credit is
what constitutes plagiarism (appropriation of one’s work and ideas taking them as one’s
own). It is considered an ethical foul and undermines the credibility of an author for good.
254
• Paraphrase
Paraphrases can be explained by the chunk of René Descartes said:

language “in other words.” When you paraphrase I think, therefore I am.
an extract or an idea, you say the same thing Paraphrase – For René Descartes,
rationality defines men.
with different words. The original author must be
credited as well.
• Summary
Summaries are a short version of an original text that concentrates on its main idea, leaving out details, and
are written with your own words. Again, the original author must be credited.
Romeo and Juliet, tragedy written by William Shakespeare, narrates a tragic love story of a couple from
diverging families in ancient Verona.
• Narrations
Narrations can be used as means to exemplify the author’s point related to data collected during research.
These narrations, if based on the author’s experience, don’t need to be credited.
René Descartes believed that rationality defines men and that seems to be true since intellectuals are the
ones who define the principles that guide our society as we learn at school.
Remember that no argumentation is made without support, so, you can justify your
conclusions using connectors and indicating references.
Human beings must be careful when killing animals because they balance the
environment, according to...
Parental Control on the Use of Technology
Argumentative Strategy: Analyzing Pros and Cons
It is vital that parents pay special attention to how their kids use technology. Parental control may prevent
kids from downloading inappropriate content or from browsing dangerous websites; however, a certain
amount of freedom is important to foster kids’ independence and boost learning.
Argumentative Strategy: Narrations
In the past, children had limited access to technology: they could play video games or watch TV or even
use the computer for a limited amount of time and with the supervision of an adult. Nowadays, because
parents do not have much available time, kids have more freedom to use technology and this could be
dangerous.
Argumentative Strategy: Quotations
Herbert Simon once said, “One finds limits by pushing them.” Kids need to have enough freedom to use
technology so that they can discover the boundaries they must respect.
255
INTERMEDIATE 3
L E S S O N 2
COMPARATIVE FORMS REVIEW

AND NON-GRADABLE ADJECTIVES
Comparative Forms → Compare specific characteristics of two elements.
→ Superiority → Long Adjectives / Short Adjectives / Irregular Forms
→ Equality
→ Inferiority
Superiority
• Long Adjectives → More + Adjective + Than
Martha is more intelligent than Anna.

Jackie is more responsible than Jake.
• Short Adjectives → Adjective (–ER or –IER) + Than
Spelling Rules
Words Ending in C.V.C. → Double the last consonant and add the termination.
Original adjective ending in Consonant + –Y → Drop the –Y and add –IER
All the other short adjectives → Add –ER
Russia is bigger than the U.S.A. Paulie’s hand is smaller than her brother's.
• Irregular Comparatives
Good → Better Little → Less

Bad → Worse Far → Further (metaphorical distance) / Farther (physical distance)
256
Equality
Structure → As + Adjective + As
Nick is as handsome as Pete.

Canada is as cold as Russia.
Inferiority
Structure → Less + Adjective + Than
Tina is less attached to the family dog than Lia.
Gail is less interested in cooking than her husband.
*Notice that the comparative of inferiority is not as used as the other types of comparatives.
Non-gradable Adjectives
Non-gradable adjectives are adjectives that cannot be measured because they are extreme.
For example: something that is wonderful has the quality of being incomparable in regards of how good it is
because it is “too good.”
Here are some examples of non-gradable adjectives:
Wonderful Fantastic Delicious

Marvelous Incredible Infinite
Terrific Absolute Ridiculous
Excellent Horrible Freezing
Amazing Terrible Dead
Awesome Awful Impossible
257
INTERMEDIATE 3
L E S S O N 2
:: STAY ALERT
In English, syllables are counted by the way the words are pronounced. Compare:
Small vs. Quiet
*If you’re not sure about the syllable division, check an online dictionary.
Certain adjectives will not follow the original rule or are more common with the particle more:
Fun → The movies are more fun than the theater.

Common → Potatoes are more common than rice in certain cultures.
(Commoner is also possible, but not frequently used.)
Simple → Pasta is more simple to cook than stew. (Simpler is also possible.)
Quiet → Tommy is more quiet than usual. (Quieter is also possible.)
Teachers' Meeting
Parker – In my class, I don’t have any disciplinary problems. There is one student that is
lazier than the others, but they behave well.
Logan – As for me, I have one situation. Jack Morrow is the best student in class but
less collaborative with the class than any other student because he is too
arrogant.
Parker – Is the class rejecting him?
Logan – They are. I try to control it, but they are stronger than me in that sense.
Parker – Have you tried to have a conversation with Jack? Maybe he’ll understand that
making friends is as important as getting good grades.
:: COMMON MISTAKES
INCORRECT CORRECT
Chocolate is more delicious than fruits. Chocolate is tastier than fruits.
Mark is more smart than his brother. Mark is smarter than his brother.
Tommy is funner than Samuel. Tommy is more fun than Samuel.
258
PRESENT PERFECT: YET, NEVER, ALWAYS, EVER, AND ALREADY

• Structure
Affirmative
Subject + Have/Has* + Verb in Past Participle + Complement

→
Johnny has lived in Barcelona.

* In spoken and informal written language, the short form 've/'s is normally used.
Negative
Subject + Have Not/Has Not* + Verb in Past Participle + Complement

→
We have not been abroad yet.

* In spoken and informal written language, the short form Haven’t/Hasn’t is normally used.
Interrogative
Have/Has + Subject + Verb in Past Participle + Complement

→
Have you traveled by plane?
Present Perfect with Adverbs
Position of Adverbs → Generally between the auxiliary verb have and the main verb
→ Exception: “Yet” frequently comes at the end of the sentence
Now, let’s see how these adverbs work in context:
1. Always
Context: Timmy spends a lot of money on trips and his dad doesn’t understand it.
Paul – Mary, Timmy is losing control. He needs to be more responsible.

Mary – Don’t be like that. Timmy has always loved to travel and he does what he wants with his money.
(Always → 100% of time since he was born)
259
INTERMEDIATE 3
L E S S O N 2
2. Never
Context: Peter and Janet are receiving Julia for dinner and Peter suggests ordering Japanese.
Peter – So, let’s order some Japanese tonight?

Janet – I don’t know. Julia has never eaten Japanese food, maybe Italian would be better.
(Never → 0% of time since she was born)
3. Already
Context: Ian is planning his holiday and he is thinking about going to Jamaica but he wants tips.
Ian – Mark, have you been to Jamaica? I’m looking for tips.
Mark – Well, I haven’t, but Michael has already traveled to Jamaica, he might shed some light there.
(Already → Before now)
4. Ever
Context: Mia is enrolling at a Spanish course and it is her placement exam.
Coordinator – So, Mia, Have you ever studied a foreign language?

Mia – Not really. I took some classes at school, but nothing much.
(Ever → At any time)
5. Yet
Context: Ken wants to take his girlfriend on a surprise trip and he is planning it with her mother.
Ken – Maggie, I want to surprise Stacy with a trip, but I don’t know where to go.
Maggie – Well, she hasn’t been to China nor Japan yet, but I know she loves Asian culture.
(Yet → At this time, but might sometime in the future)
:: STAY ALERT
1. The adverbs already and yet have certain similarities.
Before Now
Teacher Asking Students about the Exercise
Teacher – Have you already finished?

Student – I haven’t finished yet.
Before now, but more urgent and inferring impatience.
The teacher assigned an exercise, but it’s been ten minutes and John hasn't finished.
Teacher – John, have you finished yet?

John – In a minute.
2. The word yet functions as an adverb with the present perfect but it may also function as a conjunction.
I haven’t been to London yet. → Adverb

I haven’t been to London. Yet, I’d love to go. → Conjunction similar to But
260
Backpacking
Gilbert – So, Harry, where are we backpacking

this summer?
Harry – I was thinking...maybe Mexico.
Gilbert – I have already been to Mexico. I haven’t
been to Costa Rica yet...what do you think?
Harry – I’ve always wanted to go there. So, one
destination is set.
Gilbert – OK...so from Costa Rica we go to...Cuba?
Harry – Oh, interesting. I’ve never thought about
going there, but let’s check other options.
Gilbert – Right. Have you ever been to Aruba?
Harry – No! Dude, Central America is awesome,
but there are too many options!
:: COMMON MISTAKES
INCORRECT CORRECT
I always have wanted to go backpacking. I have always wanted to go backpacking.
VERBS FOLLOWED BY GERUND AND

INFINITIVE WITH NO CHANGE IN MEANING
Transitive Verbs → Nouns or pronouns as complements

→ Verbs as complements → Only gerund or only infinitive
→ Infinitive and Gerund → No change in meaning
→ With change in meaning
• Verbs that may be followed by gerund or by infinitive without change in meaning:
Joan started to take English classes.

= Joan started taking English classes.
261
INTERMEDIATE 3
L E S S O N 2
Professor Peters began to talk at nine a.m. My students hate to take tests.
= Professor Peters began talking at nine a.m. = My students hate taking tests.
Hugo loves to chat online. Mario can’t stand waking up early.
= Hugo loves chatting online. = Mario can’t stand to wake up early.
Grant prefers to travel by car. Lenny will continue to study languages.

= Grant prefers traveling by car. = Lenny will continue studying languages.
A Lecture
Mr. Alba – Hi, Director Barrymore. What time should

I start talking?
Director – You can start to deliver your lecture at
ten a.m., after all the audience arrives.
Mr. Alba – What if I am interrupted by someone
entering the room?
Director – Continue talking even if people get lost.
It’s not your fault they’re late.
262
L E S S O N 3
ARGUMENTATIVE AND ADVICE-GIVING STRATEGIES

Argumentative Strategies → Rhetorical Strategies
→ Analyzing Pros and Cons
→ Summaries
→ Paraphrasing
→ Quotation
→ Narration
Advice-giving Strategies → Using Commands

→ Suggestions
→ Hypothesis
→ Modal, Semi-modals, and Modal Expressions
To review Argumentative Strategies, refer to Intermediate 3 Lesson 2, Argumentative Strategies.
This family wants to buy a house and save for their children’s education.
What advice can they get?
Giving Advice by Using Commands (Imperatives)
The use of Imperatives to give advice is a common resource.

It is important to mind your tone of voice when using it.
Save a percentage of your salary every month if you want to buy a house.
263
INTERMEDIATE 3
L E S S O N 3
Giving Advice by Using Suggestions
Don’t you think it’s a good idea to have a bank account?

Why don’t you start planning your finances for the future?
How about saving up for your children’s education now?
You could seek a personal finance consultant.
Giving Advice by Raising Hypothesis
If I were you, I would ask for an accountant’s help to start a business.

If I were in your shoes, I would wait a while before investing all my money.
• Modals, Semi-modals, and Modal Expressions
Modals Semi-modals Modal Expressions

Should → Advice Ought to → Advice It is advisable to...
Must → Strong Advice Have to → Necessity It is recommended to...
Mustn’t → Prohibition I highly recommend you...
You must decide what you want to do with your money. You ought to plan your finances wisely.
You should save a little every month. You mustn’t spend too much on unnecessary things.
Asking Advice
Ian – Mary, I just can’t reach a decision. Can you

help me with something?
Mary – Sure. What’s up?
Ian – Well, I’ve been saving up for years in order
to start my own business. That’s what I’ve
always dreamed of doing. But what should
I do? Open a bar or a store?
Mary – Well, if I were you, I would think of what I
like most. A bar is open at night, a store,
during the day. You know, when I was at
college, I worked at a bar and it was very
tiring.
Ian – Why don’t you study psychology? You’re good at this! What else?
Mary – You should take into consideration which you like most and which investment is possible.
Ian – Oh, I see. You could be my business partner, huh? You’re good with business.
Mary – Well, I haven’t heard your decision yet.
264
EXPLAINING PROCEDURES: EXPRESSING SEQUENCE

Explaining Procedures = Giving Instructions → Sequence of Steps to Follow
• Expressions Used to Express Sequence
How to Make Pasta
First, pour one liter of still water in a pan. Second, add a pinch of salt and turn the stove on.
Third, get the pasta you want to use and set aside Then, when the water boils, put the pasta into the
the portion you need. boiling water.
Right after that, stir the pasta to prevent it from After that/Afterwards, check the pasta every few
sticking. minutes until it is al dente.
265
INTERMEDIATE 3
L E S S O N 3
Finish by draining the pasta with a colander. To make the sauce, start by stir-frying some
Leave it aside while you prepare the sauce. chopped onions and garlic in olive oil.
Then, add some chopped tomatoes. After they’re soft, add some water and bring it to a boil.
Finish by seasoning it to taste and serve it hot on top
of the pasta.
Healthy Egg
Mandy – Abby, I saw on the Internet that you can fry

an egg without oil. Do you know how?
Abby – I do, actually. Do you have a nonstick skillet?
Mandy – Yes, I do.
Abby – So, first you heat the skillet, then you crack
the egg in it. After that, you lower the heat
and put a lid on the pan.
Mandy – OK...
Abby – When it’s slightly cooked, you pour some
water around the egg and put the lid back on.
Mandy – Now, that is interesting! I’ll try that. Thanks!
266
PRESENT PERFECT CONTINUOUS

Present → It refers to an action or event that started in the past and continues up to now.
Perfect → The speaker focuses on showing the progression or the continuity of this action or event.
Continuous → When referring to continuity, the present perfect continuous and the present perfect are
interchangeable.
• Timeline
• Structure
Affirmative → Subject + Have/Has + Been + Verb in –ING Form
I’ve been doing exercises every day Turk has been traveling a lot on
in order to lose weight. business.
267
INTERMEDIATE 3
L E S S O N 3
Negative → Subject + Have not/Haven’t or Has not/Hasn’t + Been + Verb in –ING Form
Leo hasn’t been practicing the piano lately.
The students haven’t been feeling enthusiastic about the new activities.
Interrogative → Have/Has + Subject + Been + Verb in –ING Form

Have Tommy and Stella been going out together?
Has the company been hiring new employees?
:: STAY ALERT
The present perfect may also refer to a continuous action and, in such case, it can be used instead of the
present perfect continuous with the difference that the latter leaves no question as to the progress of the
action in the present moment.
Mike has studied English. (It is unclear if he still studies English, but maybe he still does.)
Mike has been studying English. (There is no doubt that he is still studying English.)
Changes
Gabe – Hey, Fred, why the long face? Are you worried about
anything?
Fred – Hi, Gabe. I am a little worried about my professional future.
Gabe – Oh, yeah? What is up?
Fred – I haven’t been feeling like coming to work, you know?
I think I need a change.
Gabe – That’s not a bad thing. What have you been doing about
this feeling of yours?
Fred – Well, I’ve been looking for courses and for other careers,
but I can’t find something I’m passionate about.
Gabe – You won’t know unless you try. I say you take a course. In
the meantime, live with that strange feeling.
:: COMMON MISTAKES
INCORRECT CORRECT
I’ve been drive a lot lately. I’ve been driving a lot lately.
VERBS FOLLOWED BY GERUND AND INFINITIVE WITH CHANGE IN MEANING

Transitive Verbs → Nouns or pronouns as complements

→ Verbs as complements → Only gerund or only infinitive
→ Infinitive and Gerund → No change in meaning
→ With change in meaning
268
• Verbs that take both gerund and infinitive with change in meaning
To Forget
Lilian forgot to call her husband. → She had to do something but she forgot to.
Lilian forgot calling her husband. → She did call her husband but she doesn’t remember having done it.
To Remember
Mick remembered to tell Mary to wait. → He had to do something and he didn’t forget to.
Mick remembers telling Mary to wait. → He remembers something he did in the past.
To Go On
Kim must go on working on her report. → To go on, in this case, means “to continue.”
Kim went on to explain things instead of working on her report. → To go on here means a change in action.
269
INTERMEDIATE 3
L E S S O N 3
To Stop
John stopped the game to grab a bite. → He stopped something in order to do something else.
John stopped playing the game. → He quit an ongoing action.
To Try
Try restarting the program to see if it works better. → To make an experiment.

Try to restart the program if the computer doesn’t freeze. → To make an effort to do something difficult.*
*In this situation, it is also possible to use the gerund.
Making Amends
Henry – I’ve tried calling Jessica, I’ve tried emailing her...she just won’t talk to me.
Leo – You screwed up big time, man. Why don’t you try to talk to her in person?
Henry – Do you think so? She stopped going to the gym after we had that argument.
Leo – OK, stop to think for a moment. She has to go to work, right? She still lives
in the same house, right?
Henry – I don’t want to stalk her.
Leo – I know it isn’t good but if she won’t talk to you...
270
L E S S O N 4
EXPLAINING PROCEDURES: REMINDERS

Explaining Procedures = Giving Instructions → Sequence of Steps to Follow
→ Call Attention to Important Steps → Reminders
• Reminders
For example: You are going to host a dinner party but there are some important things to take into
consideration if you want it to be a success.
Don't forget to adjust the salt before serving. Remember to ask your guests if they eat meat.
Bear in mind that not Keep in mind that when you host a dinner party,
everybody likes spicy food. you must think carefully about the menu.
It's important to serve even portions so Make sure you protect your hand when taking
everybody has the same quantity of food. baking trays out of the oven.
271
INTERMEDIATE 3
L E S S O N 4
Birthday Party
Diana – Mom, I don’t know where to start. There are
a lot of things to do for my birthday party.
Silvia – First, make the guest list. Don’t forget that
we can’t have more than thirty people here.
Diana – OK…then what?
Silvia – Then, we need to think about the food we’ll
serve and how much soda to buy.
Diana – Right…bear in mind that Michael doesn’t
drink soda, so we need juice too.
Silvia – Juice, OK. Come on, let’s get it done.
PAIRED CONJUNCTIONS: EITHER…OR AND NEITHER…NOR

• Use
Paired Conjunctions → Used to give options: Either…or…

Used to deny both options: Neither…nor…
• Structure
1. Frequently used before equivalent elements in a sentence.
Either…or…
( ) ( )
We can go either to park or to the movies. What do you prefer?

(Used before the adverbial phrases)
272
( ) ( )
We’ll use the money either to go on a family trip or to buy a new car. Choose one.
(Used before the verbs)
Neither…nor...
We’ll go neither to the park nor to the movies. You didn’t do your homework.
(Used before the adverbial phrases)
We’ll use the money neither to go on a family trip nor to buy a new car. We’ll save it for the kids’ college.
(Used before the verbs)
273
INTERMEDIATE 3
L E S S O N 4
2. When used before two subjects, the verb agrees with the last subject.
Either Roxy or Melina is picking you up at the airport. Neither your sister nor your brothers are going to the party.
First Subject Second Subject First Subject Second Subject
Family Dinner
Son – Mom, I want neither the chicken nor the salad.
Can I have just the dessert?
Mom – Absolutely not. But you can choose: You can
have either chicken or fish. What do you prefer?
Son – Fish, I guess.
Mom – And you also have to eat some vegetables.
You can have either the lettuce or the tomatoes.
Son – Tomatoes, please.
Mom – OK, then. You must eat it up. If don’t, you’ll have
neither chocolate nor ice cream for dessert.
:: COMMON MISTAKES
INCORRECT CORRECT
You can have or the chocolate or the ice cream. You can have either the chocolate or the ice cream.
I won’t buy neither the red nor the blue dress. I will buy neither the red nor the blue dress.
Nor Brazil nor Argentina got to the finals. Neither Brazil nor Argentina got to the finals.
PRESENT PERFECT CONTINUOUS VS.

PRESENT PERFECT VS. SIMPLE PAST
Present Perfect Continuous Simple Past
• Action that started in the past and continues • Isolated action that started and finished
up to the present. at a specified moment in the past.
Past Present Past Present
274
Present Perfect
• Focus on continuity and duration
• Action that happened at an unknown or irrelevant moment in the past with relevance, influence or result in
the present. The speaker looks to the past from the present.
Past(?) Present
• Action that started in the past and continues into the present (support with adverbs).
Let’s compare the use of each of these verbs in the same context and analyze the meanings.
1. Simple Past
Tim – I lived in a country house but we moved* *By using the simple past, Tim locates the action in
to the city in 1978** because of dad’s job. a single point in the past, with no relevance to the
Present.
**Notice the indication of time.
2. Present Perfect—First Use
Tim – I’ve lived in a country house before we moved By using the present perfect, Tim relates the fact that
to the city because of dad’s job. Maybe that’s he’s lived in a country house as the cause of him
why I don’t really like living in an apartment. not enjoying living in an apartment in the present
moment. It is a case of influence to the present.
3. Present Perfect—Second Use
Tim – I’ve lived in a country house since I was little, By using the present perfect with the adverb “since,”
so I’m reluctant to live in an apartment. Tim indicates that this action is still happening in the
present and this is the reason why he doesn’t want to
live in an apartment.
4. Present Perfect Continuous
Tim – I’ve been living in a country house since I was By using the present perfect continuous, Tim makes
little, so I’m reluctant to live in an apartment. it clear that he never lived in any other house,
focusing on the continuous aspect of this action,
leaving no doubt of its connection to the present.
275
INTERMEDIATE 3
L E S S O N 4
:: STAY ALERT
The present perfect with the aspect of continuity and the present perfect continuous are interchangeable.
It is the speaker who chooses which verb form to use.
Tim has always lived in this house.
Tim has lived in this house since his childhood.
Tim has been living in this house since his childhood.
Reality Shows
Gil – Dude, did you see the last episode of Locked
Underground?
Phil – I haven’t been following any TV shows to be honest.
Gil – Oh man, you have to check that one out. It was insane!
Phil – You know I don’t have a TV, right?
Gil – What? You’ve lived without a TV since you moved out
of your parents’?
Phil – Yeah and I don’t really miss it. I’ve read a lot of books,
though.
Gil – Whatever makes you happy. I won’t try to convince you.
Phil – Yeah, right.
:: COMMON MISTAKES
INCORRECT CORRECT
I’ve been to Paris in 2010. I went to Paris in 2010.
I have been lived here for ten years. I have been living here for ten years.
WOULD YOU MIND…?

• Use
276
Would you mind → Used to ask for favors or permissions in which people believe the answer
might be negative, either because you are not close to the other person or
because it can be a delicate matter.
• Structure
Questions
Permissions: Would you mind + if + I + Verb in the Past + Complement

Would you mind if I borrowed your car?
Would you mind + Verb in –ING form + Complement

Favors:
Would you mind taking a picture of us?
Answers
The structure “Would you mind…?” can be understood as “Would it be a problem…?”

So, pay close attention to how you can answer this kind of question.
Would you mind if I borrowed your car?
Positive answers: Not at all. (Meaning: No, I don’t mind. / No, it’s not a problem.)
No. Go ahead.
Negative answers: Yes. (Meaning: Yes, I mind. / Yes, it’d be a problem.)

Yes, I would.
Picking up the Kids
Cristina – Hi, Derek. It’s Cristina, Tommy’s mother. How are you?
Derek – Oh, hi, Cristina. I’m fine, thanks. And you?
Cristina – I’m good too. But I have a meeting at work today, and my husband is on a business trip.
Would you mind picking up Derek when you pick up your kids at school?
Derek – Oh, no. Of course not! I’ll bring him home with my kids.
Cristina – Thank you very much. Would you mind if I passed by at around eight p.m. to pick him up? Is it too late?
Derek – No, that’s fine.
Cristina – All right. Thank you again.
Derek – No problem!
277
INTERMEDIATE 3
L E S S O N 4
:: STAY ALERT
Would you mind…? Used either to talk to people you are not close to or to ask favors
or permissions.
Could you/I…? Used in polite favors or requests.
Can you/I…? Used in neutral/informal favors or requests.
:: COMMON MISTAKES
INCORRECT CORRECT
Would you mind if I go with you? Would you mind if I went with you?
Would you mind to help me with this? Would you mind helping me with this?
R E V I E W
HOW TO GIVE YOUR OPINION USING A STRATEGY

FRAMEWORK: DISCOURSE WITH PRESENT PERFECT
Argumentation → Opinion Supported by Data

→ Rhetorical Strategies, Analyzing Pros and Cons, Quotations, Paraphrase, and Summary
Present Perfect → Refers to past from a present perspective.

→ First use: Actions that started in the past and continue up to the present.
→ Second use: Actions that happened in the past but are relevant in the present.
Let’s take a look at each argumentative strategy and how the present perfect is used in them.
• Rethorical Strategies
Appeal to Logic or Reason Appeal to Credibility Appeal to Readers’ Emotion

Inductive reasoning The source of data to Relating to the readers’ past
(facts → generalizations) support your opinion involving the reader/listener in
Deductive reasoning must be reliable. the argumentation, etc.
(generalizations → facts)
The following dialogue will show you some possible uses of the present perfect to support opinion:
278
A New Book
Kate – Tell me you liked Land of Wizards!
Paula – I haven’t read it yet.
Kate – What? You love reading and fantasy, of course you’ve read it. (Facts → Generalization)
Paula – You’re funny. No, I haven’t. I’ve read the review on The City Times and I’m not excited to
read it. (A newspaper can be a reliable source)
Kate – I’m shocked! Everybody has read it and loved it, you should be excited about it too.
(Generalization → Facts)
Paula – Maybe I’ll give it a try later. The writer of Magic Pete has launched a new series, you know
how much I love her writing. I’d be extremely disappointed to be the last to read it. (Emotions)
Kate – Like I am disappointed you haven’t read Land of Wizards yet. (Emotions)
In this dialogue, the present perfect refers to past actions that influence the present moment to justify opinion.
It works as a retrospective analysis.
• Quotations → Reproduce the exact words of an author or of an ordinary person.

→ In writing, it must come between quotes (“”) followed by credits to the author.
→ When speaking or using indirect quotation in writing, it is preceded by expressions like
“according to...”, “as...said”, “as said by...”, “in ...’s own words:...”
This dialogue will give you a glimpse on how the present perfect might appear in a spoken argumentation
using quotations:
Studying
Elliot – Mike, I have tried dozens of times and can’t

get to the result of this equation.
Mike – I know, but trust me, it has taken me many
difficult equations to become a good
physicist. Come on, dude, keep on trying and
you’ll make it.
Elliot – No equation has ever been this difficult to
solve. It’s impossible.
Mike – Audrey Hepburn taught me a huge lesson
when she said: “Nothing is impossible, the
word itself says I’m possible.” Don’t give up.
• Narration, Paraphrase, and Summary
Take a look at the strategies that deal with retelling somebody else’s words:
Paraphrase → Retell an idea using your words (you still need to credit the author).
Summary → Reduce the size of the original text or speech focusing on the main ideas.
279
INTERMEDIATE 3
R E V I E W
Narration, on the other hand, is a strategy through which the speaker tells a story in order to explain and/or
exemplify the point previously posed.
Take a look at an example:
Debating the Elections
Mia – Don’t you think that this election was a pain in the neck?
Anna – It usually is, but I think that both candidates did wrong in attacking each other rather than exposing
their plans. Maybe that is why it has been so annoying. (Summary)
Mia – My mother usually says that politics destroy one’s character. I liked Sarah Wallace before, but this
campaign has shown me a side of her character I don’t appreciate. (Paraphrase)
Anna – But did you vote at all?
Mia – Of course I did! First thing in the morning. I woke up, had breakfast, and left to vote. There was a
long queue which was impressive. Apparently, our people have become more involved in these
matters. (Narration)
Anna – Well, finally, huh. Now, let’s see what will happen.
In this dialogue, you have a narration of past events from a present perspective that organizes facts and
justifies opinion.
Actions in the past that affect the present → Maybe that’s why the campaign has been so annoying.
...this campaign has shown me...
Apparently our people have become more involved...
L E S S O N 5
ADVERBS
Adverbs → Add meaning to verbs, adjectives, other adverbs, or to whole sentences.

→ There several types of adverbs: place, manner, degree, time, certainty, completeness, etc.
280
L E S S O N 5
• Adverbs of Manner → Refers to how something happens or to how it is done
Most adverbs of manner (not all) can be formed by adding the termination –LY to an adjective.
Some adverbs of manner are:
carefully (= with care) carelessly (= without care) loudly (= in a high volume)
slowly (= at low speed) correctly (= in a correct manner) easily (= with no difficulty)
fast (= at high speed) well (= in good manner)
*Notice that fast belongs to a group of adverbs that derives from adjectives that maintains the same form like
fair, fine and hard, among others.
I have a fast car. (Adjective) vs. The car runs fast. (adverb)
This is a fair deal. (Adjective) vs. Tony plays fair. (adverb)
Position of Adverbs of Manner
1. Adverbs usually come at the end of sentences.
Julia speaks English well.
2. Adverbs ending in –LY come between subject and verb when the adverb is not the focus of the information.
At a Work Meeting
Tommy carefully explained the situation.
• Adverbs of Frequency → Refers to how often something happens or to how it is done
Here are some adverbs of frequency.
always usually never sometimes rarely often seldom
Position of Adverbs of Frequency
1. They’ll usually come in mid-position.
My family often travels in the holiday season.
281
INTERMEDIATE 3
L E S S O N 5
2. Adverbs such as usually, normally, often, frequently, sometimes, and occasionally might appear in front
or end position. When in front position, they are usually followed by a comma.
Usually, I finish work at six p.m.

Gaby goes to the gym sometimes.
• Adverbs of Place → Refers to Where an Action Happens
Take a look at some adverbs of place.
here there outside upstairs downstairs somewhere everywhere nearby
Position of Adverbs of Place
1. They’ll usually come in end position.
Kenny is going upstairs.

I can’t find Dante’s book, but it has to be somewhere.
2. Front position is possible in literary writing or when the adverb is not the focus of the message.
Here we can talk privately.
• Adverbs of Time → Refers to the Time When an Action Happens
The following box contains some of the main adverbs of time.
now still late soon yesterday tomorrow right now
Position of Adverbs of Time
1. They’ll usually come in end position.

Peter is talking to the principal now.
2. Front position is possible in literary writing or when the adverb is not the focus of the message.
Soon, everybody will worry about the environment.
282
Looking for Something
Toby – I can’t find my keys. I’ve looked everywhere.

Mia – Is your car outside? Maybe you left it there...
Toby – Maybe. I remember my mom opened
the door for me yesterday.
Mia – But before, look around your room very carefully.
Toby – Right. I’ll tell you what…I’ll look here and you
check the car, will you?
ZERO AND FIRST CONDITIONALS
Conditionals → Four Types of Conditionals: Zero, First, Second, and Third
• Zero Conditional
Used to refer to real situations, such as scientific facts.
Structure
Clause with Verb in the Simple Present + Conditional with the Simple Present
Notice that you can invert the order and the result is the same; however, use a comma to separate the
clauses. Take a look:
If you want to make pasta, you need boiling water. = You need boiling water if you want to make pasta.
Water evaporates if it reaches 100 degrees Celsius. = If water reaches 100 degrees Celsius, it evaporates.
• First Conditional
Used to refer to the future in conditionals that have an actual chance of becoming true.
Structure
Clause with Verb in the Simple Present + Conditional with Will, Can, May, Be Going To
Take a look at some examples.
If you practice every day, you will become a great piano player.
If you don’t want to eat pizza, we can go to a Japanese restaurant.
If we leave now, we may arrive before sunset.
If you do your job right, you’re going to be promoted before you know it.
283
INTERMEDIATE 3
L E S S O N 5
Looking for Something
Jack – Sarah, when you think of yourself five years from now, what
do you see?
Sarah – I don’t usually think about the future. If I do it, I start
fantasizing about being rich and famous.
Jack – There is no problem with that. So you think you’ll be famous?
Sarah – Not really. I do believe that if I work hard enough, I can get a
raise or something.
Jack – You can try the lottery too! If you don’t try it, you won’t win.
So get a ticket!
Sarah – Do you believe that?
Jack – Yes! I get a ticket every week.
:: COMMON MISTAKES
INCORRECT CORRECT
If I have enough time, I call you. If I have enough time, I’ll call you.
PAIRED CONJUNCTIONS: NOT ONLY…BUT ALSO… / BOTH…AND…

• Use
Paired Conjunctions → When used to add information, they Paired Conjunctions Used to Add Information
give more emphasis to a statement
than a single conjunction.
Not only…but also… Both…and…

• Structure
Not only…but also…
Dr. Simpson works not only at the hospital but also The car is not only beautiful but also fast.
at his clinic. (Used before the adverbial phrases) (Used before adjectives)
284
2. When used before two subjects, the verb agrees with the last subject.
Not only Lia but also her kids are in Europe. Not only you but also Paula likes this cake.
Both…and…
Dr. Simpson works both at the hospital and at his The car is both beautiful and fast.
clinic. (Used before the adverbial phrases) (Used before adjectives)
2. When used before two subjects, the verb agrees with both subjects.
Both Lia and her kids are in Europe. Both you and Paula like this cake.

285
INTERMEDIATE 3
L E S S O N 5
Ordering Food
Lorie – I’m thinking about ordering something to eat. Do you prefer Italian or Japanese food?
Mike – Well, I like both Italian and Japanese. So, it’s up to you.
Lorie – I’ll go for Italian, because not only you but also the kids like it.
Mike – Great. Let me check the menu…OK, I’ll have both the house salad and the spicy tuna spaghetti.
Lorie – All right! Kids, come here, please.
:: STAY ALERT
In spoken language, inversions of the verb and the subject are highly frequent with not only…but also…,
causing the sentence to start with the conjunction.
It was not only raining but also very cold. → No inversion

Not only was it raining but it was also very cold. → Inversion
:: COMMON MISTAKES
INCORRECT CORRECT
I have both friends in the United States and in Canada. I have friends both in the United States and in Canada.
Not only my kids but also my husband love parks. Not only my kids but also my husband loves parks.
RELATIVE PRONOUNS: REVIEW + WHOSE

• Use
Relative Pronouns → They refer to people, to things, or to ideas previously

mentioned. They can also imply a relation of possession.
WHO THAT
RELATIVE PRONOUNS
WHICH WHOSE
286
• Structure
Who / That – used to refer to people
My sister, who lives in London, is coming to spend some time with me. (I only have one sister.)
My sister who/that lives in London is coming to spend some time with me. (I have more than one sister, one lives in London.)
restrictive clause
Which / That – used to refer to things or ideas
The laptop, which is brand-new, needs to be updated. (There’s only one laptop around.)
The laptop which/that is brand-new needs to be updated. (There’s more than one laptop around, only one is new.)
restrictive clause
287
INTERMEDIATE 3
L E S S O N 5
Whose – used to imply possession
Jack is a great professional whose opinion I really respect.
→
= Jack’s opinion
Ms. Jackson, this is Mark, the student whose parents you met earlier.
→
= The student’s parents
Chatting With Friends
Joana – I saw Daniel last week.

Sofia – Daniel?
Joana – Daniel, who studied with us.
Sofia – Oh, Danny boy! How is he?
Joana – He’s great! He is going to get married to a
girl whose parents live in Australia. They
are getting married in Sydney!
Sofia – Wow! How nice! Is he moving to Australia?
Joana – No. They are just going for the wedding.
He is working at a company which sells
business solutions. He is very happy there.
Sofia – That’s great news. Danny is a great guy who
deserves all the best.
288
:: COMMON MISTAKES
INCORRECT CORRECT
This is my neighbor who the daughter got married. This is my neighbor whose daughter got married.
This is house which owner is traveling. This is house whose owner is traveling.
TAG QUESTIONS REVIEW AND OTHER WAYS TO CONFIRM STATEMENTS
• Use
Confirm Statements → W
hen you want to confirm statements, you can use either Tag Questions or other
fixed questions.
He is smiling at me,
isn’t he?
I think I’m his favorite

You have never seen such a cute aunt, don’t you think?
baby in your whole life, have you?
• Structure
Tag Questions
Tag questions can be used in any verb form and they will always follow the same pattern.
Affirmative sentences + Tag Question in the negative interrogative form.

Negative sentences + Tag Question in the interrogative form.
Present Perfect Continuous
You have been working here for a while, haven’t you?
Main sentence in the affirmative form. Tag question in the negative interrogative form
in the same verb form as the main sentence.
289
INTERMEDIATE 3
L E S S O N 5
Present Perfect
Mr. Tyler hasn’t talked to you about the meeting yet, has he?
Main sentence in the negative form. Tag question in the interrogative form in the
same verb form as the main sentence.
Simple Past
Laura finished the report this morning, didn’t she?
Main sentence in the affirmative form. Tag question in the negative-interrogative form
in the same verb form as the main sentence.
Modal Verbs
You couldn’t arrive here a little earlier tomorrow, could you?
Main sentence in the negative form Tag question in the interrogative form in
the same verb form as the main sentence.
Other Ways to Confirm Statements
There are also some fixed expressions you can use to confirm information after a statement.
This is a wonderful place to work, don’t you think?

This is a wonderful place to work, right? (very informal)
Anna – It’s been years since I last arrived home all

stressed out. Yoga helped a lot.
Bernard – Is that so?
Anthony – Ms. Smith is the best manager we’ve ever

had, don’t you agree?
Brenda – D
o you think so? I think she is very good, but
I liked Mrs. Conan too.
Thinking About the Future

Marina – I’d love to work on something related to
children. It’s so good to have children
around, don’t you think?
Susan – Do you think so? Don’t get me wrong. I love
children, but working with a lot of children all
day long must be hard, don’t you agree?
Marina – Well, maybe…but the good thing is that you
can’t think about anything else when you
have children around, can you?
Susan – Oh, that’s true. They really grab all your
attention!
Marina – It’d be wonderful to have no time to think
about problems, wouldn’t it?
290
:: STAY ALERT
Tag Questions are mostly used in spoken language. We try to avoid using them in written formal language.
Ms. Smith is the best manager we’ve ever had, don’t you agree? → Spoken language
I believe most of the employees will agree that Ms. Smith is one of the best managers in the company.
→ Written formal language
:: COMMON MISTAKES
INCORRECT CORRECT
You have talked to Mary about it, have you? You have talked to Mary about it, haven’t you?
You are going with us, no? You are going with us, aren’t you?
You don’t like fish, yes? You don’t like fish, do you?
L E S S O N 6
GERUND AND INFINITIVE CLAUSES

• Use
Gerund and Infinitive Clauses → Used as subject or as object of a sentence.
• Structure
Gerund and Infinitive Clauses as Subjects
Reading a good book is my favorite leisure activity. To study hard is the key to success.
Gerund clause used as the subject of the sentence. Infinitive clause used as the subject of the sentence.
291
INTERMEDIATE 3
L E S S O N 6
Gerund and Infinitive Clauses as Objects
My ultimate goal is taking a sabbatical year and traveling around the globe.
Gerund clause used as part of the object.
Your main job here is to prevent problems, not to solve them.
Infinitive clause used as part of the object.
Verbs that take Bare Infinite (Without To)
Lyla heard Sid and Pam talk about her.
Use bare infinitive after the verb Hear.
Let me see your wedding album.
Infinitive clause used as part of the object.
Use bare infinitive after See.
292
Asking for Information
Julia – Excuse me, can you help me find the nearest subway station?
Sandra – Sure. It’s not difficult to get there. Let me show you on the
map. Here, walk two blocks then turn left.
Julia – Thank you! That’s very kind of you.
Sandra – I’m happy to help. Helping people is always a pleasure.
:: STAY ALERT
Both gerund and infinitive clauses can be used as a subject with the same meaning.
However, nowadays gerund clauses are more frequent and sound more natural in this position.
Working hard is the key to success. → Preferable and accepted in all situations.
To work hard is the key to success. → Correct but less frequent nowadays.
The gerund is used after prepositions.
Anthony thinks about changing careers.

Carla apologized for misplacing the documents.
:: COMMON MISTAKES
INCORRECT CORRECT
Jack made me to notice my mistake Jack made me notice my mistake.
Read is a way to broaden your horizons. Reading is a way to broaden your horizons.
293
INTERMEDIATE 3
L E S S O N 6
SECOND CONDITIONAL
• Use
Second Conditional → Refers to hypothetical situations in the speaker's perspective.
• Structure
If + Subject + Simple Past, Subject + Would + Main Verb + Complement
If I had time, I would learn several languages.
Hypothetical Situation: I would only learn more languages if I had more time.
Present Situation: I don’t have time, that’s why I don’t learn more languages.
294
If Mary spoke English, she would have more job offers.
Hypothetical Situation: Mary would only have more job offers if she spoke English.
Present Situation: Mary doesn’t speak English, that’s why she doesn’t have many job offers.
If I were…
When we use I + Verb To Be in the Simple Past in Second Conditional, we use were.
If I were you, I would go to the doctor right now.

If I were more qualified, I would apply for the job.
Shopping for Clothes

Carol – Wow! They are both beautiful!
Sharon – They really are! If I were you, I’d take both.
Carol – I wish! I would take both dresses, if I had
enough money. But I don’t, so I have to
pick one. What do you think?
Sharon – In such case, let’s see…if I had to choose,
I’d buy the blue one.
Carol – Great! I’ll take the blue one then.
:: STAY ALERT
If I were rich, I would definitely have a boat. → Preferable and accepted in all situations
If I was rich, I would definitely have a boat. → Accepted in spoken informal language
:: COMMON MISTAKES
INCORRECT CORRECT
If I have enough money, I’d buy a fancy car. If I had enough money, I’d buy a fancy car.
If I had more free time, I will study more. If I had more free time, I would study more.
295
INTERMEDIATE 3
L E S S O N 6
MODAL VERBS REVIEW AND SHALL AND OUGHT TO

• Use WILL WOULD
CAN MUST
OUGHT TO MODAL VERBS AND SEMI-MODALS SHALL
COULD SHOULD
MAY MIGHT
Modal Verbs → They are used as auxiliary verbs and express the speaker’s perspective, such as obligation,
possibility, necessity, etc.).
• Structure
Affirmative: Subject + Modal Verb + Main Verb* + Complement

Negative: Subject + Modal Verb + Not + Main Verb* + Complement
Interrogative: Modal Verb + Subject + Main Verb* + Complement
*With all Modal Verbs the Main Verb is used in Bare Infinitive (without To), the only exception
is the modal auxiliary verb Ought To.
• Can: Used to express possibility, ability, and negative certainty.
Possibility: I can help you with that.

Ability: Marcy can speak several languages.
Negative Certainty: You can’t be serious.
• Could: Used to express remote possibility, past ability, and negative certainty.
Remote Possibility: I could travel next week if you are free.

Past Ability: I could notice he was very angry.
Negative Certainty: I knew it couldn’t be true.
• Will: Used to express certainty and refusal.
Certainty: I’m sure you will understand it after the explanation.

Refusal: I won’t travel by car. It’s too far.
• May: Used to express probability and permission.
Probability: We may be able to buy a new car by the end of the year.
Permission: May I come in?
Yes, you may.
• Might: Used to express remote probability.
Remote Probability: I might finish the report tomorrow. But don’t count on it.
296
• Must: Used to express obligation, assumption (affirmative form), or prohibition (negative form).
Obligation: You must do your homework before you go play with your friends.
Assumption: It must be hard to work such long hours and take care of four kids.
Prohibition: You mustn’t be late for the meeting.
• Should: Used to give advice.
Advice: You should talk to Mrs. Wilson about this problem.
• Would: Used to talk about a hypothetical situation or past habit that you miss.
Hypothesis: I would go to the movies with you if I didn’t have to work.

Past Habit: When I was a child, I would spend the holidays at my grandparents. I miss them.
• Shall
This modal verb is more frequently used in British English with the meaning of will. It is not normally used
in American spoken English, only in formal written language, mainly in legal documents. It is also used for
suggestions. (interrogative form)
Spoken English (mainly British)

Certainty: I shall be there at nine p.m.
Suggestion: Shall we visit that museum today?
Written Language (mainly legal documents)

Prohibition: This document shall not be copied.
• Ought to
Ought to is considered to be a semi-modal verb because, unlike modal verbs, it is followed by to.
Ought to and should are similar in meaning, but should is more common.
Advice: You ought to eat more vegetables.
Canceling a Reservation
Mark – Baby, we may have to postpone our weekend trip. I’m not
sure yet, but if we don’t finish the presentation by tomorrow,
I will have to work on Saturday.
Kim – Really? Can’t you finish it on Monday?
Mark – No. Sorry, baby. We must have it ready on Monday morning.
Kim – B ut we already paid and the contract reads: In case of
cancellation, the client shall not be refunded the rates paid
in advance.
Mark – This is an abusive term. We ought to find a lawyer if we
have to cancel.
:: COMMON MISTAKES
INCORRECT CORRECT
You must to go to bed. You must go to bed.
I’d like to can help you. I’d like to help you.
I’d like to be able to help you.
I wish I could help you.
You always should respect your parents.
You should always respect your parents.
297
INTERMEDIATE 3
L E S S O N 6
PAIRED CONJUNCTIONS: REVIEW

• Use
Paired Conjunctions → Used to give options: Either…or…
Used to deny both options: Neither…nor…
Used to add information: Not only…but also… / Both…and…
• Structure
Giving Options: Either…or…
• Frequently used before equivalent elements in a sentence.
• When used before two subjects the verb agrees with the last subject.
( ) ( )
Either John or Christina speaks French. I don’t remember which of them mentioned this to me.
First Subject Second Subject
Denying Options: Neither…or…

• When used before two subjects the verb agrees with the last subject.
Neither mommy nor daddy is at home. I’m here with the nanny.
298
Adding Information
1. Not only…but also…
• Frequently used before equivalent elements in

a sentence.
• When used before two subjects the verb agrees
with the last subject.
Not only my brothers but also my mother is a huge sports fan.
2. Both…and…

• The verb agrees with both subjects.
Both my brothers and my mother are huge sports fans.
Staying with the Kids

Lisa – Hi, mom. Listen, both Phil and I are going on a business trip on Friday. Do you mind staying with
the kids on the weekend?
Anna – Of course not. I’d love to spend the weekend with them. Well, not only I but also your father will
surely have a lot of fun with them.
Lisa – Thank you, mom.
Anna – We could either go to your place or you could bring the kids here. What do think is best for them?
Lisa – N either you nor dad is leaving your house. That’s crazy! I’ll drop them off on Friday in the morning
and pick them up on Sunday. Is that OK?
Anna – OK, dear. We’ll be waiting.
299
INTERMEDIATE 3
L E S S O N 6
:: COMMON MISTAKES
INCORRECT CORRECT
We can watch or a comedy or a drama. We can watch either a comedy or a drama.
We are not going either to the movies or to We are going neither to the movies nor to
the theater. the theater.
Not only my kids but also my husband are Not only my kids but also my husband is
excited about going to the circus. excited about going the circus.
NOTES
300
ADVANCED 1
L E S S O N 1
ARGUMENTATIVE STRATEGIES: REVIEW

Structure for both written and spoken argumentation:
Introduction → Main Idea + Conflict
Development → Exposition of ideas or analysis of pros and cons
Conclusion → End of text with a solution of the conflict or other type of closure.
* Even in conversations, the cycle to prove a point must be completed, otherwise your counterpart won’t
understand your point and communication will be compromised.
Let’s understand the application of the techniques used in argumentation with some examples.
• Analyzing Pros and Cons → Takes positive and negative aspects into consideration.
Albert York is a successful businessman who’s running for president. On one hand, he’s very experienced in
running companies and he does it quite well. (Positive Aspect) On the other hand, he’s never held public
office before. (Negative Aspect) When analyzing the history of presidents without experience in public
administration, it is possible to say that... (Introduction to present data that supports your analysis)
• Rhetorical Strategies
1) Inductive or Deductive Reasoning. 2) Credibility and Reliability of the Source or Speaker
When we look for a job, we are asked about According to Global Image Press, Albert York is a
experience. Being president is a job. Albert York possible choice to run the country.
doesn’t have any experience. He can’t be president.
(Inductive reasoning and oversimplification of
logic)
3) Appealing to the readers’ emotions.
Successful businessmen are always smart and
responsible men and the country is nothing but a Albert York is humble, friendly to the voters and
big enterprise. Albert York is very qualified to be one in three ladies say they’d marry him. He’s
president. (Deductive reasoning) probably a good person to run the country.
• Quotations
In writing or speaking: Indirect quotations—usually
In writing: Direct quotations—exact fragments
introduced by phrases.
copied between quotes (“”)—accompanied by
credits to the original author.
According to (name of the author)...
Mia Horsbury said, “Albert York is not even a
As (name of the author) states...
choice to be considered.”
As stated by (name of the author)...
(Name of the author) states that...
302
According to Mia Horsbury, Albert York shouldn’t even be considered for presidency.
Important Note: The use of an author’s words, even if paraphrased, without due credit
is what constitutes plagiarism (appropriation of another person’s work and ideas as one’s
own). It is considered an ethical foul and undermines the credibility of an author for good.
• Paraphrase • Narrations
Saying the same thing with different words. The Exemplify the author’s point related to data collected
original author must be credited. in their research. They don’t need to be credited if
they reflect the author’s own experience.
Thomas Lowe usually says that a president
must have the population’s respect, so that is
what guides people’s choice. In order to justify aspects in the text or speech, you
can use connectors and then refer to the original
• Summary source of information that proves your point.
A short version of an original text that Finally...

concentrates on its main idea, leaving out Because...
details, and told with your own words. Again, the As...
original author must be credited. Due to...
PAST PERFECT
• Use
Past Perfect → The past perfect often occurs with the simple past. The speaker establishes a connection
between the more distant past action (used in past perfect) and the more recent past action
(used in the simple past).
When Laura arrived, Mark had already left.
What happened first? Mark left.

What happened after? Laura arrived.
Why did the speaker use the past perfect? To emphasize the relation between the more distant past action
(Mark left) and the other past action (Laura arrived).
Past Perfect Simple Past Present

Mark had left Laura arrived
303
ADVANCED 1
L E S S O N 1
I met a Russian co-worker yesterday. I had never met anyone from Russia before.
What happened for a long period of time in the past? I didn’t know anyone from Russia.
What happened yesterday? I met a person from Russia for the first time.
Why did the speaker use past perfect? To emphasize the relation between the more distant past action
(I didn’t know anyone from Russia) and the other past action (I met a Russian co-worker).
I had never met I met a Russian
anyone from Russia co-worker
• Structure
Past Perfect
Affirmative: Subject + Auxiliary Verb Have (In the Past) + Main Verb in the Past Participle
I had met someone from Russia before.
Negative: Subject + Auxiliary Verb Have (In the Past) + Not + Main Verb in the Past Participle
I hadn’t met anyone from Russia before.
Interrogative: Auxiliary Verb Have (In the Past) + Subject + Main Verb in the Past Participle
Had you ever met anyone from Russia?
Visiting the Corcovado
Laura – Oh my! I had never seen such a beautiful

view before!
Robin – Hadn’t I told you we had to come here?
It’s awesome!
Laura – Yes! Imagine what we would have missed if we
hadn’t come. Thank you for bringing me here.
Robin – My pleasure.
:: COMMON MISTAKES
INCORRECT CORRECT
I had seen this movie yesterday. I saw this movie yesterday.
I had graduated in 2005 by the time I got my first I had graduated by the time I got my first job in
job in 2006. 2006.
I graduated in 2005 and I got my first job in 2006.
304
TALKING ABOUT THE FUTURE

→ Talking about the future usually refers to plans, predictions, and guesses.
Future → The representation of the future depends on the speaker’s perspective.
→ There are different ways to express future in English.
This chapter focuses on five ways to talk about the future.
• Modal Verb Will

This dress fits me perfectly. I’ll take it.
Used to make predictions about the future based on the
speaker’s opinion. It also reflects a decision made at the
moment of speaking.
Situation: A woman went to a store to buy a dress as

a gift to her daughter. As she was looking for the dress,
she really liked another model and decided to buy one
for herself. She would say...
• Be Going To
Used to refer to plans for the future and predictions made based on physical evidence.
Let’s see two situations that illustrate the possible uses of be going to.
Situation 1: Mike arranged his vacation from work, Situation 2: Larry’s wife is five months pregnant. It
his partner will also be on vacation, they checked takes approximately nine months for a baby to be
the prices to go to the Caribbean, they have some born. One could say by looking at her...
money and there is still time to save up. He’d say...
We’re going to travel to the Caribbean on our She’s going to have a baby in a few months.
vacation.
305
ADVANCED 1
L E S S O N 1
• Simple Present
I can’t believe we have classes on
Used to refer to the future when the action in Saturdays for the next three months.
question is part of a schedule, therefore the speaker
considers it a fact. The future reference is normally
made by using time expressions. Take a look.
Situation: Julia is checking her school schedule and
she notices there are classes on a few Saturdays.
She says...
• Future Continuous (Will + Be + Verb in –ING)
Hello. Mark, are you coming?
I’ll be leaving in an hour, please hurry.
Used when the speaker sees the future action as
relevant and intends to emphasize this feature. It is
generally used in excuses or to justify a refusal or
another decision.
Situation: Nick is at his parents’ house until six p.m.

A friend promised to deliver a package before then,
but it’s five p.m. and the friend hasn’t shown up. Nick
calls his friend and says:
An Invitation
Pete – Sharon, will you come to my farewell party tonight?

Sharon – I’m afraid I can’t. I’ll be flying to Denver then. In fact,
I’m leaving soon.
Pete – Oh, that’s a shame. Why are you going to Denver?
Sharon – My son lives there and I’m going to help him move.
Pete – Oh cool! When do you come back?
Sharon – My flight is on the fifth, but I’m going to stay there for
as long as he needs and my vacation allows me to.
Pete – I see. Well, safe flight and I’ll see you in a few weeks.
:: COMMON MISTAKES
INCORRECT CORR ECT

Cindy will to go to New York. Cindy will go to New York.
306
VERBS FOLLOWED BY GERUND AND INFINITIVE

• Use
Used as verb complements
Gerunds and Infinitives Used as the subject of sentences
Used as the object of sentences
• Structure
• Gerund and Infinitive as Verb Complements
1. Verbs Followed by Infinitive
I decided to do what you told me. I have to go now.
Verb Phrase: DECIDE + Infinitive Verb Phrase: HAVE + Infinitive
I wanted to see what he planned to do.
Verb Phrase: WANT + Infinitive Verb Phrase: PLAN + Infinitive
2. Verbs Followed by Gerund
He keeps making the same mistakes. I really enjoy exercising early in the morning.
Verb Phrase: KEEP + Gerund Verb Phrase: ENJOY + Gerund
I can’t help thinking this was a waste of time.
CAN’T HELP + Gerund
307
ADVANCED 1
L E S S O N 1
3. Verbs Followed by Gerund or Infinitive
A. No Change in Meaning
I love to work here. = I love working here. I like to have fruit for breakfast. = I like having fruit for breakfast.
B. Changes Meaning
I forgot to talk to you about it.

Forget + Infinitive: I was supposed to do something but I didn’t
because I forgot to do it.
I completely forgot talking to you about this.

Forget + Gerund: I did something in the past but I forgot I did it.
He stopped to help me with the project.

Stop + Infinitive: He interrupted what he was doing to help me.
He stopped helping me with the project.

Stop + Gerund: He used to help me but he won’t help me any longer.
• Gerund and Infinitive Clauses as Subjects
Working out is good for your health.
Gerund Clause used as the subject of the sentence.
To work out is good for your health.
Infinitive Clause used as the subject of the sentence.
308
• Gerund and Infinitive Clauses as Objects
There is nothing better than eating ice cream on a hot day.
Gerund Clause used as part of the object.
It’s late and you are tired. The best thing you can do now is
to go home and rest.
Infinitive Clause used as part of the object.
Verbs that take Bare Infinite (Without To) Use Bare Infinitive after LET.
I’ll let you play first.
Infinitive Clause used as part of the object.
Deadline
Jonas – I can’t believe it’s not right again. I’ve been trying to finish
this report for days.
Amanda – Jonas, working this hard will only stress you out.
You need to rest.
Jonas – But I can’t. It has to be ready tomorrow in the evening.
Amanda – Let me tell you what we’ll do: Go home, relax, get a good
night’s sleep and then, tomorrow, I’ll help you finish it.
Jonas – I think you are right. Thank you, Amanda. You are the best!
:: STAY ALERT
Both gerund and infinitive clauses can be used as subject with the same meaning. However,
nowadays gerund clauses are more frequent and sound more natural in this position.
Working hard is the key to success. → Preferable and accepted in all situations.
To work hard is the key to success. → Correct but less frequent nowadays.
:: COMMON MISTAKES
INCORRECT CORRECT
Read is always a great experience. Reading is always a great experience.
309
ADVANCED 1
L E S S O N 2
MAKING A DEFINITION: SUBTLE OR EMPHATIC

Definition → It’s a description that identifies what something means.
→ It may answer the questions: What is...? / What do you understand by...? /
What’s your idea of...? / What does...mean?
Being Subtle Being Emphatic

Avoids being direct Makes your point clear
Uses softer words Uses adverbs and words that strengthen your speech
Tends to be more polite Doesn’t mean to be rude
Take a look at the formal definition of the word “book” similar to what is found in a dictionary.
1 [countable] Object made of a sequence of paper sheets where

stories or pictures are printed so people can read them.
When you are subtle or emphatic, you will include personal notes into this definition.
Let’s see some examples using the definition of “book.”
What’s a book?
Subtle
It looks like a bunch of sheets of paper bound together in thread and held with a cover.
It can/could be defined as a vehicle of knowledge and experiences.
You can/could see a book as the most effective tool to improve your writing and reading.
Emphatic
It is an extremely important tool for students.
A book is a remarkable source of knowledge in a pile of paper.
It is absolutely advisable to have the habit of reading books to learn about all things.
It is a really good source of information for students and a great way to spend time.
310
Exotic Food
Jake – Laura, let’s go have some kimchi.
Laura – What on earth is that?
Jake – You can say it is the most famous South
Korean side dish...for me, it tastes like
childhood, from when I lived in Seoul.
Laura – Oh, wow! That sounds important. Let’s try it!
MUST, MUST BE, MUST + PERFECT INFINITIVE
• Use
Must → Obligation
Mustn’t → Prohibition
Must + Be → Assumption
Must + Perfect Infinitive → Assumption about the past
• Structure
• Must: Obligation
Subject + Must + Main Verb in Bare Infinitive + Complement
We can go to the movies. But first, you must finish your homework.
311
ADVANCED 1
L E S S O N 2
• Mustn’t: Prohibition
Subject + Must Not (Mustn’t) + Main Verb in Bare Infinitive + Complement
This is a valuable and old artifact. You mustn’t touch it.
• Must Be: Assumption
Subject + Must Be + Complement
That’s such a beautiful painting. It must be John has been playing tennis for five hours.
expensive. He must be exhausted.
(I don’t know the price, but I assume it’s expensive.) (I haven’t talked to John, but I assume he is tired.)
• Must + Perfect Infinitive: Assumption about the Past
Subject + Must + Have + Main Verb in the Past Participle + Complement
I’ve looked all over, but I can’t find my keys. I must

have left them in the car.
(I’m not sure I left them in the car but since it was the
last place I’ve been, I assume I left the keys there.)
312
The dogs are not home. Karen must have taken them
to the vet.
(I haven’t talked to Karen, but I assume that she has
taken them to the vet because neither Karen nor the
dogs are home.)
Bedtime
Jeff – It’s late, baby, leave it for tomorrow. You must be tired.
Olivia – I am, but I must finish reading this book for my class tomorrow morning.
Jeff – OK, then, honey. So...I’m going to bed.
Olivia – All right, dear, sleep tight.
Jeff – Honey, by the way, did you see my charger? I’ve looked for it all over.
Olivia – I haven’t seen it, baby. You must have left it in the office. But you can take mine.
Jeff – Well, they say you mustn’t use different charger models, but I don’t think it’s
going to cause any problem. Thanks, baby.
:: COMMON MISTAKES
INCORRECT CORRECT
You must to be back at ten p.m. You must be back at ten p.m.
You musn’t read in such a dark room. You mustn’t read in such a dark room.
313
ADVANCED 1
L E S S O N 2
PAST PERFECT CONTINUOUS

• Use
Past Perfect Continuous → It refers to an ongoing action or event that started at a point in the past
and continued up to another point in the past.
→ The speaker focuses on showing the progression or continuity of the
action or event.
→ There must be two clear past time references in the sentence or context.
• Timeline
• Structure
Affirmative → Subject + Had + Been + Verb in –ING Form
I’d been searching for a present until I decided to just take Julia to dinner.
Mike was tired because he’d been working the night shift.
314
Negative → Subject + Had Not/Hadn’t + Been + Verb in –ING Form
Jack hadn’t been eating well, so he put on a lot of weight.

Phil hadn’t been studying enough until he realized he could fail.
Interrogative → Had + Subject + Been + Verb in –ING Form
Had you been having trouble sleeping before you visited the doctor?
How long had Sheila been dating Julius before they got married?
Trying to Understand
Tara – Nick, do you know what’s up with Sarah? She won’t talk to me anymore.
Nick – Why would she do that? Had you two been having problems before she stopped talking to you?
Tara – Not that I know of. I’d been thinking of changing jobs for a while but I didn’t tell her.
Nick – She wouldn’t be mad because of that, would she? I mean, you were friends before you started
working together.
Tara – That’s what I can’t understand. She won’t answer my calls or text messages. I’m starting to worry.
What should I do?
Nick – I really don’t know...I’d keep trying to talk to her. She’ll talk to you eventually.
:: COMMON MISTAKES
INCORRECT CORRECT
I been working weekends. I’d been working weekends for years before
I changed jobs.
315
ADVANCED 1
L E S S O N 2
PAST PERFECT VS. PRESENT PERFECT

• Use
They both connect actions that happened in the two different moments in a timeline.
Present Perfect → Used when the speaker wants to make a connection between the
past action or event to the present moment.
Present Perfect Present
Mary has been to my house She knows where it is
Mary has been to my house before. She knows where it is.
Did Mary come to my house at any moment in the past? Yes.

Is Mary in my house now? No.
Why did the speaker use present perfect? To emphasize that the past action (she came to
my house before) is connected to the present
(she knows where my house is).
Past Perfect → The past perfect often occurs with the simple past. The speaker establishes a connection
between the more distant past action (used in past perfect) and the more recent past action
(used in the simple past).

I had forgotten I got on the bus
my wallet
When I got on the bus, I realized I had forgotten my wallet.
What happened first? I forgot my wallet.

What happened after? I got on the bus.
Why did the speaker use past perfect? To emphasize that the more distant past action (I forgot my
wallet) is connected to another past action (I got on the bus).
316
• Structure
Present Perfect
Affirmative: Subject + Auxiliary Verb Have (In the Present) + Main Verb in the Past Participle.
Negative: Subject + Auxiliary Verb Have (In the Present) + Not + Main Verb in the Past Participle.
Interrogative: Auxiliary Verb Have (In the Present) + Subject + Main Verb in the Past Participle
Past Perfect
Affirmative: Subject + Auxiliary Verb Have (In the Past) + Main Verb in the Past Participle.
Negative: Subject + Auxiliary Verb Have (In the Past) + Not + Main Verb in the Past Participle.
Interrogative: Auxiliary Verb Have (In the Past) + Subject + Main Verb in the Past Participle
First Time in the Snow
Rachel – My nephew Mark was so happy it snowed yesterday.

He had never seen snow before.
Sandra – Really?
Rachel – Mark was born in Florida and he had never been to northern
states before. It was his first time here in Wisconsin.
Sandra – Of course! He is from Florida! I’ve been there. The weather is
awesome, even in the winter.
:: COMMON MISTAKES
INCORRECT CORRECT
I’ve been to Paris last year. I was in Paris last year. / I’ve been to Paris.
This is not the first time I see snow. I had seen This is not the first time I see snow. I had seen
snow two years ago. snow before. / I saw snow two years ago.
317
ADVANCED 1
L E S S O N 3
CONNECTORS: CONDITIONS
Connectors → Join words or sentences
In this chapter, we’ll focus on connectors that express the idea of conditions.
• If
This word has different meanings depending on context and use. They may be:
• Introducing a situation that would cause another; on the occasion of/on the condition that.
If we need money, we can sell the car.
(They will sell the car on the occasion of lack of money.)
• Connecting clauses referring to uncertain situations.
I don’t know if I’m going to sell the car.
It also forms other expressions, some examples are:
What if something happens? → Raising a hypothesis

Lia looked at me as if I were a stranger. → Similar to Like
• In case
You’d better take some extra cash,

in case you need to take a taxi.
• Unless
Similar to If...not, it presents an outcome and a hypothetical solution as the excepting condition.
You’ll have to walk home, unless you take some extra cash.
318
• Otherwise
Used to say that there will be a bad result from the previous action.
You’d better take some extra cash, otherwise you’ll have to walk home.
• Whether
When dealing with uncertain situations, mostly when there are alternatives, you’ll use whether.
In this case if can also be used.
Please let me know whether
you’re coming to dinner or not.
Invitation List
June – Mom, I don’t know whether to invite Patrice or not.

Edna – It’s your wedding. If you want to invite her, do it.
June – Right. Maybe I should talk to Gabriel first, in case he
gets mad. What do you think?
Edna – He’s mature enough to understand you are friends
with his ex. Unless he still likes her. Oh, boy.
June – Mom, don’t be silly! He’s engaged! You know what, I’ll
invite her; otherwise, I might regret it.
Edna – That’s right! But remember to give Gabe the heads up.
:: COMMON MISTAKES
INCORRECT CORRECT
If you shouldn’t do it, you are afraid. If you are afraid, you shouldn’t do it.
319
ADVANCED 1
L E S S O N 3
EXPLAINING PROCEDURES: ASKING FOR CLARIFICATION

Expressions to Show Sequence of Steps
Explaining Procedures Reminders
Asking for Clarification
• Expressions to Show Sequence
Start by / First / Second / Third / Then / Right after that / After that / Finish by
• Reminders
Don’t forget to / Remember to / Bear in mind that / Keep in mind that / It’s important to / Make sure you
You ask for clarification when there is a step you don’t understand and you ask for a new explanation.
Michael – So, in order to invest your money, you should

contact the bank and they can manage it.
Tom – What do you mean?
Can you repeat that?
I didn’t get it. The bank will invest my money?
I’m sorry, can you say that again?
Can you explain it again?
Planning to Buy a House
Stu – Honey, we need to start planning to buy our

house, but where do we start?
Mary – Well, first we need to open a savings
account.
Stu – What do you mean?
Mary – We need to have an account where we can
keep our money or else we'll spend it all.
Stu – Right…remember that we need a real estate
agent, right?
Mary – Yeah, and that can be expensive. OK, let’s
put it all on paper.
320
MODALS + PERFECT INFINITIVE: SHOULD

Modals + Perfect Infinitive → Used to make deductions about the past
In this chapter, we’ll focus on the Modal Verb Should + Perfect Infinitive.
Should = I think it is desirable that...
When combined with the Perfect Infinitive, one can understand it as:
Should Have + Verb in Past Participle = You didn’t do what I think was desirable
= What I would have done is...
In this case, it refers to an action that has already happened and the speaker comments on hypothetical
results. Take a look at the sequence of actions:
1. Nick saw his friend’s girlfriend with another man at a café.
2. Nick told Paul he’d seen his girlfriend with another man.
3. Paul confronted his girlfriend and she was angry because she
was talking to a friend.
4. Paul was too jealous; his girlfriend was extremely annoyed and
they broke up.
5. Now, Paul is very sad because he still loves his ex-girlfriend.
Larry, Nick and Paul’s friend, heard about the situation and told Nick:
“Nick, you shouldn’t have jumped to conclusions.”

“You should have talked to Paul’s girlfriend first to understand the situation.”
By saying these sentences, Larry indicates what he thinks was the desirable action in such situation,
therefore, what he would have done if it had happened to him.
321
ADVANCED 1
L E S S O N 3
A Warning Letter
Jack – What’s up with you, Albert?
Albert – I got a warning letter from Mrs. Harper about
my frequent tardiness.
Jack – Dude, that’s bad. You should have been
more careful about your hours.
Albert – I shouldn’t have moved to another house
without considering the commute. It takes
me too long to get here.
Jack – Well, maybe you should consider buying a
car or negotiating your hours with the board.
:: COMMON MISTAKES
INCORRECT CORRECT
Leo should to have work harder. Leo should have worked harder.
Sam should stopped smoking. Sam should have stopped smoking.
PASSIVE VOICE
Passive Voice → The focus is on the action (what was done) rather than the doer (who did it).
→ The doer can be mentioned or not.
Take a look at how the passive voice is formed from the active voice.
Active Voice: The marketing team presented the new campaign.

Subject Verb in the Object
Simple Past
Passive Voice: The new campaign was presented (by the marketing team).
Optional
So, in order to form the passive voice:
1) Object of the Active Voice → Subject of the Passive Voice
The new campaign...
322
2) Main Verb of the Active Voice →

To Be (same form as the Main Verb of the Active Voice) + Main Verb (Past Participle)
The new campaign was presented...
3) Subject of the Active Voice → By + Agent of the Passive Voice (Optional)
The new campaign was presented by the Marketing team.
:: STAY ALERT
The passive voice cannot be used in all situations. If there is no action verb or if there is no complement, it is
impossible to form the passive voice.
The program starts at five. ------------ Impossible to form the Passive Voice
The room is well decorated. ---------- Impossible to form the Passive Voice
The auditors made the announcement today. ------- The announcement was made by the auditors today.
Custom-made Products
Anna – I love your new place! It’s fantastic.

Jamie – Oh, thank you! The whole thing was designed just for me.
Anna – That’s lovely. This table is so unique!
Jamie – I know. It was custom-made according to every detail I asked for. I love it.
Anna – You should!
:: COMMON MISTAKES
INCORRECT CORRECT
It given to me as gift. It was given to me as gift.
323
ADVANCED 1
L E S S O N 4
CONNECTORS: EXEMPLIFICATION + CAUSE AND EFFECT

• Use
Connectors → Used to join words, phrases, or clauses implying different ideas, among them
Exemplification and Cause and Effect.
• Structure
Connectors for Exemplification
All the following connectors introduce an example. They can be used
interchangeably and they usually precede the examples.
For instance That is (to say)

For example Such as
As an example Namely
We must keep ourselves well-informed. There are Simple daily habits such as using recycled paper can
several ways to do that, namely reading books, have a huge environmental impact.
newspapers, and magazines.
Connectors for Cause and Effect
All the following connectors are used to express a relation of cause and
effect. However, they are used in different ways.
Hence That’s why

Thus Because of that
As a consequence / Consequently As a result
324
Hence / Thus
Used to join two clauses or sentences.
If we are thinking about a family trip, thus / hence we
have to save money.
Traveling overseas with your whole family is expensive.
Thus / Hence we need to save money.
Consequently / As a consequence (of something)
Used to join two clauses or sentences. They usually have negative connotation.
I told you not to spread your toys in the living room and
you did. As a consequence / Consequently, I’ll keep
them with me for three days.
That's why
Used to join two clauses or sentences.
We must take care of our planet, that's why we should

recycle.
As a result/ Because of that
Our body was made to move and we have been neglecting that.
As a result, / Because of that, we have been having more heart diseases and arthritis.
325
ADVANCED 1
L E S S O N 4
Analyzing Results
Manager – Guys, not only have we achieved our goals, but we managed to surpass even the most
optimistic predictions. Thus, I’m glad to announce that not only the company but also the team
profits from that. For instance, this year’s Christmas bonus will be really fat!
Team – That is great news!
Manager – Yes! But remember, everyone, we’ve managed to increase our customer portfolio, which is
wonderful, but as a result our responsibilities have also increased. That is to say we have to
keep our customers satisfied and also attract new ones. Let’s celebrate but let’s also put our
thoughts into how we can keep on improving.
:: STAY ALERT
Thus / Hence → Considered to be more formal.

As a consequence / Consequently → Used mostly for negative consequences.
:: COMMON MISTAKES
INCORRECT CORRECT
I got the manager position and I got the manager position and thus
as a consequence I’ll have a raise. I’ll have a raise.
EXPLAINING PROCEDURES: REVIEW

• Use
Explaining Procedures Organize Instructions in a Sequence

Remind of Important Steps
Ask for Clarification
Add Further Information
326
• Structure
In order to explain procedures, You should also draw the listener’s Give the listener the
you should state the order in attention to important steps that can’t chance to clarify steps.
which actions take place. be skipped. Use reminders to do so.
Organizing a Sequence Reminders Adding Further
Information
First, Second, Third… Make sure you…
Right after Don't forget to… You should…
After that Remember to… You must…
Then Bear in mind that… You are supposed to…
Start by… Keep in mind that… You have to…
Finish by… It's important to…
Analyzing Results
Mother – I love this new washing machine, but I have no idea how to use it.
Son – I’ll show you, mom. It’s not rocket science. First, place your laundry in the machine.
Second, add the detergent to this drawer here.
(Organizing a sequence.)
Mother – Sorry, I didn’t get it. Can you show me again how to open it?
(Asking for clarification.)
Son – Here. You just have to pull it gently.
(Adding further information.)
Mother – I see.
Son – Then you should choose one of the preset cycles: regular, heavy, or delicate.
Mother – All right. It’s not that difficult.
Son – But don’t forget to set the water temperature: cold or warm. Finish by pushing the start button.
(Reminding) (Organizing a sequence)
Mother – Excellent! Thank you!
327
ADVANCED 1
L E S S O N 4
:: COMMON MISTAKES
INCORRECT CORRECT
Start by organize your clothes by colors. Start by organizing your clothes by colors.
To start, organize your clothes by colors.
Bear in mind to press this red button. Bear in mind that you should press this red button.
Click on the link than log on. Click on the link, then log on.
PASSIVE VOICE
• Use
Focus on the action not on the doer.

Passive Voice The doer is irrelevant.
The doer is unknown.
• Structure
Example 1
Active Voice auxiliary verb –

Past Continuous object
Kate was writing the report.
Subject main verb –

Past Continuous
Step 1 → The object of the active voice becomes the subject of the passive voice
Step 2 → R epeat the auxiliary verb (if there is one)
Step 3 → Include the verb to be conjugated in the same form as the main verb from
the active voice
Step 4 → Use the main verb in the past participle
Step 5 → Use subject of the active voice preceded by the preposition by (optional).
Passive Voice Step 2 Step 4
The report was being written by Kate.
Step 1 Step 3 Step 5
328
Example 2
Active Voice
main verb – Simple Past
Mark cleaned the house.
Subject object
Step 2 → Repeat the auxiliary verb (if there is one)
the active voice
Passive Voice Step 3 Step 5
The house was cleaned by Mark.
Step 1 Step 4
Example 3
Active Voice auxiliary verb –

Present Continuous object
They are painting the office.
Subject main verb –

Present Continuous
Step 2 → Repeat the auxiliary verb (in case there is one)
the active voice
Passive Voice Step 2

Step 4
The office is being painted.
Step 1 Step 3
329
ADVANCED 1
L E S S O N 4
Project Outline
Mr. Harrison – The outline for the new project was emailed to you this morning.
Please read it carefully. If you have questions, they should be sent to
Mr. Rodgers.
Julia – Is this the final outline?
Mr. Harrison – This is the final outline. All suggestions were taken into
consideration, but minor changes can still be made.
Ben – Perfect. We’ll start reading it today.
:: STAY ALERT
Intransitive verbs, some stative verbs, and some verbs of Movement do not take the passive voice.
This is where the accident happened. → No Passive Voice

(Intransitive Verb)
I like chocolate. → No Passive Voice

(Stative Verb)
I’m going to the beach. → No Passive Voice

(Verb of Movement)
:: COMMON MISTAKES
INCORRECT CORRECT
The office are being painted. The office is being painted.
Paris has been traveled by me. I have traveled to Paris.
330
PRONOUN AMBIGUITY
Pronouns are used in the place of a noun, to which they refer. Pronoun ambiguity
happens when it is not clear in the context to which noun a pronoun is referring.
• Structure
Antecedent is Not Clear
“It’s not clear who the pronoun HE is

referring to since it was not mentioned
in the sentence.”
Pronoun Ambiguity: Thank God he is better now. Poor boy.

Asking for Clarification: Who are you talking about, mom?
Clarifying the Ambiguity: That singer who was in a car accident last week.
331
ADVANCED 1
L E S S O N 4
External Reference is Not Clear
“It’s not clear what the pronoun THAT
is referring to since there are different
objects on the desk.”
Pronoun Ambiguity: Can you hand me that, please?

Asking for Clarification: Hand you what? The pen, the marker, the calculator, or
the stapler?
Clarifying the Ambiguity: The stapler, please.
More Than One Possible Reference
“It’s not clear what the pronoun THEY is

referring to. It could be referring either
to Michael’s parents or to the fruits.”
Pronoun Ambiguity: Michael’s parents brought us fruits. They are awesome!

Asking for Clarification: Michael’s parents or the fruits?
Clarifying the Ambiguity: Michael’s parents. I haven’t tried the fruits yet!
332
Taking the Babies to the Doctor
Wife – This is where you make a turn.
Husband – Where?
Wife – Here.
Husband – To the left or to the right?
Wife – To the right, as I’m showing.
Husband – Honey, you are in the back seat with the babies and I’m driving.
Wife – Sorry. Drop me off here. Park the car and I’m going inside to talk to them.
Husband – To the babies?
Wife – No, to the doctors. Take my purse, the baby’s bag, and the car seats and put them in the trunk.
Husband – Are you going to leave your purse in the trunk?
Wife – No, take my purse and baby’s bag and put the car seats in the trunk.
R E V I E W
EXPLAINING HOW TO DO THINGS

Take a look at some resources one uses when explaining procedures.
Verbs
Imperatives → Verb form used to give commands, but it may also be used in requests.
Modal Verbs → Used to present options, mandatory steps, and advisable steps.
Modal Expressions → Be supposed to / Be able to / Be willing to
Expressions
Sequencing steps → First, / Second, / Then / After that, / The next thing you do... / Finally,
Reminders → Remember to... / Don’t forget to... / It is important to... / It is necessary to...
Asking for clarification → What do you mean? / Come again? / I don’t get it. / Can you repeat that?
333
ADVANCED 1
R E V I E W
Let’s see how these structures work in context.
If you want to make a music record, first, have

your songs ready. Second, you should save
some money to pay for the producer and
the recording studio. Then, schedule a few
hours with the studio. Remember that each
instrument is recorded separately. You may
make a single recording with the whole band
together but that will make corrections a lot
harder. Finally, be patient and pay attention to
details during mixing and post production.
Here are the elements we have in this piece of explanation:
Imperatives: ...have your songs ready / ...schedule a few hours with the studio. /...be patient...
Modals: ...you should save some money... / You may make a single recording...
Reminders: Remember that each instrument…
Expressions that show sequence: First / Second / Then / Finally
Now, take a look at a dialogue with some other elements.
Rajit – Anya, how can I send an email to the phone company?

Anya – OK, grandpa. First, place your hands on the keyboard and enter the company’s website.
Rajit – All right.
Anya – If you have their email, you can skip this part and use your email provider. Then, after
you type in the message, you click on the send button.
Rajit – I don’t get it. Which button? Can you repeat that?
Anya – Sure, grandpa. There is a button with “send” written on it.
334
L E S S O N 5
ADVERBS
Adverbs are used to modify a verb, an adjective, or another adverb. They can express ideas of time,
frequency, place, and manner.
• Structure
Adverbs of Time
These adverbs are usually placed at the
end or in the beginning of the sentence.
I went to the movies yesterday. I’m thinking about going to the beach tomorrow.
What are you doing today? Next year, my girlfriend and I are going to get married.
Adverbs of Frequency
These adverbs are usually placed before the verb that they modify.
You are always late, Catherine. I rarely drive to work. I usually take the subway.
You need to start planning your day better.
335
ADVANCED 1
L E S S O N 5
I had never seen snow before I moved
to Boston. Now I see it all the time.
Adverbs of Place
They are usually placed at the end of sentences.
Come here! I want to show you something. Oh, man! I can’t believe I left my phone behind.
Oops, you fell down! Get up! It’s time

to try again!
Adverbs of Manner
They are usually placed at the end of the sentences. They sometimes go in mid-position.
Many adverbs of manner are formed from the adjective by adding –LY.
I haven’t been feeling well lately. My boyfriend and I simply love this show!
336
But some adverbs of manner have the same form as the adjectives.
Speak low. The children are sleeping. Don’t drive so fast. It’s dangerous.
Adverb Phrases
Groups of words, idioms or expressions can also work as adverb

phrases, expressing the idea of time, frequency, place, or manner.
I only see my cousin once in a blue moon. I see them once in a blue moon.
Idiom – Idea of Frequency Idiom – Idea of Frequency
It’s been a very long time since I traveled abroad. There’s a drugstore right across the street.
Adverb Phrase – Idea of Time Adverb Phrase – Idea of Place
Ms. Williams – Good morning, Mrs. Thompson. This is

Ms. Williams speaking, Charlie’s teacher.
Mrs. Thompson – Good morning, Ms. Williams. How are you?
Ms. Williams – I’m fine. But I’m calling to talk about Charlie.
I’ve been worried about him lately. He
used to be an excellent student. He always
answered all the questions correctly. But on
the past few days, he’s been very distracted.
Mrs. Thompson – Well, it’s probably my fault, Ms. Williams.
I’m pregnant and I’ve been told to rest
practically all the time. Charlie and I used
to do everything together, he’s probably
jealous of the new baby.
Ms. Williams – Oh, now I understand it. Don’t worry, Mrs.
Thompson. I know how to deal with that.
And congratulations on the new baby.
:: COMMON MISTAKES
INCORRECT CORRECT
I just saw late at night your message. I just saw your message late at night.
We never have been so close to each other. We have never been so close to each other.
They seemed happily. They seemed happy.
They were happy married. They were happily married.
337
ADVANCED 1
L E S S O N 5
BE GOING TO (PAST)
• Use
Be Going To (in the Past) → Used to express the idea of future from a past perspective. It refers to
plans and intentions in the past.
• Structure
Affirmative: Subject + Verb To Be in the Past + Going To + Main Verb
Negative: Subject + Verb To Be in the Past + Not + Going To + Main Verb
Interrogative: Verb To Be in the Past + Subject + Going To + Main Verb
Mark was going to meet us at the restaurant but he got stuck at work.
Past Plan or Intention
I wasn’t going to travel on the weekend, but then Nick called and convinced me to go.
I’m sorry, did I interrupt you? Were you going to say something?
Brad’s Back
Brad – Megan, how are you?
Megan – Brad! I didn’t know you were back. Last time we met you
were going to travel to Japan on business. How was it?
Brad – Yes, and I did! It was awesome. I was going to spend six
months there but we managed to finish the work earlier
so I came back after three months.
Megan – Oh! Too bad I didn’t know. I was going to call you two
weeks ago to invite you to Jim’s birthday but I ended up
not calling because I thought you were still in Japan.
Brad – I wish I could have been there. But I wouldn’t have
made it anyway. I got back two days ago.
:: STAY ALERT
Very often in spoken language, and sometimes in informal written

language, going to tends to be contracted to gonna.
I was gonna read it today. → In spoken language = informal

In written language = very informal
338
THIRD CONDITIONAL
• Use
Third Conditional → Refers to past situations that cannot be changed. Something would have
changed the past course of events, if you had done it differently.
• Structure
Third Conditional
If + Subject + Past Perfect + Complement, Subject + Would + Present Perfect + Complement
If Mark had played, we would have won the game.
Present Fact → We lost the game.

Past Condition that could have changed it → Mark playing in the team.
Is it possible to fulfill this condition and change the course of events? → No.
339
ADVANCED 1
L E S S O N 5
If you guys hadn’t helped me, I wouldn’t have understood this topic.
Present Fact → I understand the topic.
Past Condition that could have changed it → Not being helped by my friends.
Is it possible to fulfill this condition and change the course of events? → No.
College Graduation
Daughter – Mom, I can’t thank you enough for everything you have done.
Mother – There’s nothing to thank me for.
Daughter – If you hadn’t supported and encouraged me so much, I would never have made it.
Mother – Of course you would! You are an amazing girl. Even if I hadn’t been there for you,
you would have been as successful as you are today.
:: COMMON MISTAKES
INCORRECT CORRECT
If you had called, I would told you. If you had called, I would have told you.
If I have met Mary, I would have invited her. If I had met Mary, I would have invited her.
340
PAIRED CONJUNCTIONS: REVIEW

• Use
Paired Conjunctions → Used to Give Options
Used to Deny Options
Used to Add Information
Used to Sequence Ideas
• Structure
A. Giving Options
Either…or…
Frequently used before equivalent elements in a sentence.
When used before two subjects the verb agrees with the last subject.
We could visit either a museum or the historical Either Brad or Jonas is able to help you with this
city in the afternoon. Which one do you prefer? task. Ask one of them.
Whether…or…
Used before a conditional sentence in which you present options.
I don’t know whether I should stick to plan A This is one of those movies that in the end I didn’t
or go straight to plan B. know whether to laugh or to cry.
341
ADVANCED 1
L E S S O N 5
B. Denying Options
Neither…nor…
Neither the teacher nor his assistant is in the You are neither playing video games nor watching
classroom. TV. You are grounded.
C. Adding Information
Not only…but also…

Frequently used with inversion.
Both…and…
When used before two subjects the verb agrees with both subjects.
Not only is John a great professional but he is

also a great friend.
John is both a great professional and a good

friend.
Not only I but also my whole family is moving

to Chicago.
Both I and my whole family are moving to

Chicago.
342
D. Sequencing Ideas
No sooner…than…
Frequently used with inversion.
Implies the idea that one action happens immediately after another took place.
No sooner had Patricia arrived than the meeting No sooner had I washed the car than it started to
started. rain.
Talking About your Day at Work

Wife – You arrived late today, baby. What happened?
Husband – No sooner had I left the office than the system went
down. I had to go back and I was only able to leave
again twenty minutes ago.
Wife – Really? Oh my God. Is everything OK now?
Husband – Well, we managed to get it back online, but I couldn't
figure out what caused the problem. So I don’t know
whether it is going to happen again or not. Oh, and
by the way, honey, I brought neither the milk nor the
fruit you asked for.
Wife – Don’t worry, honey. I’m going out now. I can stop by
either the farmers' market or the grocery store.
:: STAY ALERT
When we talk about a condition with options, it’s advisable to use whether…or…
I don’t know whether I should stick to plan A or go straight to plan B.
However, in informal spoken language you will often hear it with if.
I don’t know if I should stick to plan A or go straight to plan B.
:: COMMON MISTAKES
INCORRECT CORRECT
We can go or to the theatre or to the movies. We can go either to the theatre or to the movies.
Both Zack and Karen are not going to the party. Neither Zack nor Karen is going to the party.
343
ADVANCED 1
L E S S O N 5
RELATIVE PRONOUNS: WHOM, WHEN, WHERE

• Use
Relative Pronouns → Used to join sentences avoiding repetition. They can replace people, things, places,
dates or ideas previously mentioned.
Whom → Refers to people (when they are the object in a sentence).

When → Refers to dates.
Where → Refers to places preceded by prepositions.
• Structure
Whom
Sentence 1: That is the new sales manager, Rachel.

Sentence 2: I met Rachel in yesterday’s meeting.
Rachel is being repeated and is the object of the second

sentence so we can join the two sentences by replacing it with
the relative pronoun WHOM.
Sentence 2
That is the new sales manager, Rachel, whom I met in yesterday’s meeting.
Sentence 1
Sentence 1: This is Scott, our web designer.

Sentence 2: You are going to work with Scott.
Scott is being repeated and is the object of the second sentence

so we can join the two sentences by replacing it with the relative
pronoun WHOM.
Sentence 2
This is Scott, our web designer with whom you are going to work.
Sentence 1
344
When
Sentence 1: Julian and I got married in 2009.

Sentence 2: I graduated from college in 2009.
The time expression in 2009 is being repeated so we can join
the two sentences by replacing it with the relative pronoun
WHEN.
Sentence 2
Julian and I got married in 2009, when I graduated from college.
Sentence 1
Where
Sentence 1: I love Buenos Aires.

Sentence 2: I lived in Buenos Aires for three years.
Buenos Aires is being repeated and is preceded by the

preposition IN so we can join the two sentences by replacing it
with the relative pronoun WHERE.
Sentence 2
I love Buenos Aires, where I lived for three years.
Sentence 1
New Branch
Anthony – Mark, this is Karen Simpson from Human
Resources. She has recently been transferred
to Dallas. Karen, this Mark Hamilton, our
lawyer, whom you should consult if you have
questions about those contracts.
Karen – Mark, hadn’t we met before in Chicago, where
I used to work?
Mark – Sure. We met last year, when I spent a few
days working there. Welcome to our Dallas
branch.
Karen – Thank you.
Anthony – Excellent!
345
ADVANCED 1
L E S S O N 5
:: STAY ALERT
Who vs. Whom
Whom is considered to be more formal than who, therefore less frequent. It can always be replaced by who.
Just pay attention to the position of the prepositions – if there’s one.
That is the new sales manager, Rachel, whom I met in yesterday’s meeting. → Formal
That is the new sales manager, Rachel, who I met in yesterday’s meeting. → Neutral
This is Scott, our web designer with whom you are going to work. → Formal
This is Scott, our web designer who you are going to work with. → Neutral
:: COMMON MISTAKES
INCORRECT CORRECT
I love Paris, where is a very romantic city. I love Paris, which is a very romantic city.
That is the man who you should talk. That is the man who you should talk to. /
That is the man to whom you should talk.
L E S S O N 6
CONNECTORS: REVIEW
• Use
Cause and Effect
Hence That’s why

Thus Because of that
As a consequence / Consequently As a result
I’ve just learned I’ll have to work on the weekend.

That’s why / Because of that I’m not going to the game
with you guys.
346
Pollution and bad public health policies have been

increasing. As a consequence, people have been suffering.
Condition
Unless If
Otherwise Whether
Take a look at these clothes and check whether Unless it rains, we are going to the park tomorrow.
you want to keep anything. Otherwise, I’ll give
them all away.
Exemplification
For example Such as

As an example Namely
Luke is a very experienced engineer. He has You should eat healthier food, for example /
worked in several countries such as Germany, namely fruits and vegetables.
England and Sweden.
347
ADVANCED 1
L E S S O N 6
Making a Formal Contrast
Despite Despite the fact

In spite of In spite of the fact
Despite / In spite of being an excellent student, Julie got a bad grade on the exam.
“Followed by a verb in the –ING form.”
Despite the fact / In spite of the fact that Julie is an excellent student, she got a bad grade on the exam.
“Followed by That + Complete Clause.”
Despite / In spite of the rumors, Tom and Maggie are still together.
“Followed by a Noun.”
Despite the fact / In spite of the fact that there were rumors, Tom and Maggie are still together.
348
Despite / In spite of the bad results, the financial manager is not going to be replaced.
“Followed by an Adjective + Noun.”
Despite the fact / In spite of the fact that the company had bad results, the financial manager is not going to be
replaced.
Wedding Anniversary
Rose – What are we going to do on our first anniversary? I’d love

to have a big party, unless you don’t feel like it.
Mike – Baby, we have barely finished paying for our wedding!
Maybe we should just have a get-together with people we
are close to, such as Liam, Claudia, our parents, and our
siblings. Otherwise, we might be a little short on money.
Rose – Honey, I think that in spite of the fact that we may have to
make an effort now, we will keep the memory forever. If life
is not meant to be celebrated, what is it for?
Mike – OK, what if we meet halfway? We have neither a big
party nor a simple get-together, but work on something in
between.
Rose – Perfect!
:: COMMON MISTAKES
INCORRECT CORRECT
Despite she is a good teacher, today’s class was not Despite the fact / In spite of the fact that she is a
very good. good teacher, today’s class was not very good.
Despite it was late, we decided to go. Despite / In spite of being late, we decided to go.
349
ADVANCED 1
L E S S O N 6
CONDITIONALS: REVIEW
Conditional Sentences → Combined clauses relating possible causes and consequences.
→ E
xpress present facts, future hypotheses, or different hypothetical outcomes for
something that has already happened.
→ Four types: zero conditional, first conditional, second conditional, and third
conditional.
Let’s review all of them.
• Zero Conditional → Facts
Structure: If-clause with verb in the Simple Present + Clause with the Simple Present
If you’re sick, you need to see a doctor.
• First Conditional → Refers to possible or likely situations in the present or future.
Structure: If-clause with verb in the Simple Present + Clause with Will, Can, May, or Be Going To
If you eat healthy during the week, you can give yourself a treat on the weekend.
• Second Conditional → Refers to present or future situations that the speaker thinks are impossible or
unlikely.
Structure: If-clause with verb in the Simple Past + Clause with Would, Could, or Might
If I didn’t have to work, I would live on the road.
350
• Third Conditional → Refers to hypothetical past situations that cannot be changed.
Structure: If-clause with verb in the Past Perfect + Clause with Would Have, Could Have, or Might Have
If Nick had taken a taxi, he could have arrived on time.
(He took the bus and arrived late. That cannot be changed now.)
:: STAY ALERT
When the If-clause comes first, you need to use a comma to split the conditional sentence.
When the If-clause comes second, you don’t use a comma to split the conditional sentence.
If I had met you before, I’d have invited you to travel with me.
=
I’d have invited you to travel with me if I had met you before.
Playing Cupid
Carly – Kevin, I have someone to introduce you to. If you go out
with her, you’ll fall in love.
Kevin – Thanks but I’m not interested.
Carly – What do you mean you’re not interested? You’ll never
find a girlfriend if you don’t go out with anyone.
Kevin – I never asked you to hook me up with anyone. If
I’d asked you to find me someone, it would be a
completely different situation. Besides, who says I’m
single?
Carly – All right.
:: COMMON MISTAKES
INCORRECT CORRECT
If I knew, I will help you. If I knew, I would help you.
If you had studied harder, you will pass. If you had studied harder, you would have passed.
If I get transferred, I would live on my own. If I get transferred, I will live on my own.
351
ADVANCED 1
L E S S O N 6
PERFECT FORMS: REVIEW

ormed by the Auxiliary Verb Have + Past Participle, each verb form
F
with a particular structure.
Perfect Forms
hows events that happened or started earlier than another moment
S
(past, present, or future).
• Present Perfect (Have/Has + Verb in Past Participle)
The speaker sees a past action from a present perspective. This past action may refer to the present
through relevance or continuity.
1. Reference of Relevance → Action that happened at any time before now and still affects the present.
The time when the action happened is rather unknown or irrelevant.
I’ve studied English in London, and that inspired me

to get a degree in Languages.
(This person is probably an English teacher in the

present, so this information is relevant now.)
The present perfect can be used with certain adverbs that will add meaning to the verb.
Have you ever studied English? (Ever → any time in your life)
Nick has already worked as a teacher. (Already → before now or sooner than expected)
Ian has just arrived from Paris. (Just → a short time before now)
Tony has never been interested in Languages. (Never → no time until now)
Sarah hasn’t graduated yet. (Yet → not before now but will in the future)
352
2. Reference of Continuity → Action that started in the past and continues up to the present.
Mary has lived in Miami since 2001.
(This action started in 2001 and is still true in the
present.)
When referring to continuity, the present perfect can be used with the following adverbs.
Nat and Sam have been married since 2005. (Since → marks the beginning of the action)
Nat and Sam have been married for ten years. (For → marks the duration of the action)
Tim has always dreamed about buying a house with a pool. (Always → 100% of the time since childhood)
• Present Perfect Continuous (Have/Has + Been + Verb in –ING Form)
The speaker refers to an action that started in the past and continues up to now, focusing on
showing the progression or continuity of such action.
Michael has been planning to move abroad.

(By using this structure, there is no doubt that Michael
started planning at some point in the past and he is
still planning it.)
353
ADVANCED 1
L E S S O N 6
The present perfect continuous might be interchangeable with the present perfect regarding actions
that continue up to the present. However, the present perfect needs contextual support.
Michael has planned to move abroad since 2005.

Michael has planned to move abroad for years.
(In both sentences, you can’t tell whether Michael has already moved abroad.)
Michael has been planning to move abroad.
(It is clear that he hasn’t moved abroad yet.)
• Past Perfect (Had + Past Participle)
The speaker looks back from the present moment to a past action that was completed before
another past action or moment in the past. We refer to it as “the past of the past.”
Abby had failed the driving test twice before she

finally passed.
(Abby has passed the test after two failed attempts.)
• Past Perfect Continuous (Had + Been + Verb in –ING Form)
The speaker looks back from the present moment to past actions that had extended
from a point in the past to another past moment closer to the present.
354
Lana had been trying to call Mike when she saw him
park his car.
(Lana made repeated attempts to call Mike then, as
she took another look, she saw him park.)
At Home
Jules – Hey, mom, listen up.
Kate – Jules, did you stop by the grocery store?
Jules – What? No…I’ve just arrived from school.
Kate – Come on! I left you a note by your computer! Didn't you
see it?
Jules – No, sorry, I didn’t.
Kate – Your dad has been bugging me for a cake. Now what?
Jules – Ask him to buy some. I’m going to Parker’s house for
the weekend, OK?
Kate – What? No…you never told me about it.
Jules – I’d been meaning to tell you before you started this
grocery store thing.
REPORTED SPEECH: INTRODUCTION

Reported Speech → You retell a story or something you witnessed.

→ You report statements, questions, and commands.
→ You can keep the verb form of the original sentence or change it.
Reporting Statements
When you retell a dialogue, you can send the verb one step into the past (backshift) or you can keep the verb
form used in the original dialogue.
Maintaining the Verb Changing the Verb (Backshift)

When the speaker retells the story on the same When the speaker retells the story days
day it happened or when the intention is to make later or when the speaker chooses to do so
the story more vivid. It is a matter of the speaker’s to emphasize that the story happened in the past.
choice.
355
ADVANCED 1
L E S S O N 6
If you opt to change, here are some backshifts you can make.
Direct Speech Reported Speech

Simple Present Simple Past
Simple Past Simple Past / Past Perfect
Present Continuous Past Continuous
Past Continuous Past Continuous or Past Perfect Continuous
Present Perfect Past Perfect
Will Would
Can Could
May Might
Must Had To
General Structure of Reported Speech
Reporting Clause (with or without a conjunction) + Reported Statement

Mary, Carl said (that) he wanted to talk to you.
(Direct Speech: Carl – I want to talk to Mary.)
Reporting Verbs
When retelling a story, there are some verbs that will help. Let’s see some of them.
Say
Mentions something specific. → Liam said he loved the party. (Direct Speech: Liam – I loved the party.)
Tell
Narrates a story or gives a command. → Benny told me about his divorce. (Direct Speech: Benny –
I’m getting a divorce.)
Ask
Reports questions. → Daniel asked me if I was tired. (Direct Speech: Daniel – Are you tired?)
Answer
Reports answers to questions. → I answered that I was tired. (Direct Speech: Leo – I am tired.)
Asking about Someone

Sam – Hey, Jake, have you seen Kim?
Jake – Yes, I have. What about her?
Sam – I haven’t seen her in such a long time. She said
she was going to move abroad.
Jake – Oh, yeah. She asked me if I wanted to go with
her.
Sam – So, what did you say?
Jake – I answered that it’s not that simple. Come on,
I’d need money and I don’t know if I want to go.
Sam – Fair enough. Well, if you see her around, tell
her to call me, please.
Jake – Will do.
356
ADVANCED 2
L E S S O N 21
FUTURE PERFECT
Future Perfect →Refers to an action or event that will be completed in a particular time in the
future before another future action or event.
Present Future 1 Future 2
By the time I get my first job, I will have already graduated from college.
What will happen first? I will graduate.

What happens next? I will get my first job.
Why did the speaker use the Future Perfect? To emphasize the relation between both points in the future
When the speaker looks back from Future 2, Future 1 will have
already happened.
• Structure
Future Perfect
Affirmative: Subject + Will + Auxiliary Verb Have + Main Verb in the Past Participle
By the end of the year, I will have already moved.
Negative: Subject + Will + Not + Auxiliary Verb Have + Main Verb in the Past Participle
By the end of the year, I won’t have moved yet.
Interrogative: Will + Subject + Auxiliary Verb Have + Main Verb in the Past Participle
Will you have already moved by the end of the year?
Presentation for the Meeting
Mr. Moore – Mrs. Harris, I’d like to review the presentation for
next week’s meeting tomorrow. Will you have
finished it by tomorrow?
Mrs. Harris – Sure, Mr. Moore. I will have finished it before
the end of the day.
Mr. Moore – Great. I appreciate it, Mrs. Harris. We’ve been
putting a lot of effort into this new project.
Mrs. Harris – I know, Mr. Moore. Next month, you will have been
fully focused on this project for a whole year.
Mr. Moore – Exactly. Next week’s meeting is extremely important.
358
:: COMMON MISTAKES
INCORRECT CORRECT
By the end of the year, I will have graduated in June. By the end of the year, I will have graduated.
MAKING A DEFINITION
• Use
What is this?
by saying what it is. by comparing to other things.
MAKING A DEFINITION
by saying what it is not. by using metaphors.
• Structure
Making a Definition: Techniques
Literal Definition → One of the most used verbs to make a definition is the verb to be. We use this verb to say
what something is or is not and we usually add function or purpose.
This is a kitchen tool called potato masher.

It is used to mash not only potatoes but
all kinds of vegetables.
359
ADVANCED 2
L E S S O N 21
This is not a potato masher. But if you don’t have
one, you can use a fork to mash potatoes.
Comparison → Used to compare what you are defining to something the listener is already familiar with. We use
the comparative or the superlative forms, and expressions such as: like, such as, similar to, the same way as.
This is a food processor. Some say it is similar

to a food mixer but it is not. It is much better
than a food mixer or even than a blender. You
use it to process food in several ways, such as
chopping, slicing, grinding and puréeing.
Metaphor → It is also a way of comparing what you are defining to something the listener is already familiar
with, but you use a word or phrase which is not literally applicable.
Cooking is like painting or writing a song. Just as

there are only so many notes or colors, there are so
many flavors. It’s how you combine them that sets
you apart.
Wolfgang Puck – Award-winning Chef and Restaurateur
Lia’s Pineapple Cake
Brett – Wow! Is this a pineapple cake?

Loren – Watch your words! This is not a pineapple
cake; this is Lia’s most craved dessert ever!
Brett – Oh, sorry!
Loren – You should be. This is the best dessert you
will ever taste in your whole life. In fact, this
is not a dessert, it is a piece of heaven!
360
PARAPHRASING
• Use
Paraphrasing → The action of repeating what was said using different words, sentences, and structures
in order to explain, simplify, or clarify a statement.
• Structure
When we paraphrase a statement, we usually introduce it by using

one of the following expressions or questions.
In other words… In plain English…

That is to say… To put it in another way…
Are you saying that…? Do you mean that…?
• Paraphrasing Yourself
I’d never thought I would be so happy in a company. In other

words, working here has really changed my perspective.
• Paraphrasing Someone Else
Ashley – So I talked to Jay yesterday and he told me he could

get two days off work next month.
Carol – Really? Are you saying that you guys will be able to
travel with us?
361
ADVANCED 2
L E S S O N 21
• Paraphrasing a Text
The Bruntland Report defines sustainability

as: “Development that meets the needs of the
present without compromising the ability of future
generations to meet their own needs.” To put it in
another way, it means that we should not wear out
resources that cannot be replaced, damaging the
environment.
Weather Forecast
Jeff – Honey, listen to the weather forecast for the weekend. It
reads here there will be “a couple of showers; otherwise,
mostly cloudy and windy.”
Lisa – So are you saying we are not going to the beach as we
had planned?
Jeff – Well, that’s probably not the best idea. But we could stay
home, cook something nice and watch some series. That
might be even more fun than the beach.
Lisa – Really? Do you mean that you would rather stay home
than go to the beach?
Jeff – Well, not exactly. In other words, what I’m trying
to say is that if life gives you lemons, make lemonade.
TALKING ABOUT THE FUTURE: REVIEW

Future → No facts but predictions that vary according to the speaker’s perception and intention.
→ There are different ways to express the future in English.
Modal Verb Will
• Predictions based on the speaker’s opinion.

• Decision made at the moment of speaking.
362
I have to go home, but I’ll have some ice cream first.
“Will” is also commonly used in expressions.
On the phone promising to return a call. – I’ll call you back. / I’ll get back to you.
When the phone or the door bell is ringing and you’ll answer it. – I’ll get it.
When you need to the leave a place briefly. – I’ll be right back.
Be Going To
• Plans for the future and predictions made based on physical evidence.
This party planner is the best in the city. Your Apparently, it’s going to rain today. Look at all those
wedding is going to be perfect. dark clouds.
Simple Present
• Actions that are part of a schedule and the speaker considers them a fact.
• The future is made clear by the use of time expressions.
Tanya teaches the ten a.m. class tomorrow. Are you coming?
363
ADVANCED 2
L E S S O N 21
Present Continuous
• Appointments, prearranged activities, and things alike.
Mrs. Glass, let’s review my schedule for tomorrow. I’m having breakfast with investors,
then back to the office, right?
Future Continuous (Will + Be + Verb in –ING)
• The speaker sees the future action as relevant and intends to emphasize this feature.
I’m afraid I can’t come to the vernissage because I will be presenting my thesis.
:: STAY ALERT
Modal verbs express meaning and not time of actions, but notice that they can refer to the future. Take a look.
Gordon – Let’s have lunch tomorrow.

Stella – I might have something at twelve p.m. Let’s confirm tomorrow.
In extremely informal writing or informal spoken language, “going to” is transformed into “gonna.”
Be careful not to use it in formal situations.
It is going to rain tomorrow. (neutral/formal) = It’s gonna rain tomorrow. (informal)
Planning a Company Function
Mrs. Flynn – Jessica, I’m meeting the board tomorrow and they’ll ask me about the venue for our balance
event. What do we have?
Jessica – Mrs. Flynn, I have the estimate for two venues by the beach, but the manager of Brewhouse
Coffee was sick and we’re going to meet tomorrow afternoon.
Mrs. Flynn – That might be a problem. Can you give me a report with all of them tomorrow by two?
Jessica – I will be meeting the manager exactly at two, but I think I’ll have the report by five p.m.
Mrs. Flynn – Right...I’ll tell you what: once you leave the meeting, call me with the price and then send me
the report.
Jessica – Deal. I’ll do it.
364
L E S S O N 2
MAKING A DEFINITION: SUBTLE OR EMPHATIC

Being Subtle or Emphatic → Depends on who you talk to and where you are.
Being Subtle or Emphatic in Definitions
• Being subtle means that you don’t make your definition in a direct way, you use softer words.
• Being emphatic means being assertive. Remember to mind your tone so you don't sound rude.
• The use of adverbs expresses the writer’s or speaker’s point of view on or upon the definition.
• A formal definition normally won’t carry adverbs.
Take a look the following dictionary definition.
School: A place where people are taught.
Now, let’s see how we can make this definition subtle

and emphatic.
Subtle → A school can be kind of like a second

home to children, a place where they learn
a lot of things.
Emphatic → A school is an extremely important place
for children and adults who want to learn.
The use of adverbs is a tool to make your definitions subtle or more emphatic.
Adverbs for Subtle Definitions Adverbs for Emphatic Definitions
A little bit Kind of Very Strongly

A bit Sort of Really Immensely
Slightly Extremely
Playing Crosswords
John – Fruit with a very sour taste. Any idea, Lana?

Lana – That seems like lemon. What are you doing?
John – Genius! I’m playing a crossword puzzle.
Lana – What’s that?
John – It’s a word puzzle that can be slightly difficult
sometimes.
365
ADVANCED 2
L E S S O N 2
MODALS + PERFECT INFINITIVES REVIEW: MUST AND SHOULD

• Use
Modals + Perfect Infinitives → In order to give modal verbs a past reference, we use modals + perfect
infinitive, such as assumptions about the past (must + perfect) and comments
about decisions made in the past (should + perfect)
• Structure
• Must + Perfect Infinitive: Assumption About the Past
It’s nine o’clock and George hasn’t arrived yet.

Something must have happened. George is never
late for meetings.
(I haven’t talked to George but I assume something

happened because George is never late.)
I can’t find my charger. I must have left it at work.
(I’m not sure I left it at work but since it was the last
place I’ve been to, I assume I left my charger there.)
• Should + Perfect Infinitive: Regret about making a decision in the past which was not the best.
You should have told me about this problem before.

We wouldn’t be in this situation right now.
(You didn’t tell me about the problem before and it

was not the best decision.)
366
Karen is in Boston? Why is she at a hotel? She

should have stayed with us.
(Karen stayed in a hotel and it was not the best
decision.)
Ricky’s Fall
Jonathan – I’ve just talked to Kelly on the phone. Little Ricky got hurt riding his bike yesterday and
she took him to the hospital, but he’s fine now.
Kimberly – What? Ricky got hurt and Kelly didn’t call me? I’m a doctor. She should have called me
right away.
Jonathan – Baby, he’s a kid, it happens. It must have been one of those silly accidents children have.
Kimberly – But still, she should have told me. I would be glad to help.
Jonathan – She must have felt uncomfortable bothering you. It was Sunday.
Kimberly – Well, one more reason she should have called me. We were home.
:: STAY ALERT
Must + Perfect Infinitive is used to make an assumption about the past. If you need to talk about a past
obligation you should use had to.
She had to finish everything in a week. → Past Obligation

It must have been hard to finish it all in a week. → Assumption About the Past
:: COMMON MISTAKES
INCORRECT CORRECT
You should had talked to me first. You should have talked to me first.
I was late because I must have had to finish the I was late because I had to finish the report.
report.
367
ADVANCED 2
L E S S O N 2
PERFECT FORMS: REVIEW

Use
Perfect Forms → Be it in the past, present, or future, Perfect Forms connect two
events or two points in a timeline either by continuity or relevance.
Continuity
Events/Points Events/Points
Relevance
Events/Points Events/Points
Structure
• Past Perfect
Past Perfect
Affirmative: Subject + Auxiliary Verb Have (in the past) + Main Verb in the Past Participle
Negative: Subject + Auxiliary Verb Have (in the past) + Not + Main Verb in the Past Participle
Interrogative: Auxiliary Verb Have (in the past) + Subject + Main Verb in the Past Participle
When Tom asked me about the report, I had already finished it.

I finished the Tom asked
report. me about
the report.
• Past Perfect Continuous
Past Perfect Continuous
Affirmative: Subject + Auxiliary Verb Have (in the past) + Been + Main Verb in –ING Form
Negative: Subject + Auxiliary Verb Have (in the past) + Not + Been + Main Verb in –ING Form
Interrogative: Auxiliary Verb Have (in the past) + Subject + Been + Main Verb in –ING Form
368
When my father retired, he had been working for the same company for twenty years.
Past Past Present

Twenty years Retirement
working at
the same
company.
• Present Perfect
Present Perfect
Affirmative: Subject + Auxiliary Verb Have (in the present) + Main Verb in the Past Participle
Negative: Subject + Auxiliary Verb Have (in the present) + Not + Main Verb in the Past Participle
Interrogative: Auxiliary Verb Have (in the present) + Subject + Main Verb in the Past Participle
Have you seen my keys? I’ve looked for them all over and I can’t find them.
Past(?) Present
Even though I looked, I don’t know where they are.
Did you see my keys at any moment before now?

I looked for them at unspecified moments in the past.
• Present Perfect Continuous
Present Perfect Continuous
Affirmative: Subject + Auxiliary Verb Have (in the present) + Been + Main Verb in –ING Form
Negative: Subject + Auxiliary Verb Have (in the present) + Not + Been + Main Verb in –ING Form
Interrogative: Auxiliary Verb Have (in the present) + Subject + Been + Main Verb in –ING Form
Joanna has been living in France for six years now.
Past Six years living in France Present
• Future Perfect
Future Perfect
Affirmative: Subject + Will + Auxiliary Verb Have + Main Verb in Past Participle
Negative: Subject + Will Not/Won't + Auxiliary Verb Have + Main Verb in Past Participle
Interrogative: Will + Subject + Auxiliary Verb Have + Main Verb in Past Participle
369
ADVANCED 2
L E S S O N 2
By the time you come back from work, I’ll have finished dinner.
Present Future 1 Future 2
I will finish You will come
dinner. back from work.
• Future Perfect Continuous
By the end of this year, Martha will have been teaching for ten years.
Present Future
Martha will complete ten years teaching.
Martha has been teaching for nine years and some months.
Stuck at the Office
Liam – Where are you? I’m waiting for you at the

restaurant. I’ve been trying to call but you never
answer.
Jen – I’m sorry, honey. I’ve just left work. Let’s see, it’s
seven ten now, I’ll be there in twenty minutes.
Liam – It means that by the time you get here I will have
been waiting for over an hour.
Jen – Honey, I’m sorry. I know we had planned to meet
at six thirty, but you know how crazy things have
been at the office lately. And today it was even
crazier. I’ll tell you everything as soon as I get there.
Don’t be mad. I love you.
:: COMMON MISTAKES
INCORRECT CORRECT
They know each other for two years. They’ve known each other for two years.
I’m working here since 2015. I’ve been working here since 2015.
I had graduated in 2010 by the time I got married I had graduated by the time I got married in 2011.
in 2011. I graduated in 2010 and I got married in 2011.
370
REPORTED SPEECH: FOCUS ON VERB FORMS

• Use
Reported Speech → Used to report to a third party what you were told. The speaker often paraphrases the
original words changing verb forms, pronouns, and time expressions.
• Structure
Changing Verb Forms
Direct Speech: “I can’t do it by myself. I need help.”
Reported Speech: Martha said she couldn’t do the job by herself and that she needed help.
371
ADVANCED 2
L E S S O N 2
Direct Speech: “I’m going to take the kids to the movies. We’ll be back at around seven p.m.”
Reported Speech: L
iam said he was going to take the kids to the movies and that they would be back at
around seven p.m.
Verb Form Changes from Direct Speech to Reported Speech
Simple Present → Simple Past

Present Continuous → Past Continuous
Present Perfect → Past Perfect
Present Perfect Continuous → Past Perfect Continuous
Simple Past → Simple Past (no change) or Past Perfect
Past Perfect → Past Perfect (no change)
Be (present) + Going To → Be (past) + Going To
Will → Would
Can → Could
May → Might
Might → No change
Should → No change
Could → No change
Would → No change
Mr. Nielsen’s Retirement

Jackie – Samantha told me Mr. Nielsen was going to retire. Did you hear?
Rachel – No, not at all. Well, he’s surely going to be missed. Everyone who
works with him says the same thing, “Mr. Nielsen is by far the best
boss I’ve ever had.”
Jackie – That’s true. Just yesterday I was talking to Peter and he told me
exactly the same thing, he said that Mr. Nielsen was the best boss
he had ever had and he also mentioned how grateful he was to
work with Mr. Nielsen.
Rachel – But if he thinks this is the right time, I’ll be glad for him.
372
L E S S O N 3
MAKING METAPHORICAL DEFINITIONS

Using a metaphor to make a definition means to define one thing by comparing it to another.
Definition of world using a metaphor:
All the world is a stage, and all the men and women merely players.
William Shakespeare
Definition of conscience using a metaphor:
Conscience is a man’s compass.

Vincent Van Gogh
Definition of religions, arts, and sciences using a metaphor:
All religions, arts and sciences are branches of the same tree.
Albert Einstein
373
ADVANCED 2
L E S S O N 3
Metaphors We Use in our Everyday Life
Time is money. Love is what makes the world go Life is like a box of chocolates.
round.
Leaving for Work
Brad –
Emma, hurry up. I have to go to work.
Time is money.
Emma –
Hold your horses, big brother. I need to finish
my make-up.
Brad –
Emma, we are going to work. You are not
going to meet Prince Charming.
Emma –
Well, who knows? Life is a box of chocolates.
MODALS + PERFECT INFINITIVES: MAY AND MIGHT
• Use
Modals + Perfect Infinitives → Used to talk about modality with a past reference. We use May/Might + Perfect
Infinitive to make possible assumptions about the past. The difference is the
degree of certainty you assume.
• Structure
Subject + May/Might + Have + Main Verb in the Past Participle + Complement
374
Mr. Coleman said he would call to give us feedback

on the meeting, but he didn’t. He might have
forgotten. Or he may have left the meeting too late
to call. That’s more likely due to the time difference
between California and New York.
I haven’t talked to Mr. Coleman, but I think
there is a slight chance that he forgot to call.
I haven’t talked to Mr. Coleman, but I think there is a

good chance that he left the meeting too late.
I’ll take King to the vet. He’s been too quiet.
He might have eaten something weird on the
street. Or he may have drunk chlorinated water
from the pool again, which is more likely.
I don’t know whether he ate it or not, but I

assume there is a slight chance that he did.
I don’t know whether he drank it or not, but I

assume there is a good chance that he did.
Lucy’s Party
Diana – Did you go to Lucy’s party yesterday? I was so

sorry I couldn’t go, it must have been great!
Claire – Yes, it was great! Everybody was there; we
just missed you and Tom.
Diana – Tom didn’t make it either? Weird, he had
mentioned he was going to go. He might
have had some kind of emergency at work.
Claire – He had told me he was coming back from a
business trip and was going to go straight to
the party. He may have missed his flight.
:: STAY ALERT
It must have been difficult to do it alone. It may have been difficult to do it alone.
It might have been difficult to do it alone.
375
ADVANCED 2
L E S S O N 3
:: COMMON MISTAKES
INCORRECT CORRECT
Mia may thought we were not home. Mia may have thought we were not home.
That was the reason she may didn’t call. Maybe/Perhaps that was the reason she didn’t call.
PASSIVE VOICE: REVIEW
• Use
Focus on the action, not on the doer:
Our house is being painted by my husband.
The report has been written by Sarah.
376
The doer is irrelevant, impossible to know, or well-known:
The meeting was canceled. → Doer is irrelevant.
The traffic sign has been damaged. → It is impossible to know the doer.
Taxes were raised. → Doer is well-known.
• Structure
Active Voice: Subject + Main Verb + Object

The board canceled the meeting.
Someone has damaged the traffic sign.
The government raised the taxes.
1. Object in the 2. Keep the auxiliary from the 4. In the past participle.
active voice. active voice if there is one.
Passive Voice: Subject of the Passive Voice + Verb To Be + Main Verb + By + Agent of the Passive
3. Conjugated in the same form as 5. Subject of the active voice

the main verb of the active voice. preceded by the preposition by.
It's optional in the passive voice.
The meeting was canceled.
The traffic sign has been damaged.
Taxes were raised.
377
ADVANCED 2
L E S S O N 3
Tomorrow's Meeting
Jonathan – The presentation for the meeting is

finished. It was revised by Sarah.
Marianne – For tomorrow's meeting? Haven't you
heard? The meeting was canceled.
Jonathan – Really? No, I didn't know that. Has a new
date been scheduled?
Marianne – No, not yet. But as soon as it's scheduled,
I'll make sure you are informed.
Jonathan – Thank you, Marianne.
:: STAY ALERT
Passive Voice is commonly used in headlines with the omission of the verb to be:
Major cities were destroyed by the hurricane. → Passive Voice Sentence

Major cities destroyed by hurricane. → Passive Voice in Headline (without verb to be)
:: COMMON MISTAKES
INCORRECT CORRECT
I was cleaned in the house. Active Voice: I cleaned the house.
Passive Voice: The house was cleaned (by me).
REPORTED SPEECH: REPORTING QUESTIONS
• Use
original words changing verb forms, pronouns, and time expressions. When reporting
questions, we should introduce the reported sentence with the verb to ask and change
the question to the affirmative form.
378
• Structure
Reporting Interrogative Form
Direct Speech: “Do you want to see a movie tonight?”
Reported Speech: Jonas asked me if I wanted to see a movie tonight.
Sentence in the AFFIRMATIVE FORM.

Include IF.
Use the introductory verb TO ASK
Direct Speech: “Mom, can you stay with the kids on the weekend?”
Reported Speech: Laura asked me if I could stay with the kids on the weekend.

Include IF.
Direct Speech: “What time do we have to be here tomorrow?”

Reported Speech: Andrew asked me what time we had to be here tomorrow.

Include the QUESTION WORD.
379
ADVANCED 2
L E S S O N 3
Tomorrow's Meeting
Wife – John, Maggie asked me if she could go to a rock concert with her friends.
I don’t know what to answer.
Husband – Well, she is fifteen now. We have to get ready for that. Who is going with her?
Wife – That’s the point, I asked her who was going to the concert and she told me
a bunch of names I’ve never heard. I also asked her where the concert was
and how they were going to go, but she had very little information.
Husband – I see…we could tell her that she can go as long as we drive her and her
friends there and then pick them up.
Wife – Excellent idea, honey!
:: COMMON MISTAKES
INCORRECT CORRECT
She asked me where were the kids. She asked me where the kids were.
He asked me when did you travel. He asked me when you traveled.
L E S S O N 4
IMPLIED MEANING: PROVERBS

Proverbs →
Repeated sayings that reflect basic truths or cultural beliefs
→ Commonly used to give advice
→ Carry implied meaning
380
Take a look at some proverbs and the meaning behind them.
• Two wrongs don’t make a right.

If someone does something bad to you, you shouldn’t do the same back.
• Don’t judge a book by its cover.

Don’t rely too much on first impressions.
• Better safe than sorry.

Do things cautiously so that you don’t regret them.
• The early bird catches the worm.

Wake up early to succeed.
• Never look at gift horse in the mouth.

If you receive a gift, be grateful and don’t question its quality.
• Too many cooks spoil the broth.

Sometimes when too many people are calling the shots, it gets confusing and there is no work done.
• Easy come, easy go.

What you get easily might as well disappear the same way.
• Don’t bite the hand that feeds you.

Don’t mistreat who help you and are by your side.
• Beauty is in the eye of the beholder.

Each person has their own idea of what beautiful is.
• The grass is always greener on the other side.

The things people have or their situations always look better than your own, even when that is not true.
381
ADVANCED 2
L E S S O N 4
Making Amends
Toby – Dude! I lost all the cash I won on the blackjack table!
Kevin – Easy come, easy go, my friend. Did you think you’d win
all the time at the slot machine?
Toby – Dude! That’s crazy. Anyway, I’ll go get some more chips,
I still have some cash.
Kevin – Toby, don’t. It’s better to be safe than sorry. Let’s get
out of here or you will clear your bank account.
MODALS + PERFECT INFINITIVES REVIEW: WOULD AND COULD
• Use
Modals + Perfect Infinitives → Used to talk about modality with a past reference. We use Would + Perfect
Infinitive to talk about past hypothesis. We use Could + Perfect to talk about a
past possibility.
• Structure
Would + Perfect Infinitive
Subject + Would + Have + Main Verb in the Past Participle + Complement
Would + Perfect is frequently used in conditional sentences with the following structure:
If + Subject + Past Perfect + Subject + Would + Have + Main Verb in the Past Participle + Complement
If you had told me John was sick, I would have told him to go home.
IF-CLAUSE. WOULD + PERFECT.
382
• Could + Perfect Infinitive
Subject + Could + Have + Main Verb in the Past Participle + Complement
Could + Perfect Infinitive is also frequently used in conditional sentences with the following structure:
If + Subject + Past Perfect + Subject + Could + Have + Main Verb in the Past Participle + Complement
If you had talked to me about this problem before, I could have helped you. Now, there’s nothing I can do, we lost the client.
IF-CLAUSE. COULD + PERFECT.
Old Friends Meeting
Tina – Brad! Oh my God! How are you?

Brad – Tina, it’s so good to see you! I’m good. And you?
Tina – I’m good too. Hey, I didn’t know you were back in town. If I had known, I would you have invited you
to my birthday party last week. It was awesome. Everybody from high school was there. It would
have been great to have you there too.
Brad – Wow! I would have loved to meet everyone. But I couldn’t have gone, I just came back two days
ago. Tell me the news. How is everyone?
383
ADVANCED 2
L E S S O N 4
:: STAY ALERT
The structures Would/Could + Perfect Infinitive can often be interchangeable.

Talking about a past hypothetical situation or a past possibility is frequently just a matter of choice.
I would have traveled with you. (Appropriate)
If I had had enough money back then,
I could have traveled with you. (Appropriate)
In some other contexts, the modal verb would will be more appropriated.
I would have called the police. (Appropriate)

If you had taken ten more minutes to arrive,
I could have called the police. (Not the best option)
:: COMMON MISTAKES
INCORRECT CORRECT
I could went there with you. I could have gone there with you.
If you had told me the children were coming, If you had told me the children were coming,
I would bake a cake. I would have baked a cake.
REPORTED SPEECH: REPORTING IMPERATIVES

Reported Speech → Reporting Statements

→ Reporting Questions
→ Reporting Commands and Orders → Imperatives
• In order to report commands and orders in the affirmative form, here’s what you have to do:
Maya – Leo, call the lawyer to get updates on the contracts.
Use the verb Told + Object + the Verb in the

Infinitive Form to start the reported speech.
Maya told Leo to call the lawyer to get updates on

the contracts.
384
• In order to report commands and orders in the negative form, here’s what you have to do:
Jackie – Lauren, don’t cross the street without looking both ways.
Use the verb Told + Object + Not + the Verb in
the Infinitive Form to start the reported speech.
Jackie told Lauren not to cross the street without

looking both ways.
*Remember that if there is time or pronoun reference, you might need to change it according to when
you retell the dialogue.
:: STAY ALERT
Imperatives can also be used to make requests. In such cases, you

won’t use the verb told in your reported speech but the verb Asked.
Lara – John, pass me the salt, please.

Reported Speech: Lara asked John to pass the salt.
In the Office
Tommy – Hey, hey, why the long face? What’s up with you?
Harry – Can you believe that Mr. Thompson asked me
to serve coffee?
Tommy – What’s the problem with that?
Harry – I got into his room to show him my project and
he was with a client. Then, he says “Mr. Potts, get
us some coffee, please.”
Tommy – What’s the problem? He was in a meeting. You
can ask Paulie to give it to him.
Harry – I’m an engineer, dude. It’s not my duty to serve
him coffee.
Tommy – You’re being ridiculous, that’s what. He didn’t
ask you to serve, just to get them some coffee.
:: COMMON MISTAKES
INCORRECT CORRECT
The teacher told me don’t be late. The teacher told me not to be late.
385
ADVANCED 2
L E S S O N 4
REPORTED SPEECH: FOCUS ON TIME AND PRONOUN REFERENCE

• Use
original words changing verb forms, pronouns, and time expressions.
• Structure
Changing Pronouns
Direct Speech: “Mark, I’ll be home at around nine p.m.”
Reported Speech: Mom told me she would be home at around nine p.m.
Direct Speech: “You shouldn’t wait for me because you have to go to bed at eight p.m.”
Reported Speech: Mom said I shouldn’t wait for her because I have to go to bed at eight p.m.
386
Changing Time Expressions
Time expressions will be changed depending on when the statement is reported.
Direct Speech: Reported Speech:
Joana is going to arrive tonight. Sam told me that Joana was going to arrive tonight.
TODAY IN THE MORNING TODAY IN THE AFTERNOON.

Joana is going to arrive tonight. Sam told me that Joana was going to arrive
last night.
YESTERDAY TODAY

Joana is going to arrive tonight. Sam told me that Joana was going to arrive last week.
Nov 2nd Nov 9th
Usual Changes
Now → Then / At that moment

Today → On that day
Tomorrow → The next day / On the following day
Yesterday → The day before
Two months ago → Two months before
387
ADVANCED 2
L E S S O N 4
Duties and Fun
Mother – Bob, did you go to the movies with your friends? What did I tell you yesterday?
Bob – You told me that I could go to the movies with my friends tonight.
Mother – Not exactly, Bob. My exact words were: “You can go to the movies with your friends
tomorrow as long as you finish your homework and clean your bedroom.”
Father – And I heard it. Your mother made it very clear that you could only go to the movies
if you did your homework and cleaned your bedroom. And it’s not clean, young man.
Bob – I’m sorry…in my defense, the homework is done.
:: COMMON MISTAKES
INCORRECT CORRECT
You told the problem was solved. You told me the problem was solved.
He said me he was going to be here at seven. He said he was going to be here at seven.
R E V I E W
HOW TO DESCRIBE, EXPLAIN, DEFEND, AND

ANALYZE AN IDEA: DEFINING BASIC CONCEPTS
388
Whenever we analyze an idea, we should describe, explain, and defend our point of view. In order to do that,
we should use different techniques.
DESCRIPTION ARGUMENTATION
IDEA
EXPLANATION NARRATION
DEFINITION
• Structure
Description
When you describe, you detail what someone or something is like.
The weather in Los Angeles is always good. It

is the entertainment capital of the world and it
receives more than 45 million tourists a year.
Explanation
An explanation is a way to describe how to do something or how something happens. It should present steps
in order.
Opening a branch in Los Angeles means that

we will first need to work on a budget for
investments and advertisement. It will take us
some time to establish the brand and gain new
customers. But once it is done, we are going to
have a significant growth.
• Definition
A definition is an explanation, phrase, or sentence that says the meaning of a word, phrase, or idea.
After all, having a business means being bold enough to take risks.
389
ADVANCED 2
R E V I E W
• Narration
A narration is a sequence of events that tells a story and describes what happened.
Don’t you remember how it was when we opened
our first bakery? We used all our money, we couldn’t
quit our regular jobs, we had to take risks. But we
believed in our potential and now we have seven
other bakeries.
• Argumentation
An argumentation is a way of forming reasons, justifying beliefs, drawing conclusions, and applying them to a
case in discussion with the aim of influencing others.
That is why I think it is about time we gave a new step. Opening a branch in Los Angeles will definitely
take our business to another level. We cannot stand still in our comfort zone.
Sedan vs. SUV
Wife – I don’t know if it’s time for us to buy a Wife – But do we have enough money?
new car, honey. Husband – Well, we could sell our car and
Husband – But think about it baby, we now then I could ask my father to lend
have a sedan. It is a family car, it us the rest of the money. Once I
accommodates five people, which start delivering for the company
is enough for our family, and it myself, in a few months we will have
works fine in the city. But it is not saved enough to pay him back.
really appropriate to go over rough (Explanation and Narration)
surfaces. (Description) Wife – I guess you are right. Getting a new
Wife – But what do you have in mind? car at the moment is not an expense,
Husband – If we get an SUV, we can still have it’s an investment. Let’s go for it.
all the benefits we have now, but I (Definition)
could also use it to make deliveries
for the company. At first it may
seem expensive, but in a few
months we can save a lot of money.
(Argumentation)
390
L E S S O N 5
BE GOING TO (PRESENT AND PAST)

• Use
Be (in the Past) Going To → It refers to plans and intentions in the past that were not accomplished.
Be (in the Present) Going To → It refers to plans for the future or predictions based on evidence.
• Structure
Whether the speaker refers to the present or to the past, the sentence structure is the same.
Affirmative: Subject + Verb To Be (Present or Past) + Going To + Main Verb
Negative: Subject + Verb To Be (Present or Past) + Not + Going To + Main Verb
Interrogative: Verb To Be (Present or Past) + Subject + Going To + Main Verb
Now, let’s compare Be Going To in the present and the past.
On Wednesday:
Anthony is going to travel with his friends next weekend.
(He has the money, he has the time, and he plans to travel in the future.)
On Friday:
Anthony was going to travel with his friends next weekend, but now he has to work.
(He planned to travel, but something happened and he won’t go anymore.)
Arranging the Kids’ Visit
Mark – Hi, Anna, are you going to do anything special with the kids this weekend?
Anna – Well, I was going to take them to a park and watch a movie. Why?
Mark – I was wondering if I could have them this weekend. It’s my nephew’s birthday.
Anna – Oh, I guess it’s all right. I thought you were going to be away for a few weeks.
Mark – I was going to visit some clients, but the company canceled the trip until
further notice. So, I’m going to pick them up tomorrow at three p.m., OK?
391
ADVANCED 2
L E S S O N 5
CONDITIONALS: REVIEW
• Use
→ Hypothesis
Conditionals → Conditions
→ Uncertain Events or Situations
• Structure
Zero Conditional
If + Simple Present + Simple Present
If you press this button, the machine starts.
First Conditional
If + Simple Present + Will
If Mark comes for dinner, I'll bake a pie.
Second Conditional
If + Simple Past + Would
If Tyler took some days off, he would be more

productive.
392
Third Conditional
If + Past Perfect + Would + Perfect
If you had played against me, you would have lost.
Modal Verb Should as Conditional
Used to suggest that something is unlikely, or not very probable.
Should + Subject + Verb + Imperative

Should you see Joana, tell her I said hi.
Should you pass by a drugstore, bring some painkillers.
Anna – Don, are you going to the supermarket later?

Don – I'll go, if you need anything.
Anna – Well, if the children come for dinner, I'll bake a strawberry pie.
So I need some strawberries just in case.
Don – No problem, I'll go there. But what if I don't find strawberries?
Anna – If you don't find strawberries, then bring me some apples, please.
Don – OK. I'll go in a minute.
:: COMMON MISTAKES
INCORRECT CORRECT
If you will eat junk food, you don't lose weight. If you eat junk food, you don't lose weight.
If you will study more, you will learn faster. If you study more, you will learn faster.
393
ADVANCED 2
L E S S O N 5
IMPLIED MEANING: JOKES

Implied Meaning → What is said in between the lines; the meaning behind the words that are said.
→ Can be understood through cultural reference, body language, and tone of voice among
other resources.
→ Commonly present in jokes and irony.
Normally based on implied meaning and cultural reference.

Aims at provoking laughter through ridicule, absurdity, and misunderstandings.
Take a look at some jokes and the meaning behind them.
Example 1
Judy – Doctor, will I be able to play the piano after the operation?
Dr. Moore – Yes, of course.
Judy – Great! I never could before!
The doctor answers responding to the results of the operation assuming the patient already
knows how to play the piano, but the patient takes it as if he’d gain a new skill.
Example 2
Why couldn't Cinderella be a good soccer player?

She lost her shoe, she ran away from the ball, and her coach was a pumpkin.
This joke plays with words and requires not only the knowledge of the meaning of the words ball
and coach but also the knowledge of the Cinderella story.
Example 3
Lilly – Meet my newborn brother.

Tess – Oh, he is so cute! What's his name?
Lilly – I don't know. I can't understand a word he says.
This joke implies that it is rather obvious that it is not the baby who will tell the name so the sibling
should know.
Example 4
Tom – When does the (English) alphabet have only 25 letters?

Leo – At Christmas time, because it is the time of Noel.
In order to understand this joke, one needs to have the knowledge of a cultural element and the
English alphabet and pronunciation. L is a letter, Noel is pronounced the same way as “No L”.
394
Example 5
This joke presents a cultural misunderstanding between a native speaker of Spanish and a speaker of
English who’s learning Spanish. When the Spanish man says it’s feminine, it refers to the word, not the fly.
However, this feature of grammar doesn’t exist in English and the Englishman thinks the Spanish one refers
to the gender of the fly, not the word itself.
:: STAY ALERT
Jokes might be offensive, like this one:
Teacher – Today, we're going to talk about the tenses. Now, if I say, "I am beautiful," which tense is it?
Student – Obviously, it is the past tense.
The student implies that the teacher isn’t beautiful anymore.
Or, they might use cultural stereotypes that can also be offensive. So, be careful when telling jokes.
Here’s a nice joke about Italians.
Jim – What do you call an Italian with his hands in his pocket?
Tony – A mute.
Italians are known for gesturing a lot while they speak.
Now, an offensive Swedish joke about Norwegians.
Martin – How do you say “genius” in Norwegian?

Samuel – Tourist.
Swedes usually refer to their fellow Scandinavian pals as being inferior in intelligence.
395
ADVANCED 2
L E S S O N 5
RELATIVE PRONOUNS: REVIEW

• Use
→ People
→ Places
Relative Pronouns → Used to refer to nouns previously mentioned → Things
→ Dates
→ Ideas
• Structure
People: Who, Whom, That
My sister, who lives in London, is coming to see us. (referring to my sister)

My sister, to whom I talked yesterday, is coming to see us from London. (referring to my sister)
My sister that lives in London is coming to see us. (referring to my sister)
Places: Where, Which
Our first stop was in San Francisco, where I met some nice people. (referring to San Francisco)
Our first stop was in San Francisco, which I simply loved! (referring to San Francisco)
396
Things: Which, That
Junk food, which is usually appealing to children, can be very unhealthy. (referring to junk food)
Even junk food that claims to have natural ingredients is bad for children. (referring to junk food)
Dates: When
Our wedding anniversary is in August, when we'll go for a second honeymoon. (referring to August)
Possession: When
That man, whose wife is pregnant, lives in my neighborhood. (referring to that man's wife)
397
ADVANCED 2
L E S S O N 5
Invitation to a Party
Emily – Hi, Will! It's Emily. Listen, it's my birthday next Saturday.
I'm throwing a party and I'd love if you and Cynthia
could come.
William – How nice, Emily! We just have to find someone that
can babysit the kids. Kelly, our neighbor, who usually
babysits for us, is not in town.
Emily – Oh, please, feel free to take the kids. I'm putting up a
kid's area where they can play. And I'm also preparing
a special menu, which will only be served to the kids.
William – That's awesome, Emily. Thank you! We'll certainly be
there.
:: COMMON MISTAKES
INCORRECT CORRECT
New York is a city where I love. New York is a city which I love.
New York is the city which I live. New York is the city where I live.
My sister, whom is a doctor, is in Africa. My sister, who is a doctor, is in Africa.
STRESS AND MEANING

Stress → Refers to how strong or weak the pronunciation of a word in a sentence or of a syllable in a word is.
Word Stress
The way you pronounce the syllables may cause two situations.
1) Stressing the wrong syllable may make the word incomprehensible.
Murray – Can you REpeat the proBLEM?

Mary – I’m sorry, I don’t understand.
398
2) Stressing the wrong syllable may confuse the listener because of another word.
DESert (arid and hot place) vs. desSERT (sweet treat after the main dish)
CONtest (a competition) vs. conTEST (to disagree)
PERmit (a license) vs. perMIT (to allow)
PROduce (fruits and vegetables) vs. prodUCE (to bring out)
REcord (a music album or a note) vs. recORD (to keep record or save sound or image)
ADdress (house location) vs. adDRESS (to speak to someone directly)
EXtract (a piece of a text) vs. exTRACT (to remove something)
Sentence Stress
A neutral sentence, preserving its original meaning, will normally be stressed as follows:
Stressed: Content words (verbs, nouns, adjectives)
Unstressed: Structural or Linking words (articles, prepositions, conjunctions, auxiliary and modal verbs)
However, speakers may choose to infer different meanings according to how they pronounce the
words in a sentence. Take a look:
Dialogue 1 → Neutral. Nick is distracted; Julia is trying to catch his attention, but in a gentle tone.

Julia – Nick, look at me.
Nick – What?
Julia – I’m talking to you.
Dialogue 2 → Nick is distracted, but seems annoyed to be called on and Julia points out she’s talking.
Julia – Nick, look at me.

Nick – WHAT?
Julia – I am talking to you.
Dialogue 3 → Julia is annoyed because Nick isn’t paying attention to her.
Julia – Nick, look at ME.

Nick – What?
Julia – I talking to YOU.
An Italian Date
Mario – Janet, after the pizza, will you have DEsert?

Janet – What?!
Mario – You are not FAT, you can have DEsert.
Janet – WHAT do you MEAN?
(Starting to show irritation)
Mario – I mean, you will love the chocolate pudding.
Janet – Oh! You mean desSERT. OK, I’ll have some.
399
ADVANCED 2
L E S S O N 6
CULTURAL ASPECTS OF COMMUNICATION

Culture provides people with different ways of interpreting the world. The things we say and do can mean
different things for different people even if they are speaking the same language.
Things we say
• Idioms and Phrases: Groups of words that combined have a different meaning from their individual
meanings.
Cross the bridge when you come to it.

Meaning: Deal with a problem only when it is necessary. Do not anticipate problems.
Once in a blue moon

Meaning: Something that happens very rarely.
• Slang Terms: Very informal language that is usually restricted to a particular context or group of people.
Buck
Slang term for the American dollar.
Booze
Slang term for alcoholic drinks.
400
• Jokes
A joke is usually a funny unreal story which makes people laugh. But very often they bring cultural elements
that are restricted a particular culture.
In order to understand why it is funny you need some cultural background information.
There is a widely famous riddle joke in English which asks: “Why did the chicken cross the road?”
The answer should be: "To get to the other side."
It is an iconic example of anti-humor known by most Americans.
• Other Aspects of Language
Tone of voice, proximity between speakers, overlapping sentences: The way we interact with others is also
culturally oriented.
Italians are known for speaking at a loud tone of voice.

Brazilians usually stand much closer to each other when talking than most cultures.
Russians usually overlap each other’s sentences and it is not a sign of disrespect.
Things we do
• Gestures: they may have different meanings in different cultures.
Thumbs up: In many countries, it is considered to be V-sign: In the U.S., this sign means both victory and
a positive sign, but in the Middle East it is considered peace. But in the United Kingdom, Australia, and
to be offensive. South Africa, if you do the same gesture facing your
hand back it is considered to be extremely offensive.
401
ADVANCED 2
L E S S O N 6
• Eye contact: Depending on your culture, eye contact or lack of eye contact is expected in some particular
situations.
In most western cultures, eye contact is expected and it shows interest and engagement in the conversation.
In middle-eastern cultures, eye contact is less common and has different rules according to gender. For
example, a woman should not make long eye contact with men.
In Asian cultures, eye contact is not considered to be essential in social interactions and, in some situations,
it is even considered to be disrespectful. For example, students are discouraged to make eye contact with
their professors.
What do you say and do, then?
It is impossible to learn the dos and don’ts of each culture. But a huge step is to acknowledge that everyone
interprets the world according to their culture. Thus, in every intercultural communication you should:
• Listen without judging.

• Confirm information.
• Not be afraid to ask what you don’t know or don’t understand.
ENGLISH AS A LINGUA FRANCA

English as Lingua Franca
First Language in the USA, Canada, Britain, Australia, New Zealand, South Africa, several Caribbean
countries, and some other territories.
Official Second Language in over seventy countries, such as Ghana, Nigeria, India, and Singapore.
402
Foreign Language in over 100 countries, such as Brazil, China, Russia, Germany, Spain, and Egypt.
Used in communications between two native speakers, a native and a non-native speaker, two
non-native speakers.
More than two thirds of the world's scientists read in English.
Three quarters of the world's mail is written in English.
80% of the world's electronically stored information is in English.
Possible Features of English as a Lingua Franca
• Dropping Third Person Simple Present • Using "no" or "yes" as Tag Questions.
He go by car. You live here, no?
She leave at seven. You want to stay, yes?
• Using "a" or "the" where native speakers don't. • Shifting patterns of preposition.
I need a information. I have to study about English.
Reading the books is good for you. I dreamed with you.
• Not using "a" or "the" where native speakers do.

I live in United States. (the United States)
To have a glimpse on the use of Englishes all over the word it’s interesting to search for articles on the web
titled “English as a Lingua Franca.” It’s an ongoing process that is happening at the very moment we are living.
There you will find examples and contexts in which they are used.
IMPLIED MEANING: STRESS AND INTONATION

Intonation
There are three main intonation patterns: flat, rising, and falling. This book represents these patterns
graphically, but keep in mind that, when speaking, you will use different intonations according to what you
mean.
1) Question with Question Words 2) Yes/No Questions

→ They usually follow a falling pattern. → They usually follow a rising pattern.
What are you doing? Are you OK?

403
ADVANCED 2
L E S S O N 6
3) Sentences in general aren’t exactly flat because you stress content words, but speakers will change it
according to their mood and intention.
If you want, you can add meaning to sentences by Highlighting the importance on the interlocutor:
changing the stress and intonation of the sentence.
Inferring surprise or irritation: Are you OK?
What are you doing?
• Intonation and implied meaning
Mother – Kids, we are having fish for dinner tonight.

Kid – I don’t like fish. → Possible Implied Meaning → The others might like it.
But I don’t. Think about me!
Mother – Nice. So, you like fish.
Kid – I don’t like fish. → Possible Implied Meaning → You misunderstood me.
Mother – What do you think about having fish for dinner?

Kid – I don’t like fish. → Possible Implied Meaning → I hate it and you know it.
Mother – So, what do you want for dinner? Fish or chicken?

Kid – I don’t like fish. → Possible Implied Meaning → So, let’s have chicken.
The Super Bowl

Tony – Baby! You’re not gonna believe this! (Can’t you see that it’s not just an ordinary
(You will believe it, but it’s very good game?)
news.) Sandra – Baby, when have I ever watched a
Sandra – Tell me. football game?
(Why are you taking so long?) (Football games are all the same for me.)
Tony – I got us tickets for Sunday! Tony – Please, stop calling it a game! If you don’t
(Getting tickets for Sunday is really want to come for the football, then come
difficult.) for the halftime show. Bruno Mars will be
Sandra – Tickets for Sunday? For the football performing.
game? (At least, acknowledge its importance.)
Really? That is the good news? Are you Sandra – Now we are talking...
sure?) (You have finally mentioned something
Tony – Wait a minute! It’s not a football game. interesting!)
It’s the Super Bowl.
404
REPORTED SPEECH: REVIEW
• Use
Santa, mommy told me I was a good girl
and that you were going to bring me a
new doll. Is it true?
Reported Speech → Used to report to a third

party what you were
told. The speaker often
paraphrases the original
words changing verb
forms, pronouns, and time
expressions.
• Structure
Verb Forms → Depending on when the sentence is reported, verb forms may or may not be changed.
Pronouns → Pronouns will always change because the speaker is different.
Time Expressions → Depending on when the sentence is reported, time expressions may or may not be
changed.
Do you guys want to go to the game next week?
Next week, we will be traveling.
TODAY IN T H E AF T E R N OON
• Reported today in the evening:
Direct Speech: “Do you guys want to go to the game next week?”
Reported Speech: Jason asked Martha and Donald if they wanted to go to the game next week.
405
ADVANCED 2
L E S S O N 6
Direct Speech: “Next week, we will be traveling.”
Reported Speech: Martha said they will be traveling next week.
• Reported two week after the dialogue took place:
Direct Speech: “Do you guys want to go to the game next week?”
Reported Speech: Jason asked Martha and Donald if they wanted to go to the game on the following week.
Direct Speech: “Next week, we will be traveling.”
Reported Speech: Martha said they would be traveling that week.
Amanda’s Surprise Party
Betty – Is everything OK for Amanda’s surprise party

tomorrow?
John – Yes, I spoke to Lisa this morning. She told me
that Tom bought some balloons and that they
are coming earlier to help us decorate.
Betty – Great. What about the drinks and cake?
John – I bought the drinks yesterday. Helen said she
was going to bake a cake and bring it here
tomorrow morning.
Betty – Nice! I called Amanda and told her she and
I should go out for some drinks. So, she is
going to come to meet here at seven-thirty
p.m.
John – Perfect. I asked everyone to be here at seven
p.m.
:: COMMON MISTAKES
INCORRECT CORRECT
Paul told he was going to help you. Paul told me he was going to help you.
Paul said he was going to help you.
Martha asked him what was he going to do that day. Martha asked him what he was going to do that day.
406
NOTES
407
IRREGULAR
VERBS
INFINITIVE SIMPLE PAST PAST PARTICIPLE
arise arose arisen
awake awoke awoken
be was/were been
bear bore borne
beat beat beaten
become became become
begin began begun
bend bent bent
bet bet/betted bet/betted
bid bid/bade bid/bidden
bite bit bitten
bleed bled bled
blow blew blown
break broke broken
breed bred bred
bring brought brought
broadcast broadcast broadcast
build built built
burn burnt/burned burnt/burned
burst burst burst
bust bust/busted bust/busted
buy bought bought
cast cast cast
catch caught caught
choose chose chosen
cling clung clung
408
IRREGULAR
VERBS
come came come
cost cost cost
creep crept crept
cut cut cut
deal dealt dealt
dig dug dug
do did done
draw drew drawn
dream dreamt/dreamed dreamt/dreamed
drink drank drunk
drive drove driven
dwell dwelt/dwelled dwelt/dwelled
eat ate eaten
fall fell fallen
feed fed fed
feel felt felt
fight fought fought
find found found
fit fit/fitted fit/fitted
flee fled fled
fling flung flung
fly flew flown
forbear forbore forborne
forbid forbade forbidden
forecast forecast(ed) forecast(ed)
forget forgot forgotten
forgive forgave forgiven
forsake forsook forsaken
409
IRREGULAR
VERBS
forswear forswore forsworn
freeze froze frozen
get got gotten
give gave given
go went gone
grind ground ground
grow grew grown
hang hung hung
have had had
hear heard heard
hide hid hidden
hit hit hit
hold held held
hurt hurt hurt
keep kept kept
kneel knelt/kneeled knelt/kneeled
know knew known
lay laid laid
lead led led
lean leant/leaned leant/leaned
learn learnt/learned learnt/learned
leap leapt/leaped leapt/leaped
leave left left
lend lent lent
let let let
lie lay lain
light lit/lighted lit/lighted
lose lost lost
410
IRREGULAR
VERBS
make made made
mean meant meant
meet met met
mislay mislaid mislaid
mistake mistook mistaken
pay paid paid
put put put
quit quit quit
read read read
rend rent rent
ride rode ridden
ring rang rung
rise rose risen
run ran run
saw sawed sawn/sawed
say said said
see saw seen
seek sought sought
sell sold sold
send sent sent
set set set
shake shook shaken
shed shed shed
shine shone shone
shoe shod shod
shoot shot shot
show showed shown
shrink shrank shrunk
411
IRREGULAR
VERBS
shut shut shut
sing sang sung
sink sank sunk
sit sat sat
slay slew slain
sleep slept slept
slide slid slid
sling slung slung
slink slunk slunk
smell smelt/smelled smelt/smelled
speed sped/speeded sped/speeded
speak spoke spoken
spell spelt/spelled spelt/spelled
spend spent spent
spill spilt/spilled spilt/spilled
spin spun spun
spit spat spat
split split split
spoil spoilt/spoiled spoilt/spoiled
spread spread spread
spring sprang sprung
stand stood stood
steal stole stolen
stick stuck stuck
sting stung stung
stink stank/stunk stunk
strew strewed strewn
stride strode stridden
412
IRREGULAR
VERBS
strike struck struck
string strung strung
strive strove striven
swear swore sworn
sweep swept swept
swing swung swung
swim swam swum
take took taken
teach taught taught
tear tore torn
tell told told
think thought thought
throw threw thrown
thrust thrust thrust
tread trod trodden
understand understood understood
undertake undertook undertaken
upset upset upset
wake woke woken
wear wore worn
weave wove/weaved woven/weaved
weep wept wept
wet wet wet
win won won
wind wound wound
withdraw withdrew withdrawn
wring wrung wrung
write wrote written
413
414
NOTES
NOTES
415
416
NOTES
NOTES
417
418
NOTES

Guia de linguagem para aprender inglês

Enviado por

Dados do documento

Título original

Direitos autorais

Formatos disponíveis

Compartilhar este documento

Compartilhar ou incorporar documento

Opções de compartilhamento

Você considera este documento útil?

Este conteúdo é inapropriado?

Direitos autorais:

Formatos disponíveis

Guia de linguagem para aprender inglês

Enviado por

Direitos autorais:

Formatos disponíveis

O material didático é de uso exclusivo e restrito ao processo didático-pedagógico do aluno: Felipe Augusto Guglielmin | CPF 45581475890

Mylene Guedes e Natasha Nunes

Fátima Machado e Amanda Campos

Edu Rocha, Felipe Ceschin, Gilliatt Moreira

Estúdio Pinta Giribita

Bruna M. Fraga, Deborah Naomi Kosaka,

Deborah Naomi Kosaka e Willian Lopes

Patrícia Figuerôa Knack

Flávio Augusto da Silva

Natali Glado / Shutterstock.com

Subject + Verb To Be + Adjective → Liam is handsome.

SH ORT VS. TAL L HA N DSOME/BEAUTI FUL UGLY/HORRI BLE

FAT CHUBBY THI N

N O R M AL /OR D IN ARY W E IR D/STRA N GE A RROGA N T/PROUD HUMBLE/MODEST

Talking About a New Co-worker

Phil – Hey, Alex, do you know the new accountant?

The client wants:

A Before consonant sounds

AN Before vowel sounds

Mike has a car. Laura is an organized student.

Nick and Sarah are students. → Plural, so no indefinite article is used.

Kate – Oh my God, it’s raining!

Paul – Michael, what time is the meeting?

GREETINGS AND FAREWELLS

Good morning. Good afternoon. Good evening.

VERB TO BE + SUBJECT PRONOUNS

Location (Permanent Feelings (Permanent Descriptions

Let’s check the use of the verb to be with subject pronouns.

Affirmative Negative Interrogative

I am/I’m a teacher. I am not/I’m not Scottish. Am I in London?

This is Mark. (close) These are English books. (close)

At a Birthday Party Looking at the View At the Bakery

QUESTION WORDS: WHO AND WHAT

Who → Questions about people

Who + Is/Are + Subject Pronouns?

Who are you? I am Peter. Who is she? She is Sheila.

What → Questions about objects and things in general

What + Is/Are + Demonstrative Pronouns?

What are these?

VERB TO BE: REVIEW

Let’s review the verb to be in the simple present.

I am Richard. I am not/I’m not tired. Am I OK?

Age: I am 34 years old. Location (Temporary or Permanent):

Feeling (Temporary or Permanent): Description: Jack is athletic.

In a Meeting with a New Client

I’m not a teacher. → informal or speaking

• To have = To eat / To drink

We have breakfast at seven a.m. Michael has coffee for breakfast.

Affirmative and Negative Forms

I have a dog. I do not (don’t) have a dog.

Talking about Pets Physical Description

Tom – Do you have pets? Mike – Is your girlfriend blonde?

GREETINGS AND FAREWELLS

Greetings can be formal, neutral, or informal.

Good morning Good afternoon Good evening

Neutral Greetings: Informal Greetings:

Farewells can also be formal, neutral, or informal.

• Formal Farewells → used in formal situations

QUESTION WORDS: HOW OLD

The difference among these people is their age.

I’m sixteen years old.

I’m thirty-two years old. We are seventy and

Question about age: Possible answers:

Kate – Oh my God, it’s raining!

Paul – Michael, what time is the meeting?

• Verb To Have → used to indicate possession or as a synonym to verbs to eat or to drink

John – Pam, do you want to have dinner and watch